United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
&EPA
Office of
Administration and
Resources Management (2304)
July 2004
EPA FACILITIES MANUAL, VOLUME 2
Architecture and
Engineering Guidelines
Printed on Recycled Paper
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Foreword
Foreword
The EPA Facilities Manual is comprised of four distinct, yet complementary resources for planning and managing
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) facilities. These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to
determine design intent, requirements, and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities. The use of one volume
without reference to the other three would result in an incomplete understanding of the requirements for EPA
facilities.
Volume 1: The Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines contain information on space planning, space
estimation, environment, materials, furniture, process, and maintenance. EPA's Office of
Administration and Resources Management developed this document to help EPA facilities managers,
space managers, and line personnel plan and use their space.
Volume 2: Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (referred to as the A&E Guidelines) provide guidance for
facilities management, engineering, planning, and architecture professionals in the design and
construction of new EPA facilities and the evaluation of existing facilities.
Volume 3: The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health Requirements
outlines safety and health considerations for owned or leased EPA facilities. The Manual's goal is to
maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against injury, illness, and loss of life.
Volume 4: The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Environmental Management
Guidelines, establishes environmental specifications to be addressed by designers and managers of
EPA facilities and related building systems.
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Table of Contents
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
CONTENTS
Introduction
1 - General Requirements
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Facility Design Process
1.1.2 Design Principles
1.2 Pre-Design Process
1.3 Design Submittals
1.3.1 15 Percent Submittal
1.3.2 35 Percent Submittal
1.3.3 60 Percent Submittal
1.3.4 95 Percent Submittal
1.3.5 100 Percent Submittal
1.4 Design Considerations
1.4.1 General
1.4.2 Environmental Design Requirements
1.4.3 Expansion and Flexibility
1.4.4 Aesthetics
1.4.5 Interaction
1.4.6 Amenities
1.4.7 Handicapped Access
1.4.8 Exterior Building Materials
1.4.9 Confined Spaces
1.5 Structural Design Requirements
1.5.1 General
1.5.2 Calculations
1.5.3 Loads
1.5.4 Structural Systems
1.6 Architectural Requirements
1.6.1 Laboratory Zone
1.6.2 Administrative-with-Support Zone
1.6.3 Building Support Zone
1.7 Special Room/Space Requirements and
Concerns
1.7.1 Restrooms
1.7.2 Janitor Closets/Custodian Space
1.7.3 Shop Facilities
1.7.4 Library
1.7.5 Chemical Storage
1.7.6 General Storage
1.7.7 Food Service
1.7.8 Outside Research Facilities
1.7.9 Fire Department Access
1.8 Security
1.8.1 Entrance Requirements
1.8.2 Access and Egress
1.8.3 Exterior Spaces
1.9 Quality Assurance/Quality Control
1.10 Commissioning Requirements
2 - Site Work
2.1 Scope of Project
2.1.1 General
2.1.2 Development Codes
2.2 Site Influences
2.2.1 Land Resources
2.2.2 Transportation Systems
2.2.3 Environmental Considerations
2.3 Site Investigations
2.3.1 Site Surveys
2.3.2 Site Evaluation
2.3.3 Geotechnical Investigation
2.3.4 Groundwater Investigation
2.4 Site Development
2.4.1 Surveying
2.4.2 Site Planning and Design
2.4.3 Facility Siting
2.4.4 Site Preparations
2.4.5 Dewatering
2.4.6 Shoring and Underpinning
2.4.7 Earthwork
2.4.8 Waterfront Construction
2.5 Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements
2.5.1 General
2.5.2 Professional Qualifications for Site
Design
2.5.3 General Site Requirements
2.5.4 Hardscape Requirements
2.5.5 Recreational Requirements
2.5.6 Irrigation
2.6 Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement
2.6.1 Access and Circulation
2.6.2 Parking and Loading Facilities
2.6.3 Pedestrian Access
2.6.4 Airports and Heliports
2.7 Stormwater Management
2.7.1 Street Drainage
2.7.2 Watershed Development
2.7.3 Erosion and Sedimentation Control
2.7.4 Stormwater Retention and Detention
2.7.5 Conveyance
2.7.6 Stormwater Quality
2.7.7 Floodplain and Wetlands
Development
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Table of Contents
2.7.8 Coastal Development
2.8 Utilities and Support Services
2.8.1 Water Distribution System
2.8.2 Wastewater Collection Systems
2.8.3 Natural Gas Distribution Systems
2.8.4 Electrical Distribution Systems
2.8.5 Telecommunications Systems
2.8.6 Solid Waste Collection Systems
3 - Concrete
3.1 General Requirements
3.1.1 Design and Construction
3.1.2 Codes
3.1.3 Use of Coal Fly Ash in Concrete
3.2 Concrete Formwork
3.3 Concrete Reinforcement
3.3.1 Reinforcement Materials
3.3.2 Reinforcement Details
3.4 Cast-in-Place Concrete
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Materials, Testing and Quality Control
3.4.3 Tolerances
3.4.4 Selecting Proportions for Concrete
Mixes
3.4.5 Mixing, Transporting and Placing
3.4.6 Climatic Considerations
3.4.7 Post-tensioned Concrete
3.5 Precast/Prestressed Concrete
3.5.1 Structural
3.5.2 Architectural
3.6 Cementitious Decks for Building
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Materials, Design and Construction
3.7 Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
3.8 Concrete Inspection and Testing
4 - Masonry
4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 Design and Construction
4.1.2 Codes and Specifications
4.2 Mortar and Grout
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Mortar
4.2.3 Grout
4.3 Unit Masonry
4.4 Masonry Accessories
4.5 Masonry Inspection and Testing
4.5.1 Special Inspection
5- Metals
5.1 General requirements
5.2 Structural Steel
5.3 Steel Joists
5.3.1 Codes and Specifications
5.3.2 Intended Use
5.3.3 Support of Vibrating Equipment
5.4 Steel Decks
5.5 Miscellaneous Metals
5.5.1 Definition
5.5.2 Codes and Specifications
5.6 Light-Gauge Steel
5.7 Preengineered Metal Buildings
5.7.1 Codes and Specifications
5.7.2 Loads
5.8 Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1 General Requirements
6.2 Partitions
6.2.1 Ceiling-High Partitions
6.2.2 Wood Stud Partitions
6.2.3 Less-than-Ceiling-High Partitions
6.3 Use of Wood and Plastic
7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.1 General Requirements
7.2 Design Characteristics
7.3 Thermal Resistance
7.4 Moisture Transport
7.5 Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
7.5.1 Panel and Curtain Walls
7.5.2 Spandrel Wall
8 - Doors and Windows
8.1 Doors
8.1.1 General
8.1.2 Exterior Doors
8.1.3 Interior Doors
8.1.4 Fire Doors
8.2 Windows
8.2.1 General
8.2.2 Fixed Window Systems
8.2.3 Safety of Storefront and Curtain Wall
Systems
8.2.4 Window Height
8.2.5 Glazed Panels in Interior Partitions
and Walls
8.3 Permanent Window Coverings
8.3.1 General
8.3.2 Sun Shading
8.3.3 Security
9 - Finishes
9.1 Interior Finishes
9.1.1 Trim and Incidental Finishes
9.1.2 Final Finishing Material
9.1.3 Airspace
9.1.4 Combustible Substances
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Table of Contents
9.2 Wall Materials
9.2.1 Wall Finishes
9.2.2 Wall Covering and Finishes
9.3 Finished Ceilings
9.3.1 General
9.3.2 Ceilings Not Along Exit Path
9.3.3 Ceiling s Alon g Ex it Path
9.3.4 Ceiling Finishes
9.3.5 Open Ceilings
9.4 Floor Treatments
General
Carpet
Resilient Tile
Seamless Vinyl Flooring
Ceramic Tile Flooring
Special Flooring
Exposed Concrete Flooring
General
Reflectance Values
Wall and Ceiling Colors
Accent Areas
Lead-Based Paint
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.5 Painting
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.6 Window Covering
9.6.1 Blinds
9.6.2 Blackout Shades
9.6.3 Draperies and Curtains
10 - Specialties
10.1 Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and
Tack Boards
10.2 Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
10.2.1 General
10.2.2 Door Identification
10.2.3 Room Numbering
10.2.4 Building Directory
10.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers
10.3.1 Fire Extinguisher Locations
10.4 Laboratory Casework
10.4.1 General
10.4.2 Cabinet Assemblies
10.4.3 Base Cabinets
10.4.4 Wall Cabinets
10.4.5 Shelving
10.4.6 Vented Storage Cabinets
10.4.7 Countertops
10.4.8 Laboratory Fume Hoods
10.4.9 Environmental Rooms
11 - Equipment
11.1 Design
11.2 Catalog Cut Sheets
11.3 Layout and Clearances
11.4 Floor Preparation
11.5 Structural Support
11.6 Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
11.7 Equipment Specifications
11.8 High-technology equipment
11.9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
11.10 Equipment Consultants
12 - Furnishings
12.1 Furnishings
13 - Special Construction
13.1 Noise Control
13.1.1 Vibration Insulation
13.1.2 Piping and Ducting Systems
13.1.3 Sound Dampening
13.2 Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
13.2.1 FireWalls
13.2.2 Fire Barrier Walls
13.2.3 Openings
13.3 Vertical Opening and Shafts
13.3.1 Atriums
13.3.2 Shafts
13.3.3 Monumental Stairs
13.3.4 Escalators
13.3.5 Penetrations
13.4 Fire Protection
13.4.1
13.4.2
13.4.3
13.4.4
13.4.5
13.4.6
General
Water Supplies
Size and Zoning
Systems
Operation
Codes
14 - Conveying Systems
14.1 General
14.2 Elevators
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
14.2.5
14.3 Escalators
Elevator Recall
Smoke Detectors
Capture Floor
Signage
Chemical Transport Use
15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.1 General
15.2 References
15.3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning
Design Criteria
15.3.1 General
15.3.2 Ve ntilation R equ ireme nts
15.3.3 Equipment Design Temperatures
15.3.4 Equipment Sizing
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Table of Contents
15.3.5 Load Calculations
15.3.6 Waste Heat Recovery
15.3.7 Energy Efficiency
15.4 Automatic Control Systems
15.4.1 General
15.4.2 Humidity Control
15.4.3 Simultaneous Heating and Cooling
15.4.4 Mechanical Ventilation Control
15.4.5 Energy Conservation Control Schemes
15.4.6 Automatic Control Dampers
15.4.7 Variable-Air-Volume Systems Fan
Control
15.4.8 Fire and Smoke Detection and
Protection Controls
15.4.9 Gas-Fired Air-Handling Unit Control
15.4.10 Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled
Condenser System Controls
15.4.11 Central Controls and Monitoring
Systems
15.4.12 Energy Metering
15.4.13 DDC Hardware Requirements
15.4.14 DDC Software Requirements
15.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning
Systems
15.5.1 General
15.5.2 Air-Conditioning Systems
15.5.3 Water Chillers
15.5.4 Condensers/Condensing Units
15.5.5 Cooling Towers
15.5.6 Building Heating Systems
15.5.7 Heating Equipment
15.5.8 Two-Pipe Combination heating and
Cooling Systems
15.5.9 Water Distribution Systems
15.5.10 Pumps and Pumping Systems
15.5.11 Steam Distribution Systems
15.5.12 Air-Handling and Air Distribution
Systems
15.5.13 Fans/Motors
15.5.14 Coils
15.5.15 Walk-In Environmental and Cold
Storage Rooms
15.5.16 Central Plant Heat Generation and
Distribution
15.6 Ductwork
15.6.1 General
15.6.2 Fabrication
15.6.3 Access Panels
15.6.4 Insulation
15.6.5 Fire Dampers
15.7 Laboratory Fume Hoods
15.7.1 Laboratory Control Design
Considerations
15.7.2 Hood Requirements
15.7.3 Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume
Hood
15.7.4 Variable-Air-Volume (VAV) Hoods
15.7.5 Radioisotope Hoods
15.7.6 Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods
15.7.7 Special Purpose Hoods
15.7.8 Horizontal Sashes
15.7.9 Noise
15.7.10 Exhaust System
15.7.11 Effluent Cleaning
15.8 Other Ventilated Enclosures
15.8.1 Glove Boxes
15.8.2 Biological Safety Cabinets
15.8.3 Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets
15.9 Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems
15.9.1 Dry Filtration
15.9.2 Absolute Filtration
15.9.3 Air-Cleaning Devices for Special
Applications
15.9.4 Operation
15.9.5 Maintenance Access
15.9.6 Location of Air Intake
15.9.7 Air Flow Characteristics Study
15.10 Plumbing
15.10.1 General
15.10.2 Water Supply
15.10.3 Drain, Waste and Vent Lines
15.10.4 Backflow Preventers
15.10.5 Safety Devices
15.10.6 Laboratory Safety Devices
15.10.7 Laboratory Service Fittings
15.10.8 Glassware Washing Sinks
15.10.9 Centralized Laboratory Water Systems
15.10.10 Drinking F ountains
15.10.11 Toilet Facilities
15.10.12 Shower Stalls
15.10.13 Hose Bibbs
15.10.14 Water Conservation Elements and
Techniques
15.10.15 Single Pass Cooling
15.11 Acid Neutralization System
15.12 Laboratory Gases and Processed Piping Systems
15.12.1 Nonflammable and Flammable Gas
Systems
15.12.2 Compressed-air Systems
15.12.3 Vacuum Systems
15.13 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning
15.13.1 Co ntracto r Requirements
15.13.2 Scope of Work
15.1 3.3 Testing and Balancing Procedures
15.1 3.4 Testing and Balancing Devices
15.13.5 Reporting
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Table of Contents
15.4 Commissioning
16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1 General
16.1.1 Code Compliance
16.1.2 Electrical Installations
16.1.3 Energy Conservation in Design
16.1.4 Coordination of Work
16.1.5 Power Factors
16.1.6 Handicapped Accessibility
Requirements
16.1.7 Materials and Equipment Standards
16.1.8 Env ironm ental R equ ireme nts
16.2 Primary Distribution
16.2.1 Ductbanks and Cable
16.2.2 Switches
16.2.3 Overhead Power Supply Lines
16.2.4 Transformers
16.2.5 System Redundancy
16.3 Service Entrance
16.3.1 Overhead Services
16.3.2 Underground Services
16.3.3 Service Capacity
16.3.4 Metering
16.3.5 Service Entrance Equipment
16.4 Interior Electrical Systems
16.4.1 Basic Materials and Methods
16.4.2 Conductors
16.4.3 Raceways
16.4.4 Neutral Conductor
16.4.5 Panelboards and Circuit Breakers
16.4.6 Motor Controllers and Disconnects
16.4.7 Grounding
16.4.8 Laboratory Power Requirements
16.5 Interior Lighting Systems
16.5.1 Illuminance Levels
16.5.2 Lighting Controls
16.5.3 Lamps and Ballasts
16.5.4 Emergency Lighting (Generators and
Battery Units)
16.5.5 Energy Conservation
16.5.6 Glare
16.5.7 Automatic Data Processing Areas
16.6 Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
16.6.1 Mounting
16.6.2 Fluorescent Fixtures
16.6.3 Light Diffusers
16.6.4 Location
16.7 Exterior Lighting Systems
16.7.1 General
16.7.2 Parking Lot Lighting
16.7.3 Building Exterior Lighting
16.7.4 Traffic Control Lighting
16.7.5 Roadway Lighting
16.7.6 Exterior Electric Signs
16.8 Emergency Power System
16.8.1 General
16.8.2 Emergency Loads
16.8.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply
16.9 Lighting Protection Systems
16.9.1 Minimum Scope
16.9.2 Additional Scope
16.9.3 Master Label
16.10 Seismic Requirements
16.10.1 Seismic Review
16.11 Automatic Data Processing Power Systems
16.11.1 Computer Power
16.11.2 Non-UPS/PDU Outlets
16.11.3 Lighting
16.11.4 Grounding
16.12 Cathodic Protection
16.12.1 Investigation and Recommendation
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways,
Enclosures)
16.13.1 Corrosive Atmosphere
16.13.2 Saltwater Atmosphere
16.13.3 Extreme Cold
16.14 Communication Systems
16.14.1 Telecommunications/Data Systems
16.14.2 Video Conference Rooms
16.14.3 Recording Systems
16.14.4 Satellite Dishes
16.14.5 Television Broadcast Systems
16.14.6 Microwave Communications
16.14.7 Other
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems
16.15.1 Fire Alarm Systems
16.15.2 Safety Alarm Systems
16.15.3 Security Systems
16.15.4 Disaster Evacuation Systems
16.1 5.5 Exit Lighting and Markings
16.16 Commissioning
APPENDICES
Appendix A: Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
Reference Standards, Trade
Organizations, and Guides
Appendix B: Commissioning Guidelines
1.1 Definition of Commissioning
1.1.1. Description of the Process
1.1.2. Selection of Commissioning Authority
1.1.3. EPA Property (Owned and Leased)
Commissioning
1.2 Commissioning Process
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Table of Contents
1.2.1. Pre-Design Phase
1.2.2. Design Phase
1.2.3. Bidding/Contract Negotiation Phase
1.2.4. Construction Phase
1.2.5. Warranty Review and Seasonal
Testing
1.2.6. Final Commissioning Report
1.2.7. O&M Staff Training and
Documentation
1.2.8. Commissioning Process Matrix
1.3. Preventive Operation and Maintenance Program
1.4 Retro Commissioning and Continuous
Commissioning
1.5 Commissioning and LEED Building Rating
1.6 Definitions
Appendix C: Room Data Sheets
Appendix D: Abbreviations and Acronyms
INDEX
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Introduction
Introduction
PURPOSE
The Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (hereafter referred to as either the A&E Guidelines or this Manual) are
a compilation of standards and guidelines to be used in the design and construction of new Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) facilities (including additions and alterations) and the evaluation of existing facilities. This Manual
shall be used in conjunction with the Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual (the Safety Manual}
as the basis for the Program of Requirements (POR) and Solicitation for Offers (SFO). This Manual is also intended
to be used, with the concurrence of EPA, to develop construction documents for public bidding and/or the award of
construction contracts to meet relevant building code and EPA facilities requirements.
The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish a consistent, Agency-wide level of quality and excellence in the
planning, design, and construction of all EPA facilities projects. It is not intended to deter use of more stringent or
greater performance criteria for design. Project-specific design and construction requirements that are not in conflict
with the requirements of this document should be met in developing the final program. The generic information and
requirements described herein must be verified and further defined and refined.
USE OF THIS MANUAL
This Manual does not relieve the architects, engineers, and consultants of any of their responsibilities as design
professionals. It is intended only to clarify and supplement existing codes and requirements to facilitate the design
process for the design professional and the offerer. The architect, engineers, and consultants who will be involved in
the design of an EPA-occupied laboratory, office, or storage facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields of
expertise and shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all portions of
the project comply with all established applicable codes, regulations, and practices for laboratory facilities, as well as
with this Manual.
Citations of standards, codes, or references within this Manual should be assumed to refer to the most current
edition. Years and publication dates specifically stated in the Manual reflect the version in use when the Manual was
written and published. When using this Manual, the user should verify that the documents referenced are the most
current and have not been superseded.
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
This document is generally organized according to the Masterformat, published by the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI). The 16-section format should be familiar to many in the fields of architecture, planning, engineering,
and construction. When used throughout this Manual, the term "new construction" shall be understood to include
additions and alterations to existing buildings.
The paragraphs in each section of this Manual are considered to be subsections and are identified by a hierarchical
numbering system. When a paragraph is not numbered, it should be considered part of the preceding subsection.
When subsections from this Manual are used in the project-specific manual, the subsections shall have the same
numbers that they have in this Manual. Because the subsections of the project-specific manual are not renumbered,
the project-specific manual can be directly compared and referenced to subsections in this generic Manual. When
subsections from this Manual are not used, those numbers are omitted from the project-specific manual. As an
alternative, the project-specific manual may contain all subsection numbers from this Manual, with the notation "this
subsection not used" inserted after those numbers not included in the project-specific manual.
END OF INTRODUCTION
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 FACILITY DESIGN PROCESS
This section presents EPA generic space requirements, identifies the types of spaces anticipated for the
various functions of an EPA facility, identifies general technical requirements, and gives general guidance
for actual layout. The design professional must work in close coordination with EPA to produce the final
building layout in accordance with this document and the guidance gained through consultation with EPA.
Appropriate local, state, and federal regulatory agencies shall also be consulted.
1.1.2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES
The design of EPA facilities shall follow the following general principles:
The design of any proposed EPA facility shall meet the specified program requirements while being
functional and flexiblecapable of keeping pace with the changes that are continually occurring in
EPA programs.
EPA facilities shall comply with the requirements of this Manual, relevant national, state and local
codes, and GSA's Public Building Service guideline PBS-P100.
The facility design must provide a high degree of energy efficiency and demonstrate sustainable design
principles.
1.2 Pre-Design Process
The pre-design process for EPA facilities, including space acquisition and planning requirements, is
generally discussed in Volume 1 of the EPA Facilities Manual. The pre-design process will generate
various planning documents, studies, evaluations, and reports. The results and conclusions of these
documents shall be properly addressed and incorporated into the facility design and construction phases of
the project. The following considerations will be defined during the facility planning phase of the project
and will be included in documents for guidance to the design professional.
A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so
composed.
An overview of each component of the facility or campus
A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the
project and how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory
A brief overview of the scope of the specific project requirements
A brief description of the facility concept (i.e., number of floors, floor area, number of
laboratories/special spaces, offices, location of site, acreage, characteristics)
An environmental design intent document, which identifies the sustainable design goals and initial
concepts. Gather typical meteorological year (TMY) data.
A general description of the various facility spaces and area requirements to be utilized during the
design of the facility and also the pertinent area requirements for the exterior areas of the project.
Quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and space identification and sizes
Room data sheets for all facility spaces developed in accordance with the requirements of Volume 1,
Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines and Appendix C of this volume (for laboratories). The
room data sheets must indicate specific room or laboratory requirements and identify appropriate
installed equipment.
Preliminary scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.
1-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
The design professional will be responsible for ensuring that the facility final design conforms to the
specifications outlined in the planning phase documents and this Manual.
1.3 Design Submittals
The A-E shall submit required construction drawings, specifications, cost estimates, and design
analyses/calculations to EPA-FMSD at interim stages of development. Not all projects will require
submission at each of the stages indicated below; applicable submittals for each project shall be specifically
indicated in the Solicitation for Offers (SFO) and/or Program of Requirements (FOR). If submittals are
found to be unacceptable at any stage, the A-E shall revise and resubmit them at no additional cost to EPA.
1.3.1 15 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
This schematic submittal stage is required on complex projects and/or where architectural design elements
require coordination with interior design development or development of exterior design considerations.
The 15% submittal ensures that the A-E demonstrate an understanding of the scope of the project and
adherence to project criteria, formats, and conventions. At this stage, the A-E will submit, for example:
Vicinity plan showing existing and new topography and utilities, access roads, extent of parking and
site circulation, and relationships to other buildings
Photographs of the site and surroundings.
Single line floor plans showing all walls, openings, rooms and built-in features
Facility organization plans and/or sections, showing main circulation paths and the locations of shared
and specialized spaces.
Building sections and typical wall sections showing floor-to-floor heights
Exterior elevations showing fenestration and exterior building materials
Space tabulation by room indicating net square footage, architectural treatment, and utilities
Environmental design plan, including energy goals and strategy for achieving LEED Certification
under the U.S. Green Building Council program (see 1.4.2.1).
Energy model baseline simulations.
Cost estimate reflecting the cost of the intended project and the cost of alternate schemes/solutions
presented, including the cost for providing expansion contingency
Code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
Credentials of proposed Commissioning Authority.
1.3.2 35 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
The 35% submittal includes design development documents and supporting design calculations to clearly
show the adequacy of project design and functional arrangements. This submittal includes, for example:
Site development plans delineating all buildings in the area, proposed parking locations, roads,
sidewalks, curbing, fencing, landscaping, storm drainage, and routing of water, sewer, gas, and other
utilities
Architectural plans showing complete functional layout, room designations, critical dimensions, all
columns, and built-in equipment for each building section
Analysis of LEED Certification potential, with checklist identifying the points to be sought and the
strategies and steps necessary to achieve them. Energy-model report and recommendations.
Life safety plans showing fire subdivisions and fire separation ratings throughout the building
Preliminary furniture layouts for conference rooms, libraries, and similar spaces
Mechanical plans delineating proposed layout of systems, location and preliminary arrangements of all
major items of mechanical equipment, and basic outline of control system requirements (materials,
methods, and sequence of operation)
Plumbing plans showing proposed fixture locations and basic riser diagrams
1-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
Electrical plans showing proposed electrical service and distribution array (preliminary one line
diagram), lighting fixture patterns, and receptacle locations
Preliminary riser diagram for communication and fire alarm systems
List of applicable specifications for all materials, types of work, and architectural, structural, and
mechanical systems
Itemized cost estimates identifying all intended work
Basis of Design Report
Final scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.
1.3.3 60 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
The 60% submittal includes contract documents and supporting materials that clearly show the development
of the project at the 60% stage. The objective is to provide EPA with sufficient drawings, cost estimates,
and specifications to evaluate the A-E's adherence to detail and systems criteria, to review coordination
between disciplines, and to ensure that comments made during previous reviews were understood and
incorporated. The 60% submittal shall include, for example:
Completed title sheet, drawing index, and legend sheets
Detailed site and utility plans
Detailed building floor plans with all walls, partitions, dimensions, door and window schedules and
details, plumbing fixtures, and fixed equipment or items (e.g., fume hoods, sinks, cabinets)
Composite floor plans (when applicable) showing construction phasing when required
Developed roof plan and exterior elevations
Developed finish schedule
Updated LEED checklist, including preliminary calculations for points sought
Completed fire protection/life safety plans
Detailed calculation of heating and cooling loads, piping, ductwork, and equipment sizing associated
with the HVAC system
Detailed outline of control system requirements (materials, methods, and sequence of operation) and
basic ladder diagrams and temperature control schematics indicating remote sensors, panel mounted
controllers, and thermostats
Detailed calculations for the sizing of the following plumbing systems: domestic hot and cold water,
waste and vent, natural and liquified petroleum gases, vacuum, compressed air, distilled and deionized
water, medical gases, and other specialty systems
Detailed description of the fire suppression system and its controls, including activation, interlocks with
HVAC system, and connection to detection and alarm systems
Detailed description of electrical system design, including: lighting system(s), wiring system and
location of proposed use, lighting protection system, grounding, basic characteristics of panelboards
(including short circuit and voltage drop calculations), electrical metering, and electrical schedule
Systems commissioning plan and preliminary commissioning specification
Detailed cost estimate using quantity take-offs and unit prices.
1.3.4 95 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
The 95% submittal shall include contract documents and supporting material that can be considered
biddable documents by EPA. This submittal includes, for example:
Contract drawings and specifications that are 100% complete for all disciplines (architectural,
structural, mechanical, electrical)
Final calculations for all systems and equipment
Final energy control system drawings, including the drawing index, control system legend, valve
schedule, damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence of operation
and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay wiring diagram,
communication network and block diagram, and direct digital control (DDC) panel installation and
block diagram
1-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
List of proprietary items, long lead items and/or items that because of their uniqueness, critical
tolerance in manufacture and/or installation, require particular scrutiny during construction
Final architectural finish boards showing samples of proposed finishes
Detailed cost estimate using quantity take-offs, unit prices, and labor costs. The cost estimate shall be
sufficiently accurate at this stage that EPA can begin funding procedures.
Draft LEED submittal, including all required information except that to be collected during
construction
1.3.5 100 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
This submittal shall provide all final drawings, specifications, and cost estimates ready for contract award.
With this submittal, the A-E shall also include an estimate of the time necessary to complete the project in
calendar days and shall include manufacturer's catalog cuts and published data of major items specified and
used as basis of the design.
1.4 Design Considerations
1.4.1 GENERAL
The facility should blend in with its natural and man-made environment. The building itself and all of its
systemsarchitectural, mechanical, and electricalshall be as flexible and adaptable as possible because
functions and related laboratory operations often change. The proposed building(s) and systems shall allow
for future space adjustments with minimal disruption to ongoing activities.
1.4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
EPA facility design and construction must meet all requirements of EPA Facilities Manual, Volume 3,
Safety and Health Manual and Volume 4, Environmental Management Guidelines and other environmental
requirements of this volume. EPA facility design must also meet the requirements of Executive Order
13101, Greening the Government Through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition;
Executive Order 13123, Greening the Government Through Efficient Energy Management; Executive
Order 13 148, Greening the Government Through Leadership in Environmental Management; or any
subsequent or superseding Executive Orders relating to the protection of the environment.
The architectural and engineering design of the facility shall use proven methods, strategies, and
technologies exhibiting respect for, and protection of, the environment. These methods, strategies, and
technologies include the use of nonhazardous recycled construction materials and construction materials
produced with minimal expenditure of energy; and use of insulation, fire protection, and refrigeration
systems that avoid use of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting chemicals. The facility
shall be designed to meet the requirements of the EPA Internal Pollution Prevention Program.
1.4.2.1 GREEN BUILDING CERTIFICATION
EPA is a recognized leader in energy conservation, pollution prevention and other sustainable building
practices. As such, it is necessary to identify and incorporate these features in the design and
construction of new and renovated facilities to the fullest extent possible. As one means of evaluating
and measuring achievements in these areas, all EPA buildings must be certified through the Leadership
in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System (*TM) of the U.S. Green
Building Council. Projects are encouraged to xceed basic LEED green building certification and to
achieve the highest level of LEED certification available for each project undertaken. Specific
achievement levels for each design and construction project will be indicated in the SFO and POR. For
more information about this certification, please visit the following web site:
http://www.usgbc.org/programs/leed.htm.
1-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.4.2.2 ENERGY-CONSCIOUS DESIGN
Fundamental design decisions related to energy conservation shall be made during the planning stages.
New facilities shall meet energy efficiency standards set by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 90.1, 1999) and also shall be Energy Star
certified. The building design and all construction features (materials and methods of installation,
including mechanical and electrical systems) shall provide concepts that will reflect reduced energy
consumption. The new design shall also utilize passive design techniques to minimize heating and
cooling loads. These techniques include:
Siting of facilities using prevailing wind and existing vegetation views (sun angle light and shading
study).
Efficient design of building form and envelope in response to climate
Reducing cooling load and electrical lighting load through use of daylighting
The use of natural but controlled daylighting shall be maximized to the extent that it does not
conflict with other EPA energy conservation objectives. EPA values natural light and
considers it part of a good working environment. The building organization and design
concept shall consider bringing natural light into personnel spaces.
Size, number, and location of windows shall be determined on the basis of need for natural
light and ventilation and of other energy considerations. All windows in heated or air-
conditioned spaces shall be double-glazed, insulated windows. Low E glass should be used
for all exterior windows. Laboratory windows shall be fixed-pane, nonoperative windows.
Use of operable windows in all non-laboratory function is encouraged. In an air-conditioned
building where windows are operative, these windows must have a removable operating
handle.
Encouraging open plan concepts, with enclosed offices/rooms clustered and located off the
windows, for HVAC efficiency and daylight penetration.
Reducing solar heat gains through orientation and proper design of solar-shading devices
combined with proper selection and location of building materials. Laboratory windows in
particular are sensitive to solar gain and should be shaded on the exterior from direct rays with
appropriate shading devices.
Allowing occupant control of sunlight and glare at different times of the day/year through the use
of interior shading devices such as light shelves, shades and/or blinds.
HVAC systems designed for an integrated, energy-conserving facility.
All EPA buildings shall be designed to promote the use of natural light and to afford optimum use of
energy-efficient lighting systems (e.g., electronic ballasts, task lighting). These include Energy Star
lighting, light fixtures controlled by sensors, and other devices that save energy without jeopardizing
safety or the light quality required for visual tasks.
1.4.2.3 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
EPA wishes to take a very active role in the selection of the materials used in the project and during the
construction process. The design professional, in close coordination with EPA, shall carefully examine
the environmental sensitivity of materials and products specified for construction and build-out for the
new facility. EPA will encourage minimal use of products that are insensitive to the environment
during and after manufacture and should consider local manufacturers (<500 miles) if available and
1-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
cost effective. Construction materials shall have the highest practicable percentage of recovered
materials as indicated in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG). The specifications
shall include environmental performance characteristics or other criteria to manage construction
substitutions.
1.4.2.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
EPA seeks to limit the presence of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in close proximity to people within
the new facility. Prudent avoidance is required in the routing of electrical power. EPA recommends
that the routing of power throughout the facility be well away from people and offices; for instance,
elevator electrical chases and other electrical chases should be located away from offices and on
exterior walls to the maximum extent feasible.
1.4.2.7 WATER CONSERVATION
EPA requires that the design of new facilities minimize water consumption through the use of water-
saving measures. Facility design should follow the Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) ten
water efficiency improvement best management practices developed pursuant to E.O. 13123. The
facility design should consider the use of low impact development and stormwater management
strategies, including gray water recycling and xeroscaping, where feasible.
1.4.2.8 CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION
EPA recognizes that practices during the construction process can further the project's environmental
goals, or compromise them. The design and the careful product selections must be protected during the
construction period from damage, dirt, chemicals and moisture. To ensure good indoor air quality at
occupancy, it is important that pollutants do not get into the building's air handling systems, which
would circulate them throughout the finished space. In the specifications, the design professional will
require the contractor to submit a construction protection plan that addresses the following:
Preventing dust, dirt and smells from migrating into finished space from areas under construction
Sealing ductwork and equipment until dust-producing activities are complete
Keeping absorbent materials sealed or offsite until painting, adhesive application or similar
activities are complete
Using low-toxic cleaning supplies
Collecting worker refuse (e.g., food, beverages)
Preparing an erosion and sedimentation control plan that follows the practices in EPA's Storm
Water Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3 (EPA Document #EPA-832-R-92-005)
Minimizing the disturbance to the site's natural features (e.g., trees, erosion control).
1.4.2.9 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE
Planning and on-site management can result in the reduction of construction waste generated, and the
diversion of construction and demolition waste from landfills through salvage and recycling. With new
construction and existing building renovations, the design professional will work will EPA to identify
opportunities for reuse, salvage or recycling. Goals for recycling of construction and demolition waste
will be incorporated into the contract documents. The facility design should incorporate waste
prevention strategies, such as the use of modular components, designing to standard material sizes,
considering prefabricated components, specifying mock-ups for tricky, repetitive details, planning for
anticipated changes and material recycling of any construction/demolition waste (at a minimum: wood,
metals, and paper).
The contractor shall recycle as much material as possible throughout all project phases. To accomplish
this, the contractor shall: (1) submit a waste handling plan detailing how the waste stream will be
separated and managed; and (2) provide onsite instruction on the appropriate separation, handling,
recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
project. See for more information.
1-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.4.3 EXPANSION AND FLEXIBILITY
Providing for future expansion and change is an integral part of the requirements for any new EPA project.
The design professional shall review and/or confirm with EPA all anticipated expansion needs and shall
recommend methods of accommodating expansion to meet these anticipated needs, as well as addressing
future expansion beyond the anticipated needs. The design professional shall be responsible for
recommending the direction(s) of expansion, after consultation with EPA. All expansion shall be
accommodated in a logical manner, both programmatically and by construction sequencing.
Corridor layout and circulation patterns shall enhance flexibility and aid in future expansion. Open
plans, which allow greater flexibility in expansion and general facility changes, are encouraged where
feasible, practical, and permitted by EPA.
Floor plans that encircle a department with permanent corridors, stairs, mechanical and electrical
rooms, or other fixed building elements that are difficult to relocate should be avoided. Column-free
functional areas should be maximized, and use of transfer beams should be minimized.
Anticipated expansion must be reviewed by representatives of all disciplines on the project.
Expansion space shall be designed for each type of space used in the facility and for parking facilities.
The design professional shall review the space requirements developed during the planning of the
facility and identify areas that appear to be inadequately addressed for future expansion. Special
attention should be given to the anticipated needs of technical or specialized space, because these are
the most expensive to expand later.
Electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other support systems should be designed and sized to permit
modification and expansion with the least cost and least disruption to overall operations.
Design drawings that show existing building and site conditions along with proposed building and site
designs are required to show both proposed building and expansion areas. All drawings shall be at the
same scale. Enlarged studies of selected areas may be included. However, EPA desires a complete
overview massing of the entire site for each proposed design, with expansion and flexibility clearly
defined.
1.4.4 AESTHETICS
Aesthetics refers to the nature of both the interior and exterior of the facility. Aesthetic considerations
should include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Contextual relationship of the adjacent buildings and environment. Color, texture, and massing of
building components should be investigated. Historical and contextual details should be considered.
The landscape design shall integrate site and building into one concept.
The sequence of access, entry, and use of the building from the viewpoint of both staff and visitor must
be considered.
The interior finishes must be integrated into a single concept for the entire facility. This shall include
all visible materials. Typical finishes, such as office/laboratory flooring and wall finishes, should be
standardized to the extent practical, not only for consistency but also for maintenance efficiency and
waste prevention.
Consider accent and background colors, with special attention to their psychological effect on people.
Special aesthetic consideration should be given to all building entrance lobby spaces
1-7
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
Consideration shall be given to lighting from the view of both visual comfort and aesthetics. Visual
comfort probability (VCP) for lighting fixtures should be a factor in selection. .
1.4.5 INTERACTION
Appropriate interaction space shall be incorporated where feasible. Design considerations to promote
office group or researcher interaction shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Communication is a function of both organization and proximity. People communicate more if they
work on a similar project or are in close proximity to each other. Research has shown that
communication drops off dramatically after 30 meters (approximately 90 feet). It is desirable in
laboratory facilities to cluster researchers in 30-meter-diameter groups, with shared facilities in
between these research clusters, hi office settings, a mixture of enclosed offices and open plan
workstations in close proximity encourages group interaction and communication.
Building form has an influence on communication. Whenever possible, personnel that need to
communicate should be located in close proximity on the same floor. Research has shown that
components of less than 10,000 square meters (108,000 square feet) should be located on one floor if
possible.
In laboratory facilities, the laboratory director shall be located strategically among his or her research
staff. The director's office is best located toward the center of the facility. From an interaction
perspective, a corner office with the best view is not the best location for the director's office.
Offices arranged in a cluster may be a better form to promote communication and interaction than
offices arranged in a linear configuration. Buildings that are arranged in odd shapes to provide all
private offices with an outside window often compromise communication. Solutions that provide for
both natural light and office clusters should be strongly considered. Additionally, clustering offices off
the windows allows a better distribution of natural light, HVAC, and window access to those in
workstations.
When offices are put near laboratories, the researchers located in these offices have a greater sense of
territoriality than if offices are farther away.
Direct access should be provided to managers. Locating secretaries directly outside the manager's door
often inhibits a subordinate from initiating informal contact with that manager.
Library space appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be located strategically to promote
professional interaction and efficiency.
Shared building facilities can be used as a tool to promote greater communication. Place the shared
facilities to provide maximum intergroup communication. Shared building facilities should be located
by proximity and in locations that enhance the users' ability to positively influence interaction.
1.4.6 AMENITIES
Amenities are spaces and/or features that provide an enjoyable environment for staff and visitors. A
workplace that encourages communication, interaction, and collaboration among its users enhances worker
productivity and increases employee retention. Strategic location of common support areas (i.e., conference
rooms, restrooms, coffee and vending areas, clerical support services, and supplies) and carefully
considered circulation patterns shall be incorporated to foster meaningful interaction. Building amenities
must be dedicated, neutral spaces that are protected from encroachment and future conversion. An amenity
exceeds the minimum functional requirements established by the program and may include the following:
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
Interaction spaces, lounges, and break areas should be strategically located to foster maximum
interaction while being convenient to both offices and laboratories.
Conference and meeting room spaces appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be provided
in close proximity to the users. The meeting room spaces should be of various sizes and shapes to
accommodate a wide range of conference needs. At least one of these conference rooms should be
designed to accommodate teleconferencing and other audiovisual use.
Lunchroom facilities should be sized specifically to each facility. Quality design of food service areas,
concession areas, and seating areas with exterior views will contribute to an enhanced quality of life. It
is also important to provide a place to safely consume food and drink outside of the laboratories,
offices, and other work areas. Refrigerator space must be integrated into coffee and vending areas to
eliminate the temptation to store lunches in refrigerators within the laboratories. Consideration should
be given to appropriate microwave and oven appliances. A "white board" for impromptu conversations
should be considered.
In laboratory buildings, attempt to locate lockers and toilets close to laboratories and offices in such a
manner that clothing and valuables are easily accessible to the staff. These facilities could be
contiguous in most cases. Avoid placement of lockers in corridors. Where appropriate, the toilet/locker
combination should accommodate a shower. The shower could satisfy staff after exercise and be used
to stabilize a chemical accident victim prior to medical assistance.
Space for an employee wellness center with appropriate facilities should be considered.
Provide special attention to artwork and/or photos and how they are to be integrated into the design.
The solution should include an integrated design for the display of EPA materials, which can be easily,
quickly and inexpensively changed. This could accommodate research material in laboratory buildings,
or ongoing EPA projects in other buildings.
For reasons of safety, day or elder care facilities should not be included inside a laboratory facility.
1.4.7 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
The design and layout of an EPA facility must ensure that the facility is accessible to the physically
challenged, in accordance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) (1988) adopted by the
GSA in 41 CFR Parts 101-19.6, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all other applicable
federal, state, and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities required to be accessible to and
usable by physically challenged people (barrier-free design). Where different laws and standards are in
conflict, the most stringent code shall apply. If there is difficulty in determining which code is most
stringent, the Government reserves the right to make the final decision on the interpretation of all codes.
1.4.7.1 GENERAL ACCESSIBILITY
General access to the facility and any portion thereof shall be based on practical design and shall
comply with all applicable standards, guidelines, and codes, including ADA and GSA 41 CFR Parts
101 -19.6. Other aspects of general access are as follows:
Avoid crossing pedestrian and vehicular circulation paths.
Provide adequate circulation space at points of traffic congestion and provide architectural features
that emphasize overall circulation patterns and major entrances.
Avoid confusing corridor systems and extensions of through corridors from department to
department.
1-9
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
Avoid horseshoe-shaped major corridor systems that require excessive walking distances.
Avoid dead-end departmental corridors.
Minimize single-loaded corridors.
Eliminate major corridors through elevator lobbies or through other areas that tend to concentrate
circulation patterns.
Locate vertical transportation so that it is visible from major entrances
Provide clear directional signage for wayfinding, and departmental directories that can be changed
easily.
1.4.7.2 LABORATORY ACCESSIBILITY
Accommodating the handicapped in a laboratory demands a design that is flexible, adaptable, and
practical. The environment must function properly within handicapped regulatory requirements of the
law and must offer safety for the users. Casework in all laboratories shall be capable of being modified
to meet accessibility requirements at minimum cost. Some general criteria for handicapped
accommodation in laboratories are as follows:
The handicapped-accessible workstation shall provide a work surface that is 30 inches above the
floor, with all wheelchair clearances below. Adjustable work surfaces that provide a range of
height adjustments shall be considered for all such workstations.
Utilities, equipment, and equipment controls for laboratory furniture should be within easy reach of
persons who are physically handicapped and have limited mobility. Controls shall have single-
action levers or blade handles for easy operation.
Aisle widths and clearances shall be adequate for maneuvering of wheelchair-bound individuals.
Aisle widths of 60 inches are required.
Handicapped-accessible workstations shall be located as close to laboratory exits and safety
showers as possible.
1.4.8 EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS
The external treatment and materials utilized shall be of proven long-term durability and require minimum
maintenance. The quality of materials shall be consistent with the image and dignity appropriate to a U.S.
agency. Material selection should be based on an anticipated 100-year life cycle. In selecting building
materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria as well as to the requirements and
recommendations for recycled content contained in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines
(referred to hereafter as CPG) and Recovered Material Advisory Notices (see www.epa.gov/cpg).
1.4.8.1 EXTERIOR ELEMENTS
Mechanical, electrical, transportation, and equipment elements that are to be located on the exterior of
the facility shall be integrated elements of the design. These elements include air intake and exhaust
vents, exterior lights, utility connections, plumbing vents, fuel tank vents, liquid oxygen tanks,
transformers, trash compactors, containers, loading docks, condensers, cooling towers, and mechanical
equipment.
For laboratory buildings, mechanical equipment should not be located on roofs, due to vibration
concerns, unless it is totally impractical to do otherwise. If mechanical or other equipment is located
on the roof, particular attention must be paid to the vibration and to isolating such vibration inside the
1-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
building. The equipment must also be aesthetically screened. Screening shall be designed to
aesthetically hide the equipment and to prevent the entrance of rain into the fresh-air intakes of the
facility and to prevent entrainment of laboratory exhaust air into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and
adjacent facilities. Location of all exterior elements on EPA facilities shall meet the security guidelines
in Section 1.8 and the requirements of Volume 3 of the EPA Facilities Manual {Safety, Health, and
Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health Requirements).
1.4.8.2 DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
The design characteristics of wall schemes shall be evaluated in terms of aesthetics, function, and cost
effectiveness with respect to the following:
Moisture transport
Thermal performance
Aesthetic appropriateness
Historic considerations (if applicable and appropriate)
Durability (life cycle maintenance costs)
Exterior wall termination at the roof or top of parapet walls (including penthouse)
Construction and control joint locations, considering impact on construction sequence and building
movement due to expansion and contraction
Corner conditions, especially material relationships at the intersection of vertical planes and the
continuity of wall supports and flashings
Load transfer of the wall to the structure, including consideration of structural frame exposure and
lateral wall supports
Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration
Window placement relative to the wall, secondary connection requirements, material adjacencies,
window washing, glass type and thickness, daylighting, and life safety hardware.
Refer to Section 7, Thermal and Moisture Requirements, of this Manual for additional information on
exterior building requirements in relation to thermal and moisture protection.
1.4.9 CONFINED SPACES
As much as possible, all areas with limited access or no ventilation shall be designed to ensure that the area
is not and will not become a confined space as defined by 29 CFR ง1910.146. Refer to the Safety Manual
for ventilation requirements for storage rooms.
1.5 Structural Design Requirements
1.5.1 GENERAL
This section applies to the structural elements of buildings and other incidental structures. The structural
elements include, but are not limited to, the following:
1-11
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
All floor, roof, and wall framing members and slabs
All piers, walls, columns, footings, piles, and similar elements of the substructure
All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress,
strength, and deflection requirements.
1.5.1.1 MATERIAL, FRAMING SYSTEMS, AND DETAILS
Material, framing systems, and details shall be compatible with the following:
Clear space and span requirements
Serviceability requirements
Applicable fire protection classification, applicable local building code, and/or NFPA 220,
as applicable
Security requirements.
Foundation conditions
Future expansion requirements
Architectural requirements
Climatic conditions
Structural design loads for the specific facility and location
Site conditions
Material reuse and recycling
CPG requirements and recommendations, as appropriate.
1.5.1.2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND LABOR
Local availability of construction materials and labor force shall be considered in the selection of the
structural system.
1.5.1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
The structural design drawings shall indicate the design criteria; the structural materials and their
strengths, with applicable material standards; the design loads, including loads that can occur during
construction; and the allowable foundation loads that were used in the design.
1.5.2 CALCULATIONS
Calculations shall be prepared and presented as stated in the following paragraphs.
1.5.2.1 GENERAL
All design (including calculations) shall be performed and checked by a structural engineer registered
within the project state. All calculations shall be on 8!/2-by-l 1 -inch paper. Calculations shall be
indexed and every page numbered. Dividers shall be placed between distinct sections. A summary
shall be included describing the type of structure and indicating the live load capacity of each floor and
roof.
1.5.2.2 MANUALLY PREPARED CALCULATIONS
Manually prepared calculations shall be neat and legible. Each sheet shall indicate the structural
consultant's firm name, address, and telephone number. Each sheet shall indicate the designer's name
or initials, the checker's name or initials, and the date prepared. Design assumptions regarding live
loads, material strengths, conditions of fixity, etc., shall be clearly stated. Calculations shall be
sufficiently cross-referenced that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional
information.
1.5.2.3 COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Computer software used for structural analysis and design shall be from a nationally recognized
vendor. Each separate run shall indicate software licensee, project name and number, engineer's name,
and date. Additional manual annotation shall be provided, if necessary, to adequately cross-reference
1-12
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
computer printouts, so that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional
information.
1.5.3 LOADS
Structures and their elements shall be designed for the loads prescribed in these criteria unless applicable
codes or ordinances provide more stringent requirements. The most stringent requirement shall be used.
1.5.3.1 DEAD LOADS
Dead loads are loads that remain permanently in place. They shall include the weights of all permanent
materials and equipment (including the structure's own weight) supported in, or on, a structure. Load
calculations shall include an allowance for any loadings that are anticipated to be added at a later date.
Initially assumed loads shall be revised so that the final design reflects the configuration shown on the
drawings.
The minimum allowance for the weights of partitions, where partitions are likely to be rearranged
or relocated, shall be as follows:
For partition weights of 150 pounds per linear foot (plf) or less, an equivalent uniform dead
load may be used, determined on the basis of the room dimensions (normal to the partition)
and the partition weight in pounds per linear foot, but not less than 20 pounds per square foot
(psf).
For partition weights above 150 plf, the actual loads shall be used.
Partitions that are likely to be rearranged or relocated should be calculated as live loads for
load factor design. A factor of 1.1 shall be applied to the live loads due to movable partitions
before application of building code-required live-load factors.
The unit weights of materials and construction assemblies for buildings and other structures shall
be those given in American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Standard 7-02. Where unit weights
are neither established in that standard nor determined by test or analysis, the weights shall be
determined from data in the manufacturer's drawings or catalogs.
Design dead loads shall include the weight of all permanent service equipment. Service equipment
shall include plumbing stacks, piping, heating and air-conditioning equipment, electrical
equipment, flues, fire sprinkler piping and valves, and similar fixed furnishings. The weight of
service equipment that may be removed with change of occupancy of a given area shall be
considered as live load.
1.5.3.2 LIVE LOADS
Live loads shall include all loads resulting from the occupancy and use of the structure whether acting
vertically down, vertically up, or laterally. The weight of service equipment that may be removed with
change of occupancy of a given area (e.g., fume hoods) shall be considered as live load. The design
professional must secure any special requirements for floor loading from the Project Officer with the
understanding that building codes, local codes, and agencies having jurisdiction regulate these
requirements. Analysis in the early planning stages of a project is required to establish the loadings for
specific pieces of equipment since these equipment loads may exceed the design floor loads. The
timing and sequencing that the equipment is placed into the building must be considered; this will
affect the design or construction phasing. The travel path of the equipment into the building must also
be considered. The most stringent floor loading requirements shall govern. Operating, moving,
stopping, and impact forces shall be considered part of the live loads. Live loads shall include neither
dead loads nor loads from the environment, such as wind, tornado, earthquake, thermal forces, earth
pressure, and fluid pressure.
1-13
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
Live loads for buildings and other structures shall be those produced by the intended use or
occupancy. In no case shall they be less than the minimum uniform load or concentrated load
stipulated in ASCE Standard 7- 02, or required by the local building code, whichever is more
stringent. A minimum of 60 psf of hanging load shall be included for any central energy plant or
major mechanical room where significant hanging loads are anticipated.
Live loads on roofs shall be as stipulated in ASCE Standard 7-02, or as required by local building
codes, whichever is more stringent. Live loads on roofs shall include the minimum roof live loads
or the snow loads and snow drifts or possible rain loads stipulated in the code, whichever produces
the more severe effect. An allowance of 10 psf shall be included in the design of all roofs to allow
for one re-roofing in the future. If a planted roof is being considered as a sustainable design
feature, the load for the roofing system and retained water shall be included.
In continuous framing and cantilever construction, the design shall consider live load on all spans,
as well as arrangements of partial live load that will produce maximum stresses in the supporting
members.
1.5.3.3 SNOW LOADS
Snow loads shall be as calculated in compliance with the provisions of ASCE Standard 7-02, or the
requirements of local building codes, whichever is more stringent.
1.5.3.4 WIND LOADS
Wind load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined in accordance with the
procedures in ASCE Standard 7-02, or local codes, whichever is more stringent, using site-specific
basic wind speeds.
Exposure "C," as defined in ASCE Standard 7-02, shall be used as a minimum for all construction
unless it can be shown that the necessary permanent shielding will be provided by natural terrain
(not including shielding from trees or adjacent buildings).
Building additions shall be designed as parts of a totally new building without regard to shielding
from the original building and without regard to lesser wind resistance for which the original
building may have been designed. The possibility that the original portion of the building may
require strengthening because of an increase in the wind loads acting on it shall be considered.
1.5.3.5 SEISMIC LOADS
To comply with Executive Order 12699, Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted or Regulated
New Building Construction, the completed design for all new construction projects shall be submitted
along with proper certification from a structural engineer registered in the state of performance that the
design substantially meets or exceeds the seismic safety level in the current edition of the National
Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations
for New Buildings and Other Structures.
1.5.3.6 OTHER LOADS
Other load requirements are as follows:
1.5.3.6.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Equipment supports shall be designed to avoid resonance resulting from the harmony between the
natural frequency of the structure and the operating frequency of reciprocating or rotating
equipment (e.g., fume hood exhaust fans, vacuum pumps) supported on the structure. The
operating frequency of supported equipment shall be determined from manufacturers' data before
completion of structural design. Resonance shall be prevented by designing equipment isolation
1-14
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
supports to reduce the dynamic transmission of the applied load to as low a level as can
economically be achieved in the design.
1.5.3.6.2 FOUNDATION OR OTHER RETAINING STRUCTURES
Every foundation or other wall serving as a retaining structure shall be designed to resist, not only
the vertical loads acting on it, but also the incident lateral earth pressures and surcharges, and the
hydrostatic pressures corresponding to the maximum probable groundwater level.
1.5.3.6.3 RETAINING WALLS
Retaining walls shall be designed for the earth pressures and the potential groundwater levels
producing the highest stresses and overturning moments. When a water-pressure-relief system is
incorporated into the design, only earth pressures need be considered. In cohesive soils, the long-
term consolidation effects on the stability of the walls shall be considered. Lateral earth pressures
shall be determined in accordance with accepted structural and geotechnical engineering practice.
1.5.3.6.4 STRESSES AND MOVEMENTS
The design of structures shall include the effects of stresses and movements resulting from
variations in temperature. The rise and fall in the temperature shall be determined for the localities
in which the structures are to be built. Structures shall be designed for movements resulting from
the maximum seasonal temperature change.
1.5.3.6.5 CREEP AND SHRINKAGE
Concrete and masonry structures shall be investigated for stresses and deformations induced by
creep and shrinkage. For concrete and masonry structures, the minimum linear coefficient of
shrinkage shall be assumed to be 0.0002 inch per inch, unless a detailed analysis indicates
otherwise. The theoretical shrinkage displacement shall be computed as the product of the linear
coefficient and the length of the member.
1.5.3.6.6 VIBRATION-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
The design professional shall be responsible for verifying the requirements of, and for, installation
of vibration-sensitive equipment in all laboratory areas. The structural system in laboratory areas
shall be designed to accommodate and control specific high localized frequency loads and
vibration inputs from the general building systems to these sensitive areas. Five controls must be
pursued:
Use of physical separation to keep powerful sources of vibration well clear of the laboratory
space.
Identification and isolation of particular services that involve running speeds close to the
natural frequencies of the floor.
Identification and additional isolation of sources that, although they do not match the running
speed of equipment and primary structural response frequencies, may produce sufficient
vibration to cause a threat to the building.
Identification, and, where possible, appropriate attenuation, of powerful transient impulses
from services (e.g., switching in or out).
Providing structural stiffness to reduce the peak acceleration responses caused by footfall-
induced vibration.
1-15
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.5.3.7 LOAD COMBINATIONS
Combination of loads, allowable stresses, and strength requirements for buildings and incidental
structures shall be as stipulated in the governing local building code.
1.5.4 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
The following paragraphs concern the basic supporting systems of buildings.
1.5.4.1 FOUNDATIONS
The provisions of the local governing building code shall be the minimum requirements for foundation
design. The potential adverse effects of frost heave and movements due to expansive soils shall also be
considered in the design. For all structures, the requirements of standard design criteria shall be met
with respect to determining subsurface conditions, recommending foundation type, establishing
allowable soil-bearing pressure, determining seismic potential, and differential settlement.
Where concrete slab-on-grade construction is used, the slab shall be placed on a capillary water barrier
overlying a compacted subgrade. A moisture retardant shall be used under the slab, where moisture
conditions warrant. Excess loads, or equipment subject to vibration, shall be supported by separate
pads isolated from the rest of the floor slab with flexible joints.
1.5.4.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
Buildings shall be framed to allow for simple formwork, fabrication, and construction procedures.
Structural systems shall be designed for ductile modes of failure to the extent feasible.
In the selection of a framing system, consideration shall be given to the structure's functional
requirements, including:
Column-free areas
Floor-to-ceiling heights
Number of stories
Elevator, escalator, crane, and hoist installations
Heavy loads
Other requirements pertaining to the specific facility.
For framed floors, the economy of prefabricated systems shall be considered, especially systems
that simplify the installation of mechanical, electrical, and communications services.
1.5.4.3 LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Lateral load-resisting systems shall be provided to resist the effects of wind, earthquake motions,
thermal forces, soil pressures, and dynamic forces caused by rotating, reciprocating, or moving
equipment. Use systems recognized by the local building code. In the absence of local building code
criteria, use structural systems recognized by the International Building Code for use in resisting
seismic loads.
1.5.5 BUILDING MOVEMENT JOINTS
Devices, usually in the form of joints, shall be designed into buildings to control movement.
1.5.5.1 CONTROL JOINTS
Control joints shall be provided in all materials subject to drying shrinkage. Control joint size and
spacing shall be based on a rational analysis.
1.5.5.2 EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be provided in all materials subject to thermal expansion. Expansion joint size
shall be based on a rational analysis. In the absence of local building code requirements, building
1-16
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
expansion joints shall be provided as recommended in Technical Report No. 65 Expansion Joints in
Buildings (National Academy of Sciences, 1974).
1.5.5.3 SEISMIC JOINTS
When seismic design is required, building expansion joints shall be seismic type. Buildings shall be
separated adequately to prevent contact during an earthquake that would damage the structural systems
of the buildings.
1.6 Architectural Requirements
Facility components shall be organized in a functional and aesthetic manner, according to a modular design
concept that addresses the needs of all users of the facility. All administrative functions and all technical
functions shall be grouped into separate organizational blocks of space while keeping them sufficiently
close together to facilitate and encourage employee interaction.
EPA facilities are generally separated into three definable zones: laboratory (where applicable),
administrative, and building support. This division allows not only the most flexibility for facility design
but also the most cost effective construction. In reference to the interior space of a building or facility, the
following definitions apply:
Rooms and spaces refer to individual divisions of space, each one usually defined or enclosed by
partitions or walls.
Blocks are groups or series of rooms or spaces, usually having similar orientation and adjacencies.
Zones are composed of two or more blocks of spaces, often providing the same or similar functionality.
The building design concept shall establish the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments of the facility
to facilitate required programmatic relationships. Multiple floor facilities with repetitive support areas
should consider vertical stacking and clustering of similar functions and structural loading requirements to
reduce costs, quantity of penetrations through floors, and system vulnerabilities. Floor plate areas shall be
optimized to accommodate the required occupancies and to allow for future expansion or alterations.
1.6.1 LABORATORY ZONE
In research facilities, this zone includes all laboratories and laboratory support blocks within an individual
branch or section. Laboratory-related office blocks shall be located in close proximity to related
laboratories and laboratory support blocks. These offices shall be across from related laboratory space or in
"clusters" along a laboratory-related corridor. Window exposure for both offices and laboratories should be
maximized.
1.6.1.1 LABORATORY MODULES
The laboratory block(s) shall utilize a modular laboratory planning concept to maximize flexibility and
adaptability of research space. The laboratory module represents the fundamental planning and
organizing element. The repetitiveness and regularity of size, shape, and arrangement of space
provides the ability to convert and renovate space quickly on the basis of each investigator's unique set
of laboratory design requirements and demands. As changes are required, the modular planning
approach allows the expansion, subdivision, or reconfiguration of rooms without disturbing adjacent
spaces or altering or forcing shutdown of, central building utility systems.
The width of the laboratory module shall be at least 11 feet, from the centerline of the walls
framing the laboratory module. The depth of a laboratory module should not be less than 26 feet
or more than 33 feet. Within these limits, size shall be determined on the basis of task
1-17
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
requirements and shall be consistent throughout a given block of laboratory rooms within a
laboratory building. Laboratories with heavy instrumentation requirements may require the wider
module due to equipment wire and service access. The design professional shall study the
requirements, evaluate the equipment and instrumentation needed for each laboratory, and either
use the planning module size or propose other module sizes that architecturally and operationally
will provide the required features.
The structural system shall allow for future changes in various mechanical and utility services.
Floor-loading capability shall be uniform throughout the building to permit space usage
conversions.
Laboratory systems capacity must be determined on the basis of a common per-module
denominator that anticipates future needs. In this determination, each module represents a unit of
capacity for the building system (e.g., gallons of water, watts of power, cubic feet per minute [cfm]
of supply and exhaust air). This generic method of calculating systems distribution ensures
adequate building utility systems capacity and prevents costly shutdown and reconstruction of
primary building systems components.
Modular laboratory design shall integrate primary building systems (HVAC, piping, electrical
power, and communications) into a distribution loop with modulated, consistent, recurring points
of distribution relative to each planning module. These points of distribution give each module
access to all laboratory systems; any additional services required in the future can easily be
extended from the main distribution loop to the point of use. Each module shall have a readily
accessible disconnect from each building system.
Building systems must be readily accessible for maintenance and servicing. Components that
require routine servicing should be located in corridor ceiling spaces or other spaces outside the
laboratory perimeter. Servicing building systems components inside the laboratories is disruptive
and difficult because of the amount of scientific equipment that must be protected. Whenever
systems components are placed above ceilings, a lay-in type ceiling should be used, or access
panels installed, to facilitate access for servicing and maintenance.
An important consideration for the laboratory design is the distribution of services on a
modular basis within the laboratory. Special design attention shall be paid to location of
structural members related to penetrations for services along the walls and near the benches
located in the center of the laboratory.
1.6.1.2 LABORATORY SUPPORT BLOCK
Laboratory support space shall suit the needs of the specific laboratory. In some cases, a service
corridor is used for laboratory support. In some cases, special support spaces are needed between
laboratories. The laboratory support block is defined as the space that houses common, or shared,
activities or equipment, such as analytical instrumentation, specialized equipment, environmental
rooms, and glassware preparation areas, that indirectly support laboratory activities. These spaces can
be interspersed between laboratories, supporting a specific activity, or can be grouped together adjacent
to a block of laboratories. Particular attention shall be paid to functional relationships among
laboratory support spaces and laboratories, with an emphasis on the efficiency of the travel path of
personnel, tasks, and material within a particular zone and between zones.
1.6.1.3 TECHNICAL SPACE
Research support personnel (i.e., technicians, postdoctoral employees, laboratory assistants) should be
provided with work space outside of the laboratory room in order to minimize long-term exposure to
laboratory chemicals and the hazards presented by their use. Technician space, such as shared offices,
alcoves, and cubicles, does not have to be directly outside of the laboratory as long as it can be placed
1-18
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
reasonably close to the laboratory. Some desktop work space should also be provided in the laboratory
for lab oratory-related reporting and documentation that should not be done at the laboratory bench.
These workstations, where provided, must be so located as to minimize exposure to noxious, or
otherwise hazardous, conditions. The supply air and exhaust distribution system within the laboratory
must be carefully coordinated with the designed work space to provide one or more "clean air" zones.
In some instances, a physical separation, or barrier, may be required between the work space and the
laboratory bench.
1.6.2 ADMINISTRATIVE ZONE
Administrative zones include office spaces and support service areas. The administrative offices shall be
designed considering: circulation patterns of staff and staff interaction, visitors expected at the facility and
their potential circulation patterns, and proximity of administration support functions, especially the
resource center and meeting rooms, to administrative offices.
In laboratory buildings, the administrative zone should be physically separated from the laboratory zone in
the same building. Building links between the administrative zone and the laboratory zone shall house
pleasant and comfortable interaction spaces, such as a lounge.
Administrative support spaces include, but are not limited to, the spaces described below:
1.6.2.1 CONFERENCE ROOM
Conference room areas must be sized in proportion to the number of staff and conference activities
anticipated. The proper and adequate design of conference space for administrative areas and research
areas reduces travel time and promotes interaction. "Satellite conference rooms" can also double as
"satellite resource centers" for periodicals related to special laboratory groups.
Conference areas that are centrally located for general administrative meetings are often designed to be
subdivided with the use of folding sound-resistant doors. A vending area and related seating area may
be coordinated adjacent to the main conference area to provide a broader use of the conference area.
When conference areas and food-related areas are adjacent to one another, walls and doors must
provide adequate sound control. CO2 monitors should be considered for the HVAC control.
1.6.2.2 TELECONFERENCE ROOM
The teleconference room shall be designed to meet the specific teleconferencing needs of the facility.
Additional issues to resolve include:
Number of participants anticipated
Special lighting requirements
Special acoustic requirements
CO2 monitors should be considered for the HVAC control.
Acoustic isolation from adjacent spaces
Storage requirements
Control room requirements
Determine whether a common control room for two conference rooms is required
Define control room requirements
Identify equipment requirements
Is a control room even required.
1.6.2.3 STORAGE
Storage areas adjacent to administrative offices are required to hold paper stock and miscellaneous
equipment storage and for collecting old corrugated cardboard. Special attention shall be exercised
regarding the need for storage space to hold extra supplies related to administrative conference space
(e.g., tables, chairs, overhead projectors, slide projectors, and easels).
1-19
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.6.2.4 COPIER
Copier area shall be provided in close proximity to administrative areas. It shall be located to promote
researchers/staff interaction. Area shall be enclosed and directly exhausted to the outside to provide
adequate air quality. Adequate space adjacent to the copier is needed for proper storage, placement of
mixed office paper and toner cartridge recycling bins, and collating or layout areas for sorting copies.
1.6.2.5 COFFEE/VENDING
A coffee/vending area shall be strategically located within a short travel distance from the area
serviced. The coffee/vending area should be located to promote communication and researcher
interaction. Adequate area shall be provided to accommodate separate bins for collecting newspapers
and commingled bottles and cans for recycling. Often coffee/vending areas are co-located with
concession purchased items. Special attention must be given to designing concession areas for both
functional use and good aesthetic design. If there will be microwaves or other cooking appliances, the
area shall be enclosed and exhausted directly to the outdoors for good indoor air quality.
1.6.2.6 COMPUTER ACCESS / PRINTER OUTPUT
Computer areas including computer staff offices, paper storage and computer tape storage are often
designed into a "computer suite." Often, the "suite" will include printer output areas.
The computer area shall be located as centrally as possible to reduce travel as well as wiring to
computer terminals. The computer printer output areas are good interaction areas for staff and
should be located to promote interaction.
Special care is required to design both floor loading and fire ratings for film and paper storage
areas. Special fire protection consideration is required for the computer areas. A preaction fire
protection system shall be a part of the fire protection analysis for these areas.
Computer areas will probably have access flooring that may require accessible ramps (ADA
compliance required) to these areas. Special acoustical consideration is required in computer and
printer output areas. If a glass wall is used to view into the computer area, adequate attention shall
be given to fire protection of this glass wall.
Adequate space adjacent to printers shall be allocated for placing bins for recycling mixed office
paper and boxes for collecting used laser toner cartridges for recycling.
1.6.2.7 VISITOR INFORMATION CENTER
If the facility will be open to domestic and/or foreign visitors, a visitor center should be considered. A
visitor center shall include, at a minimum, the following amenities:
Relaxation area
Projection/sound equipment
Large screen television with video cassette recorder (VCR)
Coffee area.
1.6.3 BUILDING SUPPORT ZONE
The building support zone design shall house a receiving dock, facility physical plant, mechanical
equipment, and central storage. Its location shall be determined in accordance with the site master plan and
should optimize service vehicle circulation. In laboratory facilities, the building support zone should be
located adjacent to the laboratory zone to facilitate the movement of equipment and material to and from the
laboratories.
Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the size, function, and material
requirements of each laboratory. The truck turning radius to loading facilities should be appropriate to the
1-20
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
truck size anticipated. The loading dock might include a leveling device for accommodating different size
trucks. A covered loading/unloading area is desirable. The loading dock area shall be considered for video
monitoring for security purposes. Issues to resolve are as follows:
Nitrogen storage requirements and location; note security fence requirements
Breakout area size
Bulk mail process defined
Access for emergency vehicle and ramps
Truck parameters (dock height, leveler requirements)
Security requirements
Concrete paving for loading dock area
Dumpster and compaction requirements
Area for waste stream separation and recycling.
For laboratory facilities, an isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility (HMSF) shall be also located
near this zone to facilitate transportation and handling of explosive/flammable materials, toxic chemicals,
and biohazardous waste before disposal at an off-site location by a licensed contractor.
1.7 Special Room/Space Requirements and Concerns
1.7.1 RESTROOMS
Each men's and women's restroom should have shower stalls and adequate lockers for the operation and the
number of people, men and women, to encourage staff to bike or walk to work. Restrooms shall conform to
ADA and/or UFAS requirements, as applicable. All sanitation finishes shall be non-permeable, non-
corrosive, and easily maintainable. Restrooms shall be equipped with exhaust ventilation to the outside.
1.7.2 JANITOR CLOSETS/CUSTODIAL SPACE
Janitor closets shall be provided in sufficient numbers to service the various areas of the building(s). Each
floor or block shall have at least one janitor closet with mop sink. These rooms shall be equipped with
exhaust ventilation to atmosphere and louvered doors. Custodial space shall contain adequate storage space
for cleaning equipment and supplies. Besides the custodial space located on each floor, a central custodial
office, locker rooms and storage space shall be considered during the early phases of design. This area shall
be located in close proximity to other building services areas.
1.7.3 SHOP FACILITIES
Shop facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function. The shop facilities shall
be remotely located from vibration, noise, and dust-sensitive areas.
1.7.4 LIBRARY
The library shall be located with good access to storage, services elevator, and conference facilities.
Additional issues are as follows:
Type of library storage
Computer terminals required
Study carrels required
Work space required
Floor loading/structural requirements.
1.7.5 CHEMICAL STORAGE
Chemical storage shall be provided and be in compliance with the requirements of Chapter 4 of the Safety
Manual.
1-21
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.7.6 GENERAL STORAGE
General storage is usually required on every floor. General storage facilities are the most typically
forgotten or undersized spaces in EPA facilities. In Government facilities, where it is difficult to resolve
equipment disposition, adequate storage space is critical. Additional issues to resolve:
Locate storage internal to the building, maximizing underused space for occupied functions
Ensure good access to service elevator
Size rooms with freezers or other bulky equipment relative to equipment dimensions and layout
Check corridor and elevator dimensions for movement of equipment
Resolve signal runs to central control area as required by program
Ensure space to collect corrugate cardboard for recycling.
1.7.7 FOOD SERVICE AND DINING
Food service must be located with good access to the loading dock and the service elevator. The food
service and dining shall be as centrally located as possible with an exterior view if possible. Additional
issues to resolve:
Quantity of seating required
Type of food service to be provided
Secondary uses of food service spaces
Placement of separate recycling bins for collecting newspaper and commingled bottles and cans.
1.7.8 OUTSIDE RESEARCH FACILITIES
Any outside research space related to a laboratory facility shall be constructed and designed to be of a
quality that is in keeping with the research complex environment.
1.7.9 FIRE CONTROL ROOM
A fire control room is required inside high-rise buildings. In conjunction with local and EPA requirements,
the local fire marshal shall be consulted to address and resolve any special concerns. Special attention shall
also be provided to the elevator/service elevator design and its function in a fire fighting mode. Special
consideration shall be given to the removal of fire victims from the building.
1.8 Security
1.8.1 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
All entrances to the facility must be clearly defined. There shall be only one main entrance, although access
to this main entrance may be from a variety of directions. The following are general design requirements
for the main entrance:
The main entrance shall be consistent with the design of the facility. The design of the space(s) and the
material selection shall express EPA's and the facility's position in the world environmental
community. Materials shall be high quality and durable.
All entry spaces should be open, airy, and inviting to the entrant. All major entries should have
vestibules and walk-off grilles to capture dirt, unless these are prohibited by historic preservation
requirements.
The main entrance must be easily recognizable and allow easy transition to other facility areas by first-
time users of the facility.
1-22
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 1 - General Requirements
Each main entrance should be designed for incorporation of security equipment as defined in the
FOR. Security equipment may include card readers, x-ray equipment and metal detectors.
1.8.2 ACCESS AND EGRESS
The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall
conform to requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, and/or local codes, whichever
is most stringent, and shall allow fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security
for personnel, property, and experiments. The facility, buildings, and interior modules shall have
controllable access, which should ensure a reasonably safe and secure working environment.
A security control station shall be at the main entrance, and security personnel shall have good visual
control over the building's main entrance and lobby space, as well as monitor control over all other exits
and entrances. Often a full-time security station is not economically justified by the amount of staff and
visitor traffic through the main entrance of the facility. The receptionist may need to fulfill the security role.
Administrative areas shall be in close proximity to the security control to provide reception function
activities to support the security control staff.
1.8.3 EXTERIOR SPACES
The exterior spaces on the property shall be adequately secured to eliminate the potential of unauthorized
individuals gaining access to the property. Potentially hazardous or accident prone exterior areas shall be
secured by adequate perimeter security.
1.9 Quality Assurance/Quality Control
The design and construction contractor shall be responsible for quality control and shall establish and
maintain an effective quality control system. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures,
and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements. The
Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan
proposed to implement these requirements. The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control,
instructions, test, records, and forms to be used.
At a minimum the plan shall include:
A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority.
The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person
assigned a CQC function.
Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing required samples, submittals, including
those of subcontractors, off-site fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents.
Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name,
specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, and person responsible for each test.
Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective
action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.
For construction contracts, the system shall cover all construction operations, both on-site and off-site, and
shall be keyed to the proposed construction operations sequence. Construction will be permitted to begin
only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature
of work to be started.
1-23
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 1 - General Requirements
1.10 Commissioning Requirements
Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning guidelines.
END OF SECTION 1
1-24
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
Section 2 - Site Work
2.1 Scope of Project
2.1.1 GENERAL
The location, type of building and support facility proposed, impact on site development, and general scope
of work shall be described for the project. The description shall include such elements as access roads,
parking areas, and loading and unloading areas, utilities, water supply, storm and wastewater.
2.1.2 DEVELOPMENT CODES
All site work must comply with the applicable federal, state, city, and local zoning and building codes and
with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards (UFAS). Refer to Appendix A for some of the many codes, regulations, trade organizations,
publications, and guides that may be applicable. When codes and/or regulations conflict, the most stringent
standard shall govern. Information on applicable codes must be provided as stated in the following
subsections.
2.1.2.1 ZONING
A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impact on site development
shall be given for the proposed project.
2.1.2.2 BUILDING CODES
Description of the applicable building codes shall be provided, with any specific references to seismic,
floodplain, or coastal development as it relates to site development.
2.1.2.3 ADA REQUIREMENTS
The proposed project will comply with current federal (28 CFR Parts 35 and 36), state, and local ADA
guidelines for the physically disabled.
2.2 Site Influences
2.2.1 LAND RESOURCES
Information shall be provided on the geography, geology, climate, typical meteorological data, and
hydrology of the site areas.
2.2.1.1 SITE VICINITY
The geographic location of the project shall be described. Site location with respect to designated
floodplains will be noted. EPA facilities shall not be located within the 100-year floodplain.
Appropriate information on the local area economy, business, and industry shall also be provided.
2.2.1.2 PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY
A general description of known site geology and physiography shall be provided. Appropriate
information shall be taken from the preliminary geotechnical investigation if this has been performed
and is available when information is being gathered for this document. Seismic effects and the
geological, foundation, and tsunami (seawave) hazards often associated with earthquakes must be
considered. Probability with respect to severity and frequency of ground shaking varies from one
geographic region to another; regions in which there are similar hazard factors are identified as seismic
zones. Refer to the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program to determine the seismic zone in
which the site is located.
2-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
2.2.1.3 CLIMATOLOGY
The specific climatic conditions of the proposed site shall be described, especially precipitation and
predominant wind directions and highest expected wind gust on the site. Where available, local
precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for specific site hydrologic modeling.
2.2.1.4 HYDROLOGY
A general description of site hydrology shall be provided. This description shall include data taken
from the preliminary geotechnical investigation and the Soil Conservation Service soil survey. The
following specific site information shall be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the project:
Geographic location
Precipitation frequency data
Drainage area
Soil and cover
Runoff distribution
Groundwater
Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record should be developed and used for each
locale. The design storm events shall be based on a study of precipitation frequency, runoff
potential, and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed. Where
available, stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels. Where
stream gauge data are inadequate or unavailable, rainfall information shall be taken from
documented sources, such as National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/U.S. Weather
Bureau Technical Paper No. 40. Design storm precipitation values taken from documented
sources or derived by published engineering methodology shall be used to estimate design flood
discharges.
2.2.2 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
The transportation requirements of the project and the project's relationship to and effect on existing
roadways shall be described.
2.2.2.1 AIR
A general description of project requirements for heliports or airfields shall be provided.
2.2.2.2 LAND
A general description of the proposed project and its location relative to existing roadways shall be
provided. Development of the proposed facility and the impacts on the existing roadway system shall
be addressed. This assessment shall include references to the traffic impact analysis if such an analysis
is required for the project. For sites located in metropolitan areas with extensive public transportation
systems, access to public transportation is desirable. A general description of proposed pedestrian and
bicycle transportation systems should be included.
2.2.2.3 WATER
A general description of project requirements relative to boating shall be provided, including
requirements for marinas, docking and/or storage facilities, seawalls and refueling facilities. Applicable
permitting requirements of federal, state, and local agencies shall also be addressed.
2.2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
The project's effects on the surrounding environment, including air quality, water quality, and noise levels
shall be addressed. Communities involved should be given the opportunity to participate in the
identification of ways to reduce adverse environmental effects that negatively affect human health. A
written Environmental Protection Plan for the construction effort shall be required.
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
2.2.3.1 AIR QUALITY
The impact of the proposed project on air quality shall be addressed. The assessment shall include all
sources of air emissions and compliance with the requirements of federal, state, and local agencies.
2.2.3.2 WATER RESOURCES
The proposed project's impact on available water resources, including both ground and surface waters,
shall be addressed.
2.2.3.3 NOISE POLLUTION
Any noise pollution that will be associated with the proposed project, its impact on surrounding
development, and the project's compliance with applicable zoning and land development codes on
noise pollution shall be addressed.
2.2.3.4 REDEVELOPMENT
EPA encourages building on previously developed land, rather than on undeveloped property. If
brownfield sites are considered, remedial actions must be identified and resolved per EPA guidelines
prior to construction.
2.3 Site Investigation
2.3.1 SITE SURVEYS
The design professional shall be responsible for providing site investigations, land (metes and bounds)
surveys, and an environmental assessment of the site. Site investigations, land surveys, and environmental
assessments shall be performed by professional engineers registered in the state of performance and/or land
surveyors, as applicable.
At a minimum, the survey(s) shall show legal property boundaries, easements, and legal restrictions, as well
as all man-made and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and permanent),
horizontal and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas. Land surveys should conform to
the requirements of General Services Administration (GSA) document PBS-P100 and the minimum
standard detail requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys (1999), as applicable.
The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes), all control
and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional land
surveyor registered in the state in which the site is situated.
2.3.1.1 PRELIMINARY SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
Preliminary subsurface exploration shall be performed by a registered geotechnical engineer. The
registered geotechnical engineer shall supervise all required testing, review and analyze all data and
samples, and submit a report. All tests shall be performed by independent testing laboratories.
Subsurface investigations should conform to the requirements of GSA document PBS-P100 Appendix
A, as applicable.
2.3.1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
Design and environmental professionals selected by EPA will evaluate the effects that the additions and
improvements will have on the local environment. Under the purview of the National Environmental
Policy Act (NEPA), an environmental assessment (EA) may also be required, which will determine the
need for an environmental impact statement (EIS). The EA should conform to EPA environmental
assessment requirements, as applicable. The preparation of the environmental assessment, if required,
2-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
may be included as a part of the professional services contract. See also Chapter 9 of the
Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual).
2.3.1.3 OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
The facility shall meet the indoor air quality requirements described in Section 15 of this document. To
address these requirements, the primary strategy for indoor air quality control is source control of
outdoor pollutant sources. Effective source control requires that potential sources be clearly identified
and addressed. The sources of air pollutants that must be considered are adjacent and nearby stationary
pollution sources, for example, exhausts from other research facilities or from commercial buildings
such as dry-cleaning establishments or restaurants, nearby roadways, parking lots, loading docks, trash
storage, and garage and their motor vehicle traffic patterns. Consideration must be given to variations
in the potential sources over time, including daily, weekly, and seasonal patterns. Temporal and spatial
variations in wind direction and velocity, traffic patterns, and emissions from industrial processes that
affect air quality at the site must be considered. The locations and forms of adjacent buildings that
might result in local wind patterns causing reentrainment of the facility's own exhausts must be
considered and addressed. The potential impact that ponds, cooling towers, cooling coil drip pans, and
other potential sites of microbial contamination may have on IAQ must also be considered. Previous
land uses, such as agriculture or industry, might result in emissions from contaminated soil or
groundwater as a potential source of indoor air pollutants. Some examples of potentially significant
prior uses are wood preservation and treatment; solid or hazardous waste handling, storage, treatment,
or disposal; dry-cleaning processes; leather, paint, or chemical manufacturing; refrigerated storage;
gasoline storage or dispensing; and agriculture. Even nearby building demolition can result in
significant site contamination through release of building materials such as asbestos into air or into soil,
which may remain on-site or be backfilled onto it. The design professional must include consideration
of the following factors:
Prior history of the site
Off-site and on-site sources of pollution
Soils and soil gases (including radon, organic chemicals, metals, and microbes)
Ambient air quality
Landscaping (including highly sporulating types of plantings).
2.3.2 SITE EVALUATION
The ultimate purpose of the site evaluation is to provide EPA with sufficient pertinent data to allow a
complete evaluation of the physical conditions of the given project site.
2.3.2.1 SITE DATA COLLECTION
Using the information developed above and in other sources required by this document, the design
professional shall consider planning and zoning criteria for the subject property. This consideration
shall include the investigation of all potential site development regulations such as density limitations,
building setbacks, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other development
guidelines set forth in any applicable campus, site, or facility master plan or elsewhere in this
document.
An on-site investigation and review shall be conducted, which shall include representatives of the
client, the design professional, and the preconstruction testing and inspection company. A site
representative shall verify land features indicated on the survey. Photographs shall be taken at various
locations to provide a visual record to aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.
2.3.2.2 SITE RESOURCE INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
A site resource inventory and analysis shall be prepared, which shall include investigation of soil
information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology and drainage analysis, topographic and
elevation analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site. A
2-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
"buildable area" plan shall be developed by compiling information from the various analysis drawings.
This plan shall indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction. The site inventory and
analysis shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
The site overview will include, but will not be limited to, location, parcel delineation and acreage,
existing zoning, and adjoining land uses.
Physical site characteristic analyses include, but are not limited to, slope analysis, elevation
analysis, existing vegetation identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site
analysis, buildable areas analysis, wetland analysis, solar and shadow studies, and analysis of
prevailing winds.
Utilities include, but are not limited to, stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer,
electrical power and communications, and mechanical systems.
2.3.3 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
For permanent structures, subsurface conditions shall be determined by means of borings or other methods
that adequately disclose soil and groundwater conditions. Data obtained from previous subsurface
investigations shall be used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are deemed
necessary. Subsurface investigations shall be performed under the direction of a licensed professional
geotechnical engineer. Groundwater levels must be recorded when initially encountered and after they have
been allowed to stabilize. In earthquake-prone areas, appropriate geological investigations shall be made to
determine the contribution of the foundation (subsurface) to the earthquake loads imposed on the structure.
These investigations shall include, but shall not be limited to, a recommendation of foundation type,
determinations of allowable soil bearing capacity, and assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity
on the soil mass. A settlement analysis under different design loads shall be performed where differential
settlement may cause structural, architectural, or any other type of building damage.
2.3.3.1 TESTING AND SAMPLING METHODS
Testing and sampling shall comply with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
standards, including ASTM D-1586, ASTM D-1587, and ASTM D-2113. Soil samples shall be taken
below the existing grade and at each change in soil stratification or consistency. The depth of soil
samples shall be determined by the geotechnical engineer after consultation with the project engineer
on site-related design requirements.
2.3.3.2 TEST REPORTS
All data required by ASTM or the other standard test methods used shall be obtained, recorded in the
field, and referenced to boring numbers. Soil shall be visually classified in the field logs in accordance
with ASTM D-2488, but the classification for final logs shall be based on the field information, results
of tests, and further inspection of samples in the laboratory by the geotechnical engineer preparing the
report. At a minimum, the report shall:
Include a chart illustrating the soil classification criteria and the terminology and symbols used in
the boring logs.
Identify the ASTM or other recognized standard sampling and test methods used.
Provide a plot plan giving dimensioned locations of test borings.
Provide vertical sections plotted showing (1) material encountered, (2) reference to known datum,
(3) number of blows per linear foot (N value), and (4) groundwater level for all holes where
groundwater is encountered. Data for groundwater shall include both the initial groundwater level
and the static groundwater level.
2-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
Note the location of strata containing organic materials, weak materials, or other inconsistencies
that might affect engineering conclusions.
Describe the existing surface conditions.
Summarize the subsurface conditions.
Provide pavement structural design data, including results of California bearing ratio tests or
modulus of subgrade reaction tests.
Provide a profile and/or topographic map of rock or other bearing stratum.
Analyze the probable variations in elevations and movements of subsurface water due to seasonal
influences.
Report all laboratory determinations of soil properties, including shrinkage and expansion
properties.
2.3.4 GROUNDWATER INVESTIGATION
A groundwater investigation shall be made before selection of a dewatering control system. The
investigation shall examine the character of subsurface soils, groundwater conditions and quality, and the
availability of an electric power source. The source of seepage shall be determined and the boundaries and
seepage flow characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site shall be analyzed in
accordance with the mathematical, graphic, and electroanalogous methods discussed in Technical Manual
5-818-5, Dewatering and Groundwater Control (November 1 983), U.S. Army Corp of Engineers. Field
reports identifying groundwater elevations and other relevant features should be provided to the
construction contractor responsible for dewatering and groundwater investigation.
2.4 Site Development
2.4.1 SURVEYING
The following surveys must be conducted, and the following survey documentation provided, for each site.
2.4.1.1 GENERAL
Construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be conducted in coordination with the
appropriate EPA authority and the Project Architect/Engineer. Where feasible, surveying support
available from EPA contractors shall be used. Survey field notes shall be legibly recorded on standard
(8!/2-by-l 1-inch) field-note forms. Field notes and final plots of surveys shall be furnished to the
appropriate EPA authority. Any boundary surveys and recorded maps shall be forwarded to the
appropriate EPA authority.
The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent
with the nature and importance of each survey. Surveys shall conform to the requirements of
applicable local and state statutes), and shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a
professional land surveyor registered in the state in which the subject site is situated.
2.4.1.2 SURVEY CONTROL
The appropriate EPA authority shall be responsible for establishing, recording, and perpetuating
primary on-site horizontal and vertical control monumentation. In addition, the appropriate EPA
authority shall be responsible for correlating primary site-specific horizontal and vertical
monumentation with that of other appropriate agencies. All surveying and mapping shall conform to
2-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
the standards listed in Table 2.4.1.2, Survey Standards and/or state survey standards, whichever are
more stringent.
Table 2.4.1.2 Survey Standards
Survey Standard
Survey Type
TEC-1110-1-147
ETL-1110-1-150
EM-1110-1-1000
EM-1110-1-1001
EM-1110-1-1002
EM-1110-1-1003
EM-1110-1-1005
EM-1110-1-1006
EM-1110-2-1003
EM-1110-1-1807
CORPS Construction
Global Positioning System (GPS)/Dredging
Photogrammetry
Geodetic control
Monumentation
GPS control
Topographic and field supervision and maintenance
[FY-94]
Land boundary [FY-95]
Hydrographic survey
Computer-aided drafting design (CADD) (volumes 1-4)
2.4.1.3 MONUMENTATION
Requirements with respect to monumentation are as follows.
2.4.1.3.1 TEMPORARY CONTROL
For temporary control monuments:
Where the scope and complexity of the project warrants, the placement, number, and location
of temporary horizontal and vertical control monuments in new development areas shall be
coordinated with the existing system and approved.
A minimum of two intervisible control monuments shall be placed along, or adjacent to, right-
of-way lines. These temporary control monuments shall be tied to an established grid. The
surveyor who sets such monumentation shall submit legible notes, drawings, and reproducible
documentation to the appropriate EPA authority. The location and construction of all
temporary monuments in the immediate vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the
construction drawings.
Temporary control monuments shall be 5/8-inch-diameter mild steel bars or 3/4-inch-diameter
iron pipe with a minimum length of 2 feet or plastic hubs. These monuments shall be set flush
with, or within 0.2 feet of, the ground surface. Manhole rims, markings chiseled in concrete,
PK nails in asphalt, and lead and tack in bedrock shall be suitable as alternative temporary
monumentation when approved.
Three guard posts with reflective-paint striping shall be installed adjacent to temporary control
monuments in high-traffic areas to prevent vehicular damage. Temporary control monuments
shall be set in conformance with the accuracy standards of the U.S. Corps of Engineers.
2.4.1.3.2 PERMANENT CONTROL
For permanent control monuments:
The placement, number, and location of permanent survey monuments for horizontal and
vertical control shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the appropriate EPA authority.
2-7
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
The location and description of the nearest permanent survey monument shall be provided on
construction drawings. These monuments shall be tied to an established state plane coordinate
system.
Any surveyor who sets a permanent survey monument shall submit legible notes, sketches, or
other reproducible documentation that shows the location of the new monument relative to the
on-site horizontal and vertical control network, to the applicable state plane coordinate
system, to the North American Datum (NAD) of 1983, and to the National Geodetic Vertical
Datum (NGVD) of 1929. The convergence, scale factor, and elevation on the monument shall
also be shown.
Permanent survey monuments shall be considered properly positioned and represented only
after the appropriate EPA authority has approved all survey procedures and calculations and
has verified conformance to the Corps of Engineers standards and specifications.
Permanent survey monuments shall be identified as prescribed by Corps of Engineers
standards.
These identification numbers shall be documented within the survey field notes and shown on
the design drawings and within related documents. Temporary point identification for
permanent survey monuments may be assigned by the surveyor; however, permanent point
identification shall only be assigned to such monuments by the appropriate EPA authority.
Permanent survey monuments shall not be removed without prior authorization from the
appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.1.3.3 BENCHMARKS
For benchmarks:
A minimum of one permanent benchmark for vertical control shall be established in each new
development area. A minimum of three benchmarks shall be established if there are no
existing benchmarks within a 3-mile radius of each new development area. Elevations shall be
referenced to the North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) of 1983 or to the NGVD of 1929.
Level section misclosures between fixed benchmark elevations shall equal or exceed third-
order accuracy, as defined in the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC) Standards and
Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks.
Permanent benchmarks shall be identified in the same manner as permanent survey
monuments. Permanent benchmarks shall not be removed without prior approval by the
appropriate EPA authority. The location and description of all benchmarks in the immediate
vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the construction drawings.
2.4.1.3.4 UTILITY, ROADWAY, AND PARKING AREA SURVEYS
Surveys of utilities, roadways, and parking areas shall be conducted according to the following
requirements:
Coordinates and elevations shall be determined for utilities, roads, and parking areas at their
principal points of definition. This information shall be provided on the construction drawings.
The principal points of definition for utility systems shall be utility poles, obstructions,
manholes, valve boxes, culverts, and other appurtenances for heating and cooling lines,
sewers, and overhead and underground power and telephone systems.
Principal points of definition for potable water, and natural gas, distribution systems shall be
valve boxes, main line intersects, elbows, and fire hydrants.
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
The principal points of definition for roads shall be roadway centerline intersects. Road
alignment surveys shall include stationing, bearings, and curve information tied to these
principal points of definition. Where applicable, the following information shall also be
provided on the construction drawings:
Stations and deflection angles for each point of intersection.
Right-of-way lines and markers.
Spot elevations (centerline, edge of pavement, and at intersects) at maximum intervals of
100 feet.
Other improvements (e.g., drainage inlets, wheelchair ramps, fire hydrants, sidewalks, and
curb and gutter).
Topographic features within project limits.
Elevation contours.
Overhead and underground utility crossings (plan and profile).
Roadway drainage crossings.
Location and description of underground utility witness markers.
2.4.1.3.5 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
Where exact routes of underground utilities are not defined within record drawings, the appropriate
EPA authority shall coordinate necessary electronic line detection and exploratory excavation
activities. Such utilities shall be located by survey and documented on the construction drawings.
2.4.1.3.6 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
Construction staking for new EPA facilities shall comply with local standards and with practices
approved by the appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
In the development of a site proposed for construction, it is necessary, at a minimum, to address, analyze,
and assess all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Site
Planning and Landscape Design, GSA document PBS-P100, as applicable.
2.4.2.1 IMPACT
The following issues are to be studied in assessing the impact of a project on a given site or the man-
made or natural environment:
On-site capacities of present and future utilities
Existing buildings (discussion shall include any need for temporary facilities and services to these
buildings)
Existing site utilities (discussion shall include any need for utility relocation and shutdown)
Stormwater run-off, wastewater discharge (including acid wastewater)
Existing traffic patterns and vehicles, including emergency and service vehicles
Availability and proximity of public transportation
Need for traffic phasing and control-plan requirements
Existing parking structures and surface parking (discussion shall include any need for temporary
parking areas and additional capacity)
2-9
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
Exhaust discharge
Energy usage (e.g., building placement/orientation, sun and shadow, analysis of prevailing wind
patterns)
Need for an environmental impact statement.
2.4.2.2 DEVELOPMENT
The following issues must be taken into account in determining whether the proposed development is
appropriate and compatible with its natural environment and surrounding community.
Preserving surrounding neighborhoods and communities. Laboratory facilities shall be located in
areas where local zoning permits; however, facilities should be no less than one-quarter mile from
existing residential developments and shall be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not
direct fumes exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments.
Preserving the character of the site, to the maximum possible extent, by retaining natural features,
such as ground forms, trees, and other natural vegetation.
Using the existing site to best advantage by locating and orienting buildings so that they are
compatible with natural site features.
Developing functional relationships between site access points, parking lots, buildings, service
areas, and all other project site elements.
Providing for orderly future expansion of facilities by considering logical expansion of buildings,
parking, and support services.
Reviewing and assessing the impact of development with respect to any approved campus master
plan and site infrastructure master plan.
2.4.2.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The following issues must be considered in planning any EPA facility or site.
2.4.2.3.1 ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
Sun angles, light and shadow studies, prevailing winds, existing topography, microclimatic
conditions, and major wooded areas shall be carefully analyzed to contribute to a more energy-
efficient solution. Energy conservation should be enhanced by careful consideration and
evaluation of the orientation of buildings. Climate assets should be maximized and climate
liabilities minimized
2.4.2.3.2 VIEWS
Proper orientation of facilities to capitalize on major vistas is strongly encouraged. Views into the
site from major roadways should be carefully designed to be attractive and reflective of EPA's
2.4.2.3.3 TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE
A design shall be provided that works with, and not against, the existing grades. Significant
positive drainage away from any existing or new construction is a primary concern. The design
shall preserve, as much as is practical, any major existing drainage patterns.
The natural grades of the site should be used to develop multilevel entry points, if possible.
Positive drainage away from all portions of the building is required.
2-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
The location of the 100-year floodplain shall be determined, and if this is present on the site,
the boundaries should be delineated on all surveys and site plans.
The impact of development on stormwater runoff must be assessed, including absorption and
retention..
2.4.2.3.4 ADJACENT LAND USE
In siting a facility, consideration should be given to existing land uses or potential development
nearby, because such land use may affect or restrict the facility design. Existing and proposed
traffic patterns shall be considered in the design of site access and driveway locations.
2.4.2.3.5 NOISE, FUMES, AND ODORS
Adjacent land uses may contribute noise, fumes, and odors; these uses shall be considered in the
site development process. Noise or odors may be severe enough to disqualify a site from
consideration; therefore, a thorough analysis of neighboring facilities must be undertaken to ensure
compatibility of the proposed facility with the existing adjacent land uses and environment.
2.4.2.3.6 VIBRATION
If there are adjacent land uses that produce vibrations that can be measured on a proposed site, the
extent of the vibration and whether it will affect the proposed program shall be determined.
2.4.2.4 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
All applicable publicly available documents shall be reviewed for any on-site historical or
archaeological information. Any public record indicating historically or archaeologically sensitive
areas on-site must be reported to EPA before any design is initiated. Archaeologically and historically
sensitive areas on-site must be completely avoided until, and after, a thorough investigation has been
completed and findings documented that provide direction on whether the area(s) in question may be
used or must be preserved for future exploration.
2.4.2.5 COMMUNITY ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
Environmental justice issues, as established by EPA, shall be addressed and the requirements of any
required community review processes ascertained. A report shall be provided to EPA early in the
design process and well before any community review is required on the project. All community
reviews are over and above any EPA design review; reviews shall not be combined. Requirements of
community review panels may include, but are not limited to, the following:
Separate plans prepared to specifically highlight or emphasize that group's concern.
Research and data collection to be used in generating special reports and in the environmental
assessment.
Presentation graphics for a formal submission or presentation during the review process.
Documentation of the review and approval process, submission requirements, deadlines for each
portion of the process, and the sequence that must be followed.
Identification of the methodologies, research, and data needed to identify and evaluate populations
at disproportionately high environmental or human health risks and to ensure that these needs are
considered in developing any EPA facility.
2.4.3 FACILITY SITING
This subsection addresses facility siting issues and requirements.
2-11
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
2.4.3.1 GENERAL
A site development plan shall be used to locate new facilities on existing or new sites in order to ensure
effective site utilization and avoid future conflicts between existing and new facilities.
During facility siting, an environmental assessment shall be prepared before the initiation of a
Government action that may significantly affect the environment.
To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited in floodplains or in areas subject to flash floods;
facility siting shall minimize destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands.
In selecting the particular site on an acquired or predetermined campus style site for new facilities,
the conditions and requirements of Section 3.2.2 of the Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines
and the following shall be considered:
Programmatic and operating efficiency.
Endemic plant and animal species.
Past use of site and existence of known Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
and/or Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA)
sites.
Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements.
Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils and contamination from
other exterior sources, natural or man-made).
Hazardous operations and consequences of potential accidents in adjacent facilities.
Wave action within any natural or man-made body of water (in accordance with the Coastal
Engineering Research Center [CERC] Shore Protection Manual).
Energy conservation requirements.
2.4.3.2 LABORATORY SITING
New laboratories, EPA owned and leased, should be sited in consideration of the following guidance.
Guidance from Criteria for Siting of Laboratory Facilities Based on Safety and Environmental
Factors, prepared for EPA by Johns Hopkins University, School of Hygiene and Public Health,
Peter S. J. Lees and Morton Corn.
Site acquisition methodology as prescribed in the Environmental Closure Process for EPA
Laboratories chapter of the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Guidelines.
Local zoning code.
Indoor air quality criteria referenced in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.
Location shall be large enough to accommodate the laboratory building and outbuildings
(hazardous materials building) with adequate setbacks meeting local requirements and RCRA
requirements.
Laboratories preferably shall be located in light industrial areas where there are provisions for
containing accidental spills prior to discharge to the local stormwater system and in areas that have
fully staffed emergency response personnel (fire and medical), including hazardous materials
(HAZMAT) teams.
Laboratories shall not be located in residential areas or in mixed-occupancy high rise locations.
2-12
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
2.4.3.3 BUILDING LOCATION
New buildings and building additions shall be located in accordance with the site development plan.
2.4.3.3.1 OPEN SPACE
Open space shall be provided between structures to accommodate site security, landscaping, and
other environmental considerations. Sufficient access shall be provided around building exteriors
to accommodate emergency vehicles, maintenance vehicles, and snow removal equipment. In cold
climates, building entrances, stairs, and other pedestrian circulation features should not be placed
along the north side of buildings or within shaded areas. Off-site drainage areas and the
environmental impacts that proposed stormwater management practices will have on surrounding
properties shall also be carefully reviewed.
2.4.3.3.2 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
The following conditions and requirements shall be considered during site selection for new
buildings:
Architectural and functional compatibility with the environment
Operation and service function relationships
Natural and humanistic orientation and wayfinding
Natural topographic and geologic conditions
Existing cultural and archaeological resources
Historic sites
Abandoned mines or wells and potential for subsidence
Endemic plant and animal species
Availability of existing utility services
Building setback requirements
Availability of existing road systems and public transportation
Traffic volume
Refuse handling and loading zone requirements
Adequacy for parking, future expansion, and other land use requirements
Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements
Physical protection requirements
Security and safeguard requirements
Energy conservation requirements
Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils)
Impact of site selection
Minimum fire separation between buildings (in accordance with National Fire Protection
Association [NFPA] 80A)
Utilities.
2.4.3.4 HAZARD SEGREGATION
In general, occupancies posing different levels of risk shall be separated by fire-resistive construction.
Areas shall be segregated as noted below and as required by local building codes and NFPA 101.
2.4.3.4.1 PARKING STRUCTURES
The construction, protection, and control of hazards in parking structures shall comply with the
requirements of NFPA 8 8 A. Parking garages located within buildings that contain other
occupancies shall be separated from the remainder of the building by construction that has a fire
resistance of at least 2 hours. Entrances between garages and elevators shall be protected by a
vestibule having a 1 !/2-hour, Class B or higher fire door. Doorways between garages and stairs,
building corridors, or other non-garage areas shall be protected by IVi-hour, Class B or higher fire
doors. The garage ventilation system must be designed as a separate entity from the main building
and from the occupied spaces, with the exhaust from the garage directed outside. No recirculation
2-13
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
of air is allowed in garages. In garages located under buildings, elevator vestibules shall be
positively pressurized to prevent garage vapors from entering the occupied areas.
2.4.3.5 BUFFER ZONES
The buffer zone between the EPA facility and other existing or potential sites for building(s) shall be
no less than 100 feet. Hazardous materials storage facilities (HMSF) shall be at least 50 feet away
from any building or potential sites for building(s). Both the main facility and the HMSF shall be
located at least 50 feet away from the property line. Existing highways and streets can be part of the
100-foot buffer zone. Paved parking area(s) for vehicles can be considered as part of the building
buffer zone.
2.4.4 SITE PREPARATION
Local topography shall be considered during project and facility design. New facilities shall be planned to
fit the local topography and to require a minimum amount of grading. Design shall include provisions for
erosion control and soil stabilization in ditches, fill slopes, embankments, and denuded areas, and
restoration of areas disturbed by the project. Restoration shall be to original or improved conditions.
2.4.4.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Site preparation design shall meet the following criteria:
Vehicle parking, sidewalks, and road requirements shall comply with subsection 2.6 of this Manual
Site drainage design shall comply with subsection 2.7 of this Manual
Site power and lighting shall comply with Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.
Site security requirements shall be taken into account and provided for in accordance with criteria
established by the appropriate EPA authority.
2.4.5 DEWATERING
The design, installation, and operation of dewatering systems for groundwater control shall be the
responsibility of the construction contractor, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The groundwater
investigation and the selection and design of a dewatering control system shall comply with TM 5-81 8-5
and consider recharge beds and retention basins. The design engineer shall determine whether the
assistance of a qualified groundwater hydrologist shall be required.
2.4.6 SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
All shoring and underpinning shall comply with the safety requirements of CFR Part 1926, Subpart P.
Remedial underpinning shall be performed where existing foundations are inadequate. Precautionary
underpinning shall be performed where new construction adjacent to an existing structure requires deeper
excavation. A structural engineer specializing in underpinning shall perform any underpinning design,
which shall comply with the principles in Winterkorn and Fang, Foundation Engineering Handbook.
2.4.7 EARTHWORK
Earthwork includes excavation, filling, stabilizing, and compaction of earth at the site. Earthwork also
includes the addition of borrow and the disposal of excavated material. The earthwork design shall
incorporate the findings of the geotechnical report required by subsection 2.3.3 of this Manual.
2.4.8 WATERFRONT CONSTRUCTION
Waterfront construction includes seawalls, docks, marinas, and other ancillary boating facilities associated
with coastal development. This type of construction for EPA facilities shall comply with applicable federal,
state, and local standards and with practices approved by the appropriate EPA authority.
2-14
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
2.5 Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements
2.5.1 GENERAL
Landscape planning, design, and development must be integrated with building massing, design, and
materials. The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a single
design that integrates site and buildings(s). The use of durable exterior materials that enhance both the site
landscaping and the building design and help to integrate the two design disciplines is strongly encouraged.
If the facility is to be a part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned
development, the landscape design as well as the building design must be integrated and compatible with
the style(s) of the previously constructed permanent facilities on campus. The existing physical features of
the site and surrounding buildings shall be observed and documented.
The landscaping of the site shall create an environmentally sensitive and aesthetically attractive design.
The natural environment should blend with the proposed new construction.
Landscaped courts and open spaces that are accessible to all staff are encouraged.
Grass-covered areas away from public view shall be provided and equipped as outside eating and
visiting areas (with picnic tables, benches, and landscape furnishings).
The facility surroundings shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, flowering plants, and grass in a way
that will enhance the aesthetic character of the building(s) and hide or screen exposed equipment and
building parts, features, or functions that, by their nature, are not aesthetically pleasant. Vegetation
may be used to screen, or form a barrier to, particulate matter and to protect the building(s) from motor
vehicle pollutant sources.
Using trees and vegetation to shade large hardscape areas, such as parking lots and summer sun
building exposures, is encouraged.
The topography of the site around the building(s) shall slope away from the building(s) and away from
neighboring building(s) to direct any water away from the new facility and from any neighboring
building(s).
Xeriscape design practices (use of sustainable local/regional vegetation requiring minimal watering)
shall be used to minimize maintenance of the plantings. Use of irrigated turf grass in new landscape
design shall be prohibited.
In general, low-maintenance landscape design and features shall be used. High efficiency irrigation,
and/or the use of captured rainwater is encouraged where irrigation is necessary.
Energy efficient exterior lighting with low-voltage or solar powered is encouraged.
2.5.2 PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR SITE DESIGN
All site landscaping shall be designed by a state-registered landscape architect. This landscape architect
must maintain his or her registration continuously and without break for at least the entire design and
construction process and for the life of the design contract for the project.
All site landscaping shall be installed and/or modified by a professional landscaper or professional
gardener. All landscaping (plants and grass), except for annuals, if used, shall be guaranteed for 16
months after acceptance by EPA.
2-15
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
All costs for the landscaping shall be anticipated in the final cost estimate. These costs shall be
included in the overall costs of the project. Such costs shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
Retaining curbs and walls
Plantings and grasses
Exterior signage and graphics
Site furniture and furnishings
Irrigation
Site hardscape and special pavings
Warranties and guarantees
Exterior screens and barriers
Specialty features incorporated into the design
Maintenance guarantees
Site lighting
Site sculpture.
2.5.3 GENERAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
All landscaping and site amenities for the proposed development shall be in accordance with all applicable
local, state, and federal codes and industry standards. Also, landscaping and site amenities shall comply
with any master plan or campus design requirements and all construction requirements and standards. The
more stringent requirements shall be used if a conflict exists.
2.5.3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
The landscape architect shall (1) preserve existing trees and undergrowth, where appropriate, for
buffers; (2) review buffer requirements of the local community; and (3) use existing trees to the extent
possible, since the larger size will provide greater immediate impact on-site.
2.5.3.2 PLANTINGS
Guidelines on plantings are as follows:
Establish functional design criteria.
Consider focal or entry area; design main entry area to produce an obvious sense of arrival at
facility
Create views or screen views as needed.
Develop color and seasonal interest.
Provide orientation (e.g., with respect to sun and wind) for facility and creation of shade.
Consider ultimate size and scale relative to specific area or site size.
Consider site-appropriate formal planting plan or informal, naturalistic plan.
Avoid major plantings in areas where expansion is planned.
Provide appropriate location of plantings relative to prevailing wind and sun.
Break up large areas of pavement with landscape islands.
Choose local/regional plants and design plantings to be tolerant of climate, weather conditions,
rainfall, and other environmental conditions.
Determine irrigation requirements.
Determine maintenance requirements such as fertilization rates, soil acidity, and, if required,
pruning and trimming needs.
Coordinate plantings with location of signs, light standards, hydrants, underground utilities, and
other man-made structures.
Ensure that lawns slope to provide proper drainage (minimum 1 percent grade).
Provide ground cover on severe slopes for aesthetic and maintenance considerations.
2-16
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
Planting must be reviewed and approved by the appropriate EPA personnel. The landscaping plan
shall identify the names, caliper sizes, and number of trees, shrubs, and all other plantings in the
plan.
2.5.3.3 SITE FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS
Guidelines for choosing and locating site furniture and furnishings are as follows:
Select furniture design to complement the building theme
Use materials with recycled content as designated in the CPG, with an emphasis on sustainability
and longevity
Determine quantity and location of furniture
Establish function intended for seating and waiting areas, outdoor meeting areas, and eating areas
Determine flag pole heights, location, and quantity and integrate into the design
Locate fences and identify their style, color, and purpose
Integrate trash and recycling receptacles, cigarette urns, newspaper dispenser boxes, and mailboxes
into the design
Include safety review of proposed surfaces, equipment, and layout of programmed recreational and
playground equipment.
2.5.3.4 SITE LIGHTING
The following guidelines apply to site lighting:
Design lighting to complement the architectural and land planning theme and to accord with any
current master plan or campus requirements.
Utilize energy-efficient and easily maintainable fixture types (the selection of lighting fixtures must
consider long-term costs).
Heights of lighting standards must be appropriate to the scale of the building and the area being lit.
Provide lighting intensity that is commensurate with the use of the area and the health and safety of
employees and other persons accessing the building during non-daylight hours.
Control light with respect to adjacent property and to minimize glare, striving for zero direct beam
illumination leaving the building site.
2.5.3.5 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
Considerations with respect to exterior signage are:
Appropriate scale
Viewing angle and speed of observer
Appropriate color and letter style and clarity of message
Appropriate locations for signage, including intersections, parking lots, and entries
Design that complements the building style, accent color, or building color
Clear identification of functions: traffic direction, orientation, and general information
Coordination of building identification at site entries with that on the buildings themselves;
identification should be strong, legible, and compatible with interior signage and graphics
Compliance with signage ordinances (such compliance is required)
Providing special identification for the project, if required
Signage must be reviewed and approved by appropriate EPA personnel
Designing exterior signage to allow future removal and change without damage to existing exterior
materials and to allow possible reuse of the signage after its removal and/or reuse of the lettering
of the removed signage.
2-17
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
2.5.3.6 OUTSIDE SERVICE AND UTILITY AREAS
Many elements are necessary for the proper operation of a building. Some are visually undesirable and
require proper planning for screening and buffering, which should be incorporated into the building
design. The design professional is responsible for coordinating the work of all disciplines and for
identifying all elements of the proposed project that will have a visual impact. The following are
among the items that may require appropriate screening and buffering:
Meters
Vaults
Transformers
Dump sters
Recycling containers
Compactor units
Emergency generators
High pressure gas cylinder storage and manifold systems
Pressure reducers
Valves
Pump hoses
Outdoor storage areas
Loading docks
Mechanical equipment
Compressors and cooling towers.
2.5.4 HARDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
Hardscape (paving) and hardscape materials shall be integrated with the building and architectural planning
and with landscaping design and concept. In general, materials that soften typical hardscape (paving)
designs shall be used. Light colored, high albedo, hardscape materials shall be considered to reduce the
absorption and radiation of heat. Use of porous pavement materials is encouraged where feasible.
Appropriate material usage shall be integrated with an understanding of project budget and public versus
restricted access and use areas.
2.5.5 RECREATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Recreational site requirements shall be reviewed with EPA on a project-by-project basis.
2.5.6 IRRIGATION
Water efficient irrigation methods, such as drip irrigation systems and low-flow bubblers, shall be utilized
where supplemental moisture is required. All irrigation systems shall be equipped with automatic
controllers that activate the system according to a desired frequency and duration, and shall be equipped
with rain or soil moisture sensors that will prevent irrigation during periods of rainfall or when there is
sufficient moisture in the ground for plant health and survival. Use of reclaimed water and/or stormwater for
landscape irrigation is acceptable and encouraged.
2.6 Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement
2.6.1 ACCESS AND CIRCULATION
Although visual and other aesthetic aspects of access to the project site, and thus to the project facilities, are
critical, the primary access requirements involve fire and life safety. The most current version of the Safety
Manual shall be reviewed for these guidelines. Either traffic data will be provided or a traffic impact
analysis will be performed. Geometric design of all roads, streets, access drives, and parking areas shall
comply with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) GDHS-84.
Gradients for roads, streets, and access drives also shall comply with AASHTO GDHS-84. Road and street
2-18
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
grade changes in excess of 1 percent shall be accomplished by means of vertical curves. The length of
vertical curves shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO GDHS-84. Roadway centerline gradient
profiles shall be shown for vertical control.
Design and details of construction of flexible and rigid pavements shall comply with the local state
highway department standards. Concrete valley gutters may be provided if swales with flexible
pavements are necessary. Joint layout plans and details shall be provided for all rigid pavements. A
thickened edge shall be used along edges of rigid pavement where future construction will occur.
Design should promote logical wayfinding.
Signs, pavement markings, channelization, and other traffic control measures shall comply with the
requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices.
2.6.1.1 FIRE DEPARTMENT APPARATUS ACCESS
Fire department access involves fire department apparatus and on-site fixed fire safety equipment (e.g.,
fire hydrants, fire loops, fire pumps, post-indicator valves, automatic sprinkler and standpipe system
connections), vehicular circulation, pedestrian circulation, and parking. Local codes, ordinances and
fire department requirements must be reviewed to provide adequate access. The following minimum
requirements shall be met:
All new buildings shall have at least two sides readily accessible to fire department apparatus at all
times.
Fire lanes shall be provided for buildings that are set back more than 150 feet from a road or that
exceed 30 feet in height and are set back more than 50 feet from a road.
Fire lanes shall be at least 20 feet wide, and the road edge closest to the building shall be at least
10 feet from the building.
The minimum roadway turning radius shall conform to a 48-foot semitrailer template.
Fire lanes shall be constructed of an all-weather driving surface capable of supporting imposed
loads of 25 tons. If appropriate for the area and climate, these lanes may consist of compacted
earth with top soil and seed.
Any dead-end road more than 300 feet long shall be provided with a turnaround at the closed end
of at least 90 feet in diameter.
Fire lanes and access areas for fire hydrants and automatic sprinkler or standpipe connections shall
be clearly identified by painting the curbs yellow, with black lettering reading "NO PARKING -
FIRE LANE" spaced at 40-foot intervals. In addition, signage carrying the same message shall be
posted at 100-foot intervals along the restricted area.
2.6.1.2 VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
Vehicular circulation design shall comply with the following requirements and guidelines:
Vehicular circulation shall be designed in accordance with code requirements and any overall
campus master plan or facilities master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site. Circulation
shall respect the pedestrian circulation environment of the campus and/or facilities and provide for
safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians. Existing traffic studies shall be evaluated and
coordinated in order to implement the best possible overall circulation system.
2-19
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
Vehicular access to a new project shall be evaluated with respect to existing and planned site
circulation and shall provide for clear separation of staff, visitor, service, and bus vehicular
circulation.
Adequate emergency vehicle access shall be provided to all points on the building periphery by use
of proper grades, surface materials, clearances, and other design features.
Entrances to the facility or campus shall be clearly marked and located so that access to each
building, parking area, group of buildings, and service area is convenient and recognizable.
The siting of new buildings shall take into account the requirements of future expansion, design of
buildings, roads, and surface and structured parking.
Site vehicular design shall provide adequate space for queuing at drop-offs and exit drives for
visitors, buses, 18-wheel vehicles, taxis, and other vehicle types, keeping turning conflicts to a
minimum and permitting proper service vehicle maneuvering and staging.
Internal drive aisle widths and turning radii shall be designed to allow for the expected service and
emergency vehicles.
Loop circulation is encouraged to minimize site traffic backup.
2.6.2 PARKING AND LOADING FACILITIES
Parking areas should not be located in front of buildings or at visually prominent locations along routes of
approach. Landscaping, grading, and location shall emphasize attractive features and de-emphasize or
obscure undesirable features. Parking and its related circulation shall be separated from the service
circulation to minimize conflicts. Parking lots shall meet local governmental standards for circulation,
layout, and safety. Handicapped parking allocations shall comply with ADA guidelines. Perimeter
concrete curbs and gutters shall be considered for all parking areas and access drives in built-up areas. In
remote or little-used areas, concrete curbs and gutters shall be used only when required to control drainage.
Removable prefabricated concrete wheel stops may be used where appropriate. Specific parking design
guidelines are presented in the following subsection.
2.6.2.1 PARKING DESIGN
Parking for the proposed development shall be based on applicable codes for occupancy, local zoning
requirements, and any campus or facility master plan in effect at the subject site. If the parking
required by codes falls under 25 cars per 10,000 gross square feet of the facility, a more detailed
analysis shall be made to verify that adequate parking is provided. If local codes require more parking
spaces, the more stringent requirements shall apply. As part of the site development phase, multilevel
parking garages or below-ground parking shall be considered as an alternative to surface parking. At a
minimum, the following guidelines shall be followed:
Distribution of total parking (e.g., employee [by type], police, emergency vehicle, visitor,
handicapped, motorcycle, bicycle) shall be calculated and clearly shown in the site development
phase. The minimum size for standard passenger car stalls shall be 9 feet x 19 feet. Up to 15
percent of the parking may be designated for compact cars. Stalls for compact cars shall be at least
8 feet x 18 feet. Car-pool policies should be considered in the calculation (and given preferential
locations.)
The structural design for pavement on surface lots shall comply with local state highway
department standards for general parking areas.
2-20
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
Parking aisles and lots subject to frequent truck traffic shall be evaluated to determine whether
thicker pavement sections are required.
Design calculations shall provide for a potential growth in staff of 10 percent. Provision shall also
be made for expansion of the facility, with the design for future parking expansion shown.
Alternate fuel refueling station should be considered on a facility-by-facility basis.
Parking areas must be clearly related to entry points. Walking distances should be kept to a
minimum.
Handicapped parking spaces shall be provided in accordance with ADA requirements or the
requirements of state codes and ordinances if these are more restrictive.
Sufficient slope (1 percent minimum) shall be provided for positive drainage for runoff. Slopes
shall be no more than 4 percent.
Sufficient open lawn area shall be allowed adjacent to parking lots for snow storage, as required by
climate and area.
Wherever possible, 90-degree parking design should be used.
Porous paving and/or recharge beds under parking should be considered, retaining the maximum
amount of on-site storm drainage.
Surface drainage in parking areas must not cross designated pedestrian paths.
Dead-end parking bays are not allowed.
Existing large trees should be integrated into new parking areas, where feasible.
Except in remote or little-used areas, parking areas should provide curbs (consistent with site
design) with a minimum 2-foot overhang behind the curb.
2.6.2.2 BICYCLE FACILITIES
Convenient bicycle parking facilities shall be included at all facilities, except those in remote areas.
Suitable means for securing the bikes must be provided, sheltered/covered areas are encouraged. The
capacity should be based on local conditions but a minimum capacity of 5% of the buildings's
occupants is suggested, which is commensurate with LEED requirements.
2.6.3 PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
A functional system of walks connecting structures, operational areas, parking areas, streets, and other
access paths shall be provided to meet the demands of pedestrian traffic. The location and width of these
areas and paths shall be determined in accordance with the site development plan. Walks subject to use by
the physically disabled shall comply with current ADA guidelines. Specific guidelines for the design of
pedestrian walkways are prescribed in the following subsection.
2.6.3.1 DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS
Pedestrian circulation shall be designed in accordance with industry standards, code requirements, and
any overall campus master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.
Pedestrian walks shall have a minimum of 1 percent cross pitch for drainage.
2-21
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
The width of walks shall be a function of pedestrian traffic volumes determined by the master plan
and/or by specific project requirements.
Walks shall accommodate handicapped persons. Slopes, landings, and access points shall be in
accordance with ADA requirements as well as with the most stringent applicable code or
combination of codes applicable to the project.
Crosswalks from parking, bus stops, and other buildings shall be clearly painted and properly
assigned.
Walkway paths shall be designed in response to the expected-origin/destination analysis of the site
and its users.
Drop curbs shall be used to provide transition for handicapped persons at crosswalks, drop-off
zones, and ends of walkways.
2.6.4 AIRPORTS AND HELIPORTS
This subsection provides general guidelines for design of aviation facilities and indicates requirements and
conditions that must be considered in designing and assessing such facilities.
2.6.4.1 GENERAL
Planning and design of aviation facilities and airspace clearances shall comply with Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA) AC 150/5050-5. Planning and design of aviation facilities shall emphasize
safety for all modes of aircraft operations. Aircraft installations require permanent unobstructed
airspace, and facilities and equipment constructed to facilitate maintenance, ground handling, and flight
operations.
Landing and takeoff paths (traffic patterns) shall be oriented to avoid need for critical-facility
overflights. Traffic patterns and altitudes shall be established and published to provide for aircraft
approaches that are away from critical facilities.
Heliports shall be sited, and traffic patterns established, so that normal operation does not require
overflights of critical facilities. Heliports shall not be located closer to critical facilities than 2
times the dimension of the landing pad or 3 times the rotor diameter of the largest helicopter
authorized to land at the heliport.
2.6.4.2 SITE CONSIDERATIONS
The following site conditions shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy of the aviation
facility:
Topography
Vegetation and existing construction
Weather elements
Prevailing wind direction in summer and winter
Soil conditions
Flood hazards
Natural and man-made obstructions
Adjacent land uses
Availability of usable airspace
Accessibility of usable roads
Location of site utilities
Accommodation of future expansion
Aboveground utilities.
2-22
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
2.6.4.3 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The layout of airfield facilities shall support operational efficiency and provide safe conditions for
takeoff and landing operations and for ground handling of aircraft.
Airfield safety clearances shall comply with the clearance criteria of FAA AC 1 50/5300. The
critical-decision-point and emergency landing areas for the various aircraft using a facility shall be
determined on the basis of the respective aircraft performance charts.
All other applicable design elements shall conform to the most current FAA criteria.
In accordance with FAA AC 150/5070-6A, airfield layout shall also consider:
Wind direction and velocity analyzed
A taxiway system
Parking aprons
Supporting facilities.
2.7 Stormwater Management
2.7.1 STREET DRAINAGE
Street drainage in developed areas shall be conveyed within the roadway cross section. Curb inlets shall be
used to divert storm flows to surface and subsurface Stormwater conveyance systems. Curb inlets shall not
be located within curb returns or in areas of heavy pedestrian traffic. Pedestrian and cyclist safety shall be
considered during selection of storm inlet grates. Curb gaps shall be used where roadside drainage swales
exist. Wherever possible, curb openings with inlets located in grassed areas should be utilized in lieu of
curb inlets.
In locations where uninterrupted vehicular access is essential to critical operational activities, roadway cross
sections shall be designed to convey runoff from the 25-year, 6-hour storm so that one driving lane width
(12 feet) is free of flowing or standing water. Lower classification roadways shall be designed to convey
runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm. Stormwater management systems shall have sufficient capacity to
ensure that runoff from the 100-year, 6-hour design storm will not exceed a depth of 10!/2 inches at any
point within the street right-of-way or extend more than 21A inches above the top of the curb in urban
streets. Inverted crown roadway cross sections shall not be used unless approved by EPA.
2.7.2 WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT
Site development plans shall be developed with careful review of the impact the plan will have on the
watershed. Appropriate Stormwater management strategies shall be developed to minimize or eliminate
adverse effects on existing and future development within the watershed.
2.7.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
Erosion and sedimentation control measures, in accordance with federal, state, and local standards, shall be
used during construction. The site should be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.
2.7.4 STORMWATER RETENTION AND DETENTION
Site development plans shall incorporate appropriate Stormwater retention/detention facilities into the storm
drainage system. These facilities must be designed in strict accordance with all applicable federal, state, and
local requirements. Consider a further decrease in the rate and quantity of storm water run-off as an
environmental design strategy.
2-23
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
2.7.4.1 ROOF RECOVERY, CISTERN
Designers shall consider the use of cisterns to capture roof drainage for on-site use. Cistern design
should match the expected quantities of recoverable rainfall to planned use, such as toilet flushing,
irrigation, or cooling tower make-up. Cistern location should accommodate the configuration of the
rainwater collection system, provide convenient access for planned water use, and fit within the
aesthetics of the building architecture and building landscape plan.
2.7.4.2 DISTRIBUTED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
To the maximum extent practical, implement distributed stormwater management techniques to
minimize the hydrologic effects of development. Distributed management techniques (or integrated
management practices) that should be considered include:
Bioretention facilities
Dry wells
Filter/buffer strips and other multifunctional landscape areas
Grassed swales, bioretention swales, and wet swales
Infiltration trenches.
2.7.4.3 REDUCE/MINIMIZE TOTAL IMPERVIOUS AREA
Careful consideration should be applied during site lay-out to minimize the total footprint of
impervious land use required for roadways, sidewalks, driveways, and parking areas. Where ever
practical, porous paving materials shall be used as substitutes for impervious surfaces. Ultimate
material selection shall be based on permeability, durability under design traffic load, maintainability
and cost effectiveness.
2.7.5 CONVEYANCE
Subsurface and open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall meet the following requirements.
2.7.5.1 STORM SEWERS
Subsurface drainage systems shall be sized to accommodate runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm and
shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is substantial risk to critical facilities and
operations. Subsurface system designs shall meet sediment transport requirements. Storm sewers shall
be designed to maintain a minimum scour velocity of 2 feet per second. New storm sewers shall be
sized for open channel flow. The minimum storm sewer size shall be 15 inches. The minimum culvert
size shall be 15 inches. For roof drain systems, the minimum pipe size for laterals and collectors shall
be 6 inches.
2.7.5.2 OPEN CHANNELS
Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be sized to accommodate the 10-year, 6-hour
design flow with a minimum freeboard and shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is
substantial risk to critical facilities and operations.
Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be designed for minimum maintenance. The
potential for scour or deposition within earth-lined channels shall be considered before approval by the
appropriate EPA authority. Preference for earth-lined or "armored" channels shall be based on a
comparison of capital, maintenance, and operation costs. Inlets to open channel stormwater
conveyance systems shall be placed at locations where erosion potential is minimal.
2.7.6 STORMWATER QUALITY
Site development shall incorporate quality control measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants in
stormwater prior to discharge into receiving waters. Construction sites that disturb one acre or more may be
required to obtain a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit, including
2-24
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
developing a site pollution prevention plan. See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual,
Environmental Management Guidelines.
2.7.7 FLOODPLAIN AND WETLANDS DEVELOPMENT
Development, modification, or occupancy of floodplains and wetlands should be avoided, particularly when
practical alternatives exist. To the extent possible, EPA shall meet the requirements of Executive Orders
11988 and 11990. EPA shall:
Avoid, to the extent possible, the long-term and short-term adverse impacts associated with the
destruction of wetlands and the occupancy and modification of floodplains and wetlands, and avoid
direct and indirect support of floodplain and wetlands development wherever there is a practicable
alternative for new development.
Incorporate floodplain management goals and wetland protection considerations into its planning,
regulation, and decision making.
Carefully consider the potential impacts of any EPA action in a floodplain and the impacts of any new
EPA construction in wetlands not located in a floodplain.
Identify, consider, and, as appropriate, implement alternative actions to avoid or mitigate adverse
impacts on floodplains and wetlands.
Provide opportunity for early public review of any plans or proposals for actions in floodplains or new
construction in wetlands.
Ensure that construction within floodplains or wetlands complies with 10 CFR Part 1022 and NEPA
and implementing regulations.
2.7.8 COASTAL DEVELOPMENT
The development of site boating, docking, and seawall facilities shall conform to all federal, state, and local
requirements. Development should not allow any dredging and fill dumping at waters edge.
2.8 Utilities and Support Services
2.8.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to water distribution systems for domestic (potable) and industrial (nonpotable)
uses. The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) is subject to the approval of
the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Where use of dual water systems is approved, the
location and alignment of such systems must be clearly identified by location markers placed throughout the
site at intervals specified by the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Both systems must also be
clearly identified on the record drawings.
Cross connections between domestic and industrial or irrigation systems are prohibited. Domestic
water conveyed within distribution systems that serve EPA facilities shall comply with the applicable
Safe Drinking Water Act (SOWA) requirements; 40 CFR Parts 141-142; and all other applicable state,
regional, and local requirements. The quality of domestic water within such distribution systems shall
be protected from degradation by installation of reduced-pressure principal assembly backflow
preventers to prevent backflow of contaminants or pollutants into the system.
Drinking water in newly constructed facilities must be tested to ascertain compliance with the National
Primary Drinking Water Regulations and be tested for lead and copper to insure they do not exceed
2-25
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
drinking water action levels. See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual, Environmental
Management Guidelines.
Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance with the National Plumbing Code. Only
devices approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research shall be
used. (Refer to Manual of Cross-Connection Control [9th Edition].)
2.8.1.1 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
The following considerations shall be incorporated into the project planning.
During route selection and initial planning for water distribution systems, the following conditions
and requirements shall be considered:
Projections concerning future population and development
Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions
Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire, and special water usage
Hydraulic design criteria
Health and safety requirements
Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors and topographic features)
Energy conservation and environmental constraints.
Distribution system layouts shall be as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial
planning efforts shall optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:
Facilitate future system expansion
Strengthen fire protection capabilities
Minimize conflicts with other utilities
Reduce maintenance requirements.
Water distribution systems shall be included within the utility master plan.
2.8.1.2 SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Domestic water distribution mains shall be sized to accommodate the greatest anticipated demand (e.g.,
fire demand, special requirements, or the peak domestic demand). Domestic water distribution systems
shall be designed to deliver a peak domestic flow of 2!/2 times the average daily demand, plus any
special demands, at a minimum residual pressure of 20 pounds per square inch (psi) at ground elevation
(or higher pressure residual pressure if special conditions warrant).
Domestic water distribution systems that also serve fire protection requirements shall be designed
to satisfy fire flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic requirements plus any
industrial or process demands that cannot be reduced during a fire.
Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per
minute (gpm) at a minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Where domestic water distribution systems
must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e., sprinklers or foamite systems), adequate residual
pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of these systems. Fire hydrant branches (from
main to hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter and shall be no longer than 300 feet. A
gate valve shall be installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate maintenance. Fire
hydrants shall be installed at maximum intervals of 400 feet and shall not be located more than 300
feet from the buildings to be protected. Each building shall be protected by at least two hydrants.
All water mains supplying fire protection systems and fire hydrants shall be treated as fire mains
and installed in accordance with NFPA 24.
2-26
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi. Water distribution systems shall be
designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at ground level) in mains and
building service lines. Where the gradient across the service area is such that multiple pressure
zones are necessary to maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure-reducing valves shall be
used to separate each pressure zone. Use of pressure relief and surge relief valves shall be
considered, as necessary, to preclude system damage from water hammer.
Air release and vacuum breaker valves shall be installed, as required, at high points within the
distribution system and in long supply mains.
Distribution system mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 3 feet. In cold climates, at
roadway crossings in high traffic areas, and at railroad crossings, additional cover shall be
provided to prevent freezing. Building service lines shall be at least 1 inch in diameter. Service
lines that are less than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a
corporation stop and a copper gooseneck, with a service stop below frost line. Service lines that
are more than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a rigid
connection and shall have a gate valve located below frost line. Risers from frost line to floorlines
of buildings shall be adequately insulated. Water storage facilities shall comply with NFPA 22.
Soil and groundwater conditions (e.g., soil corrosivity) on the site shall be considered in the
selection of pipe materials. Where ferrous pipe is installed within the distribution system,
insulating couplings shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion.
2.8.1.3 WELLHEAD DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES
Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, on-site drilled wells shall be capable of
producing a minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute unless otherwise
required by the EPA project officer. The water must be of a suitable quality for rearing and
maintaining fish cultures. It must not be contaminated with pesticides, heavy metals, sulfides, silica, or
chlorides. The anions should be those found in natural lakes or streams. Water quality parameters
should be as follows:
Dissolved oxygen: > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L)
pH: 7.2-8.5
Hardness: 40-200 mg/L (as CaCO3)
Alkalinity: Slightly less than hardness
Iron: < 1.0 mg/L
Chlorides: < 250 mg/L as chlorides and sulfates
Sulfides: < 2.0 micrograms per liter (ug/L) as undissociated H2S.
The well and pump shall be protected from the elements. Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be installed
as reservoirs for water prior to distribution.
2.8.2 WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains, collector
sewers and interceptor sewers, and building sewers 5 feet beyond the building foundation). The following
elements shall be considered during wastewater system design:
Grey water systems should be considered as an environmental design strategy
Industrial wastewater and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by EPA shall be
excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.
Pretreatment systems (such as acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet EPA
2-27
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 2 - Site Work
specifications and/or requirements of the publicly owned treatment works (POTW) and NPDES as
applicable.
Hydraulic design of wastewater collection systems shall comply with TM 5-814-1, Sanitary and
Industrial Wastewater Collection; Gravity Sewers and Appurtenances (March 1985), TM 5-814-2,
Sanitary and Industrial Wastewater Collection - Pumping Stations and Force Mains (March 1985) and
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 37. All wastewater collection systems shall be designed
for gravity flow unless such systems are not economically feasible. Sewage lift stations and force
mains shall not be used unless approved by AEAMB. Feasibility analyses and economic evaluations of
the costs of lift stations and force mains for construction, operation, and maintenance shall be prepared
and submitted to AEAMB for approval. Sewers and force mains shall be sized to accommodate the
estimated daily maximum and minimum flow for the initial and final years of the design period. These
maximum and minimum flows shall be specified by the appropriate EPA authority in accordance with
ASCE 37.
Velocities in gravity sewers and force mains shall not exceed 10 feet per second.
Gravity sewers shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second.
Force mains shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 3% feet per second.
The minimum size pipe for a sanitary sewer between manholes is 8".
The minimum size pipe for the sanitary building connection is 6".
The minimum slopes for a 6" sanitary sewer is 0.6%.
The minimum slope for an 8" sanitary sewer is 0.4%.
For the preliminary design, domestic water consumption rates shall be used to approximate wastewater
flows. For the final design, where possible, actual flow data from an adjacent service area similar to
the service area under consideration shall be used to estimate wastewater discharges. In the absence of
such data, metered water use, less the consumptive use (i.e., water withdrawal rate), can be used.
Sewers and force mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 2 feet. Additional cover shall be
provided to prevent freezing in cold climates and at roadway crossings. Sewer and force main trench
widths shall be minimized; however, excavations, trenching, and shoring shall comply with 29 CFR
Part 1926, Subpart P. Pipe bedding specified by the pipe manufacturer shall be in place before sewers
and force mains are installed.
Sewers or force mains shall not be routed within 100 feet of any well or reservoir that serves as a
potable water supply. In all instances where such horizontal separation cannot be maintained, the sewer
or force main shall be ductile iron pipe. Where groundwater is near the surface, special precautions
shall be taken to prevent sewer infiltration or exfiltration.
The horizontal distance between the water pipe and a sewer or force main shall not be less than 10 feet
except where the bottom of the water line will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe or
force main, in which case the water pipe shall be laid at least 6 feet (horizontally) from the sewer or
force main. Where water pipes cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall be fully
encased in concrete for at least 10 feet each side of the crossing or, for this same distance, shall be
made of pressure pipe, with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Water lines
shall, in all cases, cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and shall be at least 2 feet above
the sewer main. Joints in the sewer main that are within 3 feet (horizontally) of the crossing shall be
encased in concrete.
Where feasible, sewers and force mains shall not be routed under buildings or other permanent
structures. Sewers and force mains shall be adjacent and parallel to paved roadways. Sewers and force
mains shall not pass beneath paved roadways except at roadway crossings. Where feasible, utility cuts
within existing roadways shall be perpendicular to the roadway center line to minimize trench length.
2-28
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 2 - Site Work
Diagonal roadway cuts shall be avoided whenever possible. Consideration should be given to boring
and jacking pipe or directional drilling for roadway crossings.
The selection of sewer and force main material shall be based on wastewater characteristics and soil
conditions. Inverted siphons using high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall be used for sanitary
sewer stream crossings. HDPE pipe placed below the stream bed shall be used for force main stream
crossings. Ductile iron shall also be used for sewers placed at shallow depths (3' or less) under paved
surfaces subject to vehicular traffic. Infiltration-exfiltration test requirements shall be specified within
the contract documents.
2.8.3 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Gas distribution shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with NFPA
54. Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.
2.8.4 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Site power and lighting shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this
Manual.
2.8.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Site communications shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16.14 of this Manual.
2.8.6 SOLID WASTE COLLECTION SYSTEMS
Management of hazardous waste shall comply with Subtitle C of RCRA (see EPA Facilities Manual,
Volume 4). Management of nonhazardous solid waste shall comply with Subtitle D of RCRA. In addition,
each building should accommodate a nonhazardous waste recycling program, with areas for
collection/separation convenient to each work area as well as a central recycling space for building-wide
collection, separation, and storage. The recycling program should be planned for recycling paper, glass,
plastics, metals, and toner cartridges. Recycling bins conforming to EPA's standards shall be planned for
and provided for relevant support spaces as indicate in Section 1 of this Manual.
Building corridors, elevators, trash rooms, and/or loading docks shall accommodate collection hampers and
containers for aggregating, moving, and temporarily storing recyclable materials. The loading dock shall
accommodate the installation and operation of a compactor for mixed office paper and/or corrugated
cardboard.
END OF SECTION 2
2-29
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 3 - Concrete
Section 3 - Concrete
3.1 General Requirements
3.1.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section covers the design and construction of plain, reinforced, and prestressed concrete structures,
whether of cast-in-place or precast concrete construction. The use of recycled materials in cast-in-place and
precast applications is encouraged, to the extent permitted by state codes. The requirements of this section
shall be used in conjunction with the structural design sections.
3.1.2 CODES
Concrete materials, design, and construction for buildings and other structures shall comply with American
Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 and local building codes, as applicable.
3.1.3 USE OF RECOVERED MATERIALS IN CONCRETE
Use of coal fly ash, or any additives, in concrete shall be governed by state building codes. Additives in
floor slabs should be minimized to avoid interaction with adhesives or sealants. [Note: Testing for toxic
contaminants should not be necessary if using materials covered under the CPG.]
3.2 Concrete Formwork
Formwork for concrete construction shall comply with ACI 347R, ACI SP-4, and state building codes, as
applicable.
3.3 Concrete Reinforcement
3.3.1 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
Reinforcement materials for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with state building codes
and ACI 318, as applicable.
3.3.2 REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
Reinforcement details shall comply with ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and state building codes, as applicable.
3.4 Cast-ln-Place Concrete
3.4.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers the selection of materials; proportioning of mixes; and mixing, placing, testing, and
quality control of cast-in-place concrete.
3.4.2 MATERIALS, TESTING, AND QUALITY CONTROL
Materials, testing, and quality control shall comply with ACI 318 and state building codes. Recycled non-
hazardous materials and recovered materials as designed in the CPG shall be used in concrete mixes to the
extent permitted by state building code.
3.4.3 TOLERANCES
Tolerances shall be as recommended in ACI 347R, ACI 117, and state building code.
3-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 3 - Concrete
3.4.4 SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE MIXES
The proportions for concrete mixes of normal-weight concrete shall comply with state building code and
ACI 211.1. The proportions for structural lightweight concrete shall comply with state building code and
ACI211.2.
3.4.5 MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
Mixing, transporting, and placing shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI
304R.
3.4.6 CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
Hot-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 305R.
Cold-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 306R.
3.4.7 POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
In addition to the standards and resources referenced in other subsections, the Post-Tensioning Institute
(PTI) Post-Tensioning Manual may be used for the design and construction of post-tensioned concrete
structures.
3.5 Precast/Prestressed Concrete
3.5.1 STRUCTURAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of precast, precast and prestressed, and precast
and post-tensioned structures. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, precast
concrete shall comply with the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Manual (PCI MNL)-116. PCI MNL-
120 and the PTI Post-Tensioning Manual may also be used as guides for the design and construction of
precast concrete structures.
3.5.2 ARCHITECTURAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of architectural precast, and architectural precast
and prestressed, concrete members. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections,
architectural precast members shall comply with the PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-122.
3.6 Cementitious Decks for Buildings
3.6.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for building structures and
prefabricated floor and roof systems such as:
Lightweight precast reinforced concrete planks
Lightweight precast reinforced concrete channel slabs
Reinforced gypsum planks
Structural cement-fiber roof deck systems
Reinforced poured-gypsum-over-formboard roof systems.
3.6.2 MATERIALS, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION
The materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for buildings shall comply with the
requirements of local building codes, manufacturer's recommendations, and CPG guidelines for recovered
material content. In the event of a conflict between the local building code and the manufacturer's
recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.
3-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 3 - Concrete
3.7 Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
This subsection covers the evaluation of damage or deterioration, selection of repair methods, surface
preparation, and repair and restoration of concrete structures. The materials covered are Portland cement
mortars and concretes, latex-modified Portland cement mortar, epoxy mortars, epoxy concrete, and methyl
methacrylate concrete. Methods, procedures, and materials for the repair and restoration of concrete
structures shall comply with the state building code and guidelines ACI 503.4 and ACI 546.1R.
3.8 Concrete Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing shall comply with the requirements of the state building code and ACI 318.
END OF SECTION 3
3-3
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 4 - Masonry
Section 4 - Masonry
4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section covers the design and construction of masonry structures. It shall apply to unit masonry
construction; reinforced and un-reinforced masonry structures; structures using cement, clay, and stone
products; and those including brick, block, and tile structures. The requirements of this subsection shall be
used in conjunction with those in other sections and subsections.
4.1.2 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Materials, design, and construction of masonry structures shall comply with the requirements of the state
building code. Recycled non-hazardous materials shall be used to the extent practical and allowed by state
building code. Local sources shall be used to the extent practical. The following sources shall also be used
as guides for the design of masonry structures: The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 53 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures
4.2 Mortar and Grout
4.2.1 GENERAL
Requirements for materials, mixing, strength, and specifications for mortar and grout used in masonry
structures shall comply with state building codes.
4.2.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be designed to comply with:
ASTM C 270 Mortar for Unit Masonry
Mortar shall be designed per requirements of state code to perform the following functions:
Join masonry units into an integral structure.
Create tight seals between masonry units to prevent the entry of air and moisture.
Bond with steel joint reinforcement, metal ties and anchor bolts, where used, so that they act integrally
with the masonry.
Give exposed masonry surfaces a desired architectural quality through color contrasts or shadow line
from various joint-tooling procedures.
Compensate for size variations in the units by providing a bed to accommodate the different unit sizes.
Portland cement mortar should be used for all structural brickwork.
4.2.3 GROUT
Grout shall be used in reinforced load-bearing masonry construction to bond the masonry units and the
reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist the imposed loads. It may also be used in un-reinforced
load-bearing masonry construction to give it added strength. Grout shall comply with:
State building code, as applicable
ASTM C 476 Grout for Masonry
4-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 4 - Masonry
4.3 Unit Masonry
Materials, design, and construction of masonry units shall be in accordance with the requirements in
subsection 4.1, General Requirements and the following:
Solid Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 62, Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or
Shale)
Hollow Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 652, Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale)
Concrete Brick - ASTM C 55, Concrete Brick
Hollow and solid concrete masonry units - ASTM C 90, Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
Prefaced concrete masonry units - ASTM C 744, Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
Units, using masonry units conforming to ASTM C 90
Ceramic glazed structural clay facing units - ASTM C 126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing
Tile, Facing Brine, and Solid Masonry Units
4.4 Masonry Accessories
Joint reinforcement, anchors, and ties shall be zinc-coated and shall comply with the following:
State building code and as applicable
ACI 530.1.
4.5 Masonry Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing of unit masonry, grout, mortar reinforcing, and accessories shall comply with the
following:
State building code and as applicable
ACI 530.1
4.5.1 SPECIAL INSPECTION
When the masonry compressive strength (f'm) used in design is more than 1500 psi, a qualified independent
masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative shall perform inspection of the
masonry work. Minimum qualifications for the masonry inspector shall be 5 years of reinforced masonry
inspection experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental body having a program
of examining and certifying inspectors for reinforced masonry construction. The masonry inspector shall be
present during preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry units, placement of
reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and foundation walls), inspection of grout space,
immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during grouting operations. The masonry inspector shall
assure Contractor compliance with the drawings and specifications. The masonry inspector shall keep a
complete record of all inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the Quality Control Supervisory
Representative reporting the quality of masonry construction.
END OF SECTION 4
4-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 5 - Metals
Section 5 - Metals
5.1 General Requirements
This section covers the design and construction of steel and aluminum structures. The requirements of this
section shall be used in conjunction with those of other sections. Reused and/or recycled materials shall be
used to the extent practical and permitted by code.
5.2 Structural Steel
Structural steel for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with the following:
State building code as applicable
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC) ASD Manual of Steel Construction.
AISC LRFD Manual of Steel Construction
5.3 Steel Joists
5.3.1 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Steel joists and joist girders shall comply with the following:
State building code as applicable
Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications: Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and
Joist Girders.
5.4.2 INTENDED USE
Steel joists shall not be used for wind bracing or other types of bracing. They shall be used only as
horizontal load-carrying members supporting floor and roof decks.
5.4.3 SUPPORT OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
Steel joists shall not be used to support air-conditioning, air-handling, or any type of vibrating equipment.
Steel joists serving as floor joists and roof purlins shall not have bracing members attached to them that
would transmit vibrations from vibrating equipment into the steel joists and/or structural diaphragms.
5.4 Steel Decks
Steel decks shall comply with the following:
State building code as applicable
Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Diaphragm Design Manual
SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks
5.5 Miscellaneous Metals
5.5.1 DEFINITION
Miscellaneous metals are all ferrous and nonferrous metals other than structural steel as defined in the AISC
Code of Standard Practice.
5-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 5 - Metals
5.5.2 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Miscellaneous metals shall comply with the requirements of local orders and with all applicable industry
standards for the specific type of metal and use, as listed elsewhere in this section.
5.6 Cold-Formed Steel
Cold-formed steel shall comply with the following:
State building code as applicable
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members.
AISI Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
5.7 Pre-engineered Metal Buildings
5.7.1 CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Pre-engineered metal buildings shall comply with:
State building code as applicable
The Metal Building Manufacturers Association's Metal Building Systems Manual.
5.7.2 LOADS
Design loads shall conform to requirements of state building code.
5.8 Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
Structural steel inspection shall be required and performed in conformance with requirements of:
State building code as applicable
AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
END OF SECTION 5
5-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1 General Requirements
This section covers the use of wood and plastic materials in construction. The use of recycled materials
should be maximized, as applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated products
published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG). The use of recovered materials should
conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as applicable. Other
environmental design considerations include:
Composite woods, plywood, particleboard containing no urea-formaldehyde
Wood products certified by the Forest Stewardship Council to be from managed sources
6.2 Partitions
Standardization of interior partitions is desirable. Partitions within administrative areas should be easily
removable. Sound isolation and laboratory partitions between modules shall be designed to be removable
in order to accommodate future reconfiguration of spaces. Partitions requiring fire-resistance ratings shall
be constructed of noncombustible/limited combustible (NC/LC) materials and either listed by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in its approval guide. Refer to the
description of off-gassing in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual for more information on indoor material
requirements. See also www.cpg/gov for shower and restroom dividers/partition containing recovered
materials.
6.2.1 SUBDIVIDING PARTITIONS
Office subdividing partitions shall comply with the applicable local building code and/or National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 101 requirements. These partitions must be provided at a ratio of 1 linear
foot per 10 square feet of space, as applicable. Partitioning over interior office doors is included in the
measurement. Partitions must extend from the finished floor to the finished ceiling and have a flame spread
rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 450 or less (American Society for Testing and Materials
[ASTM] E-84 Test), and a minimum sound transmission loss (STL) rating of 40.
6.2.2 PERMANENT PARTITIONS
Permanent partitions must be provided, as necessary, to surround stairs, corridors, elevator shafts, toilets,
janitor closets, meeting and conference rooms, and mechanical rooms. They shall have a flame spread and
smoke developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A. 10.2.2 and/or a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a
smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84 Test), whichever is more stringent. Stairs, elevators,
and other floor openings shall be enclosed by partition(s) and have the fire resistance required by applicable
codes. These partitions shall extend from the floor to the underside of the structure above, shall effectively
isolate sound and vibration, and shall meet all fire separation requirements.
6.2.3 WOOD STUD PARTITIONS
Wood studs shall not be installed as part of new construction or as part of a major alteration or space
adjustment in other types of construction.
6.2.4 LESS-THAN-CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
Bank type partitions, acoustical screens, freestanding space dividers, and other partitions that do not reach
the ceiling shall conform to the requirements for movable partitions set forth by the General Services
Administration (GSA) in PBS-P1 00. In addition, the placement of partitions relative to sprinklers shall
comply with NFPA 13, and adequate passageway width and identification of means of egress shall comply
with NFPA 101. Another factor limiting the height and location of partitions is that tall or massive partition
6-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
systems may interfere with the even distribution of conditioned air and natural light. Consideration should
be given to the location of supply diffusers and return registers; the location of thermostats; and the
clearance above, below, and around the partitions to allow adequate air circulation.
6.3 Use of Wood and Plastic
Selection of wood, adhesives, and plastic materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and
smoke developed criteria perNFPA 101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-
emitting or low ozone-depleting material. Treated lumber should not be used for furnishings, especially for
play equipment in day-care centers. Laboratory shelving and casework may be fabricated using wood
(plywood) and plastic materials. See subsection 10.5 of this Manual for requirements.
END OF SECTION 6
6-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.1 General Requirements
In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria. Vapor and
infiltration barriers to vapor flow through the walls and roofs shall be placed with the aim of preventing
moisture accumulation and condensation within the building structure, reduction of thermal performance,
and increased latent cooling load in the space. The use of recovered materials should be maximized, as
applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated recycled content thermal
insulation products published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG). The use of
recycled materials should conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as
applicable. Additionally, selection of materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and smoke
developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-emitting or
low ozone-depleting type material.
7.2 Design Characteristics
Design characteristics of exterior wall sections should be evaluated for functional and cost effectiveness in
relation to the following:
Moisture transport
Thermal performance
Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration
Air flow and infiltration.
7.3 Thermal Resistance
For information on the thermal characteristics of single materials or wall assemblies, refer to the American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals
or the manufacturer's certified technical information. Thermal resistance (R) values shall be identified for
each element in the building shell. "U" factor calculations are prepared by following the recommended
procedures as documented in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
7.4 Moisture Transport
Dew point calculations are prepared by following the recommended design procedures in the ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals. The exterior envelope will be designed to prevent condensation within wall
cavities, building spaces, etc.
7.5 Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
Openings between panel, curtain, and spandrel walls and the building structure or floor slabs around them,
shall be fire stopped in accordance with the provisions outlined in Section 13, Special Construction, of this
Manual. The requirements in this subsection in no way reduce the requirements for protection of walls
subject to an exterior fire exposure. See Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for information on exposure
protection.
7-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.5.1 PANEL AND CURTAIN WALLS
All panel and curtain walls shall conform to the requirements for nonbearing walls for the type of
construction and model code involved and shall be securely anchored to the building in a manner that will
prevent failure of the anchors in a fire or failure of the panel and its components in high wind.
7.5.2 SPANDREL WALLS
Except as noted below, spandrel walls shall be provided at each floor and shall have a height of at least 3
feet above the finished floor and a fire resistance equivalent to the floor involved.
7.5.2.1 EXCEPTION NO. 1
Exterior spandrel walls are not necessary and, if provided, are not required to have any fire resistance if
the rooms located directly inside the exterior wall of the building and on the floor below contain low-
hazard occupancies or occupancies that are sprinkler protected.
7.5.2.2 EXCEPTION NO. 2.
Spandrel walls are not required at grade level.
END OF SECTION 7
7-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
8.1 Doors
8.1.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise noted, all doors shall be 36 inches wide. Doors in designed egress ways shall swing in the
direction of egress. Doors shall not swing into exit ways in a manner that reduces the effective exit width.
Doors and windows shall conform to requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 80, as
applicable.
8.1.1.1 HARDWARE
All doors shall be equipped with heavy-duty hardware. Each leaf (up to 80 inches high) shall be
provided with minimum 11A pair butts (hinges) or 2 pair butts (hinges) on doors higher than 80 inches.
All doors shall be provided with appropriate stops or wall bumpers. Exterior, egress, and laboratory
doors shall be provided with appropriate closers. All public-use doors must be equipped with push
plates, pull bars or handles, and automatic door closers. Corridor and outside doors must be equipped
with cylinder locks and door checks. All locks must be master-keyed. The Government must be
furnished with at least two master keys and two keys for each lock. Hardware for doors in the means of
egress shall conform to NFPA standard 101 and American with Disabilities Act (ADA)
8.1.1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
Doors, windows, and hardware exposed to highly corrosive conditions, as in marine or very humid
environments, shall be nonferrous or provided with a protective, corrosion-resistant finish. Selection
and location of door systems must include consideration of their designed protection against infiltration
and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings.
8.1.2 EXTERIOR DOORS
Exterior doors shall be weathertight and equipped with door closer, shall open outward, and shall have a
drip rain diverter above the door as required. Doors shall comply with requirements of the Uniform Federal
Accessibility Standards (UFAS), Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and NFPA 101, as applicable.
Exterior doors shall be alarmed for anti-intrusion.
8.1.3 INTERIOR DOORS
Interior doors must have a minimum opening of 36 inches (width) by 80 inches (height) and shall comply
with ADA and/or UFAS, as applicable. Hollow-core wood doors are not acceptable. Hardware shall be
ADA compliant. Doors shall be operable by a single effort and shall be provided with vision panels in
accordance with all applicable code requirements. All requirements of ADA shall be incorporated.
8.1.3.1 LANDING AREAS
The landing areas for doors that open onto walkways, ramps, corridors, and other pedestrian paths shall
be clear and level with a slope of no greater than 1:50; they shall extend at least 5 feet from the swing
side of the door, 4 feet from the opposite side, and at least VA feet past the latch side (pull side) of the
door and 1 foot past the latch side (push side).
8.1.4 FIRE DOORS
Fire doors shall conform to NFPA 80. Doors, hardware, and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or another approved laboratory testing organization, in accordance with
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-152.
3-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
Glazing material shall not be allowed in fire doors with a 3-hour fire protection rating or in fire doors with a
1.5-hour fire protection rating that are used in locations with severe fire exposure potential (such as in a
flammable-liquids storage room). The maximum area of glazing in a 1-or 1.5-hour door shall be 100
square inches (0.065 square meters) unless the area has been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA
80. The area of glazing in fire doors that have less than 1-hour fire-resistance ratings shall be limited to the
maximum area tested. All glazing shall be wired glass or other glass approved for use in fire doors.
8.1.4.1 EXIT DOORS
Fire doors in exits or means of egress shall also conform to the requirements contained in Chapter 2 of
the Safety Manual. Fire doors in air-handling systems shall also conform to the requirements outlined
in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual.
8.1.5 LABORATORY DOORS
Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the
inactive leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors
shall swing in the direction of egress from the laboratory and should be inserted in alcoves regardless of the
corridor width. Open doors should not protrude more than 6 inches into exit corridors. In general, large
vision panels should be provided to allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces. Hardware
shall be ADA-compliant and shall provide various levels of access control as required; it will include both
combination and key access locks. Areas where a high level of security will be required shall be provided
with card-key access control.
8.2 Windows
8.2.1 GENERAL
The use of natural but controlled daylighting should be maximized as part of a total energy conservation
program. EPA values natural light and perceives it as part of an exemplary working environment as well as
a potential source of energy savings. The building organization and design concept shall bring adequate
natural light into personnel spaces. Window size, head-height, placement, umber, and location shall be
determined on the basis of need for natural light and ventilation and of energy considerations. All exterior
windows in heated or air-conditioned spaces shall use double-glazed, insulated, low E glass and thermal
break sashes. All windows in laboratory rooms that may contain explosive materials shall be glazed with
safety glass. Selection and location of windows must include consideration of their designed protection
against infiltration and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings.
8.2.2 FIXED WINDOW SYSTEMS
Laboratory space shall have windows that are non-operable (except with a key, where windows must be
opened for cleaning purposes) in order to maintain temperature and humidity control and room
pressurization relationships.
8.2.3 SAFETY OF STOREFRONT AND CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS
Windows extending to within 18 inches of the floor and located at least 4 feet above grade shall be provided
with a safety bar on the interior window approximately 3 feet above floor level. Off-street, ground-level
windows and those accessible from fire escapes and adjacent roofs must have anti-intrusion alarm systems
to deter forcible entry.
8.2.4 WINDOW HEIGHT
Wherever windows extend to within 36 inches of the finished floor and are at least 4 feet above grade, a
suitable metal barrier shall be provided on the interior side, approximately 56 inches above floor level.
(Perimeter heating and cooling units may form this barrier.) If the glass construction can withstand a
horizontal force of 200 pounds or more and meets the requirements of 29 CFR ง1910.23, 16 CFR Part
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
1201, and the local building code, no barriers are required. For windows in walls that must have a fire-
resistance rating, see NFPA 80 A and Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual.
8.2.5 GLAZED PANELS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND WALLS
Interior glazed panels must comply with the Consumer Products Safety Commission Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Part 1201). When glazing panels and windows are used in fire
barrier walls, such use shall also meet the criteria set forth in the Safety Manual.
8.3 Permanent Window Coverings
8.3.1 GENERAL
The design professional shall be responsible for providing permanent window coverings for interior and
exterior windows where required. Nonpermanent window coverings installed on the inside of windows are
considered "interior finishes" and are discussed in subsection 9.6 of this Manual.
8.3.2 SUN SHADING
The use of reflective glass shall be reviewed and considered for all exterior windows. The two basic types
of reflective glass available for consideration are solar-reflective and low-emissivity (Low-E). The major
differences are visible light transmission, wavelengths of energy that are reflected, and the direction in
which these wavelengths are usually reflected. Solar-reflective glass has a mirror-like coating that is highly
reflective of solar energy. Low-emissivity (Low-E) glass has a metal or metallic-oxide coating that is nearly
invisible to the eye. Low-E glass reduces energy costs by creating a heat barrier that helps keep heat
outside in the summer and inside in the winter. Low-E glass is suitable for all climates and is available for
use in double and triple insulating glass units. Insulating units with an outer panel of tinted or reflective
glass can provide added energy cost efficiencies. Use a target of 70% visible light transmission (VLT).
Manufacturer's data sheets should be referred to in order to evaluate shading coefficient and relative heat
gain. Use of reflective glass shall be considered even when not required by the data sheet, when solar glare
and heat gain should be controlled. Laboratory windows exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded with
permanent exterior shading devices that shade the window from direct sun.
8.3.3 SECURITY
Windows at ground level shall be covered with Mylar to provide security.
END OF SECTION 8
3-3
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes
Section 9 - Finishes
9.1 Interior Finishes
The required finishes for each room are specified in the room data sheets included in Appendix C or finish
schedules in PORs. The following requirements apply to interior finishing.
9.1.1 TRIM AND INCIDENTAL FINISHES
Interior wall and ceiling finish that covers no more than 10 percent of the aggregate wall and ceiling area
involved may be Class C material in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101,
Chapter 6.
9.1.2 FINAL FINISHING MATERIAL
Wallpaper, paint, veneer, and other thin finishing materials that are applied directly to the surface of walls
and ceilings and are not more than 1/28-inch thick shall not be considered as interior finishes per NFPA
101, Chapter 6. To the extent practicable, consolidated and/or reprocessed latex paint consistent with CPG
guidance should be used.
9.1.3 AIRSPACE
Whenever an airspace is located behind combustible material, the space shall be blocked so that no void
extends more than 10 feet in any direction. For example, wood paneling applied to wood furring strips will
meet the requirement if the distance between the furring strips is no more than 10 feet in both a horizontal
and a vertical direction.
9.1.4 COMBUSTIBLE SUBSTANCES
Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated
with fire-retardant chemicals throughout the material (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed to surface
treatment, may be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions: (1) the treated material shall
be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and (2) the treated material shall not be
installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the effectiveness of the fire-retardant
treatment (e.g., high humidity). Surface treatments may be used to reduce the risks associated with existing
conditions, in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101. No material that will result in higher flame spread
or smoke development ratings than those permitted in this Manual shall be used as an interior finish.
Finishing materials should conform to flame spread and smoke developed criteria requirements per NFPA
101, Table A.10.2.2, 2000 edition.
9.1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA
The selection of interior finishes shall consider indoor air quality (e.g., low VOC paints, adhesives, caulks,
non-chlorine based wall base, wall covering, and flooring) and maximum recycled content for carpet,
wallboard, wall base, concrete, steel, and ceiling tiles consistent with CPG requirements and
recommendations. Evaluation of materials also should consider the manufacturer's required preparation
and cleaning products and the potential for use of low-toxicity cleaning products.
9.2 Wall Treatments
9.2.1 WALL MATERIALS
Wall materials must be capable of withstanding washing with detergents and disinfectants. Materials
selected shall be compatible with their intended use and shall emphasize durability and low maintenance
while creating a comfortable work environment. Recycled content laminated paperboard and/or structural
fiberboard should be specified consistent with CPG guidance.
9-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
In general, walls shall be gypsum wallboard, with a painted finish, on metal studs. Walls in laboratory areas
will be required to support additional loads due to movable casework, mounting rails, upper cabinets or
adjustable shelves, and equipment anchorage. Therefore, structural wall studs, backing plates, and lateral
bracing sufficient to withstand heavy loads will be required. Where concrete masonry unit (CMU) block or
poured concrete walls are used to meet other design requirements or constraints, they shall be furred with
gypsum wallboard or covered with another appropriate finish.
9.2.3 WALL FINISHES
Wall finishes, and the process by which they are selected, must meet the requirements outlined in the
following subsections.
9.2.3.1 GENERAL
The required finishes must be designated for each room in the room data sheets. Actual material
selection, color, and texture, is left to the design professionals who shall make selections in
consultation with the users. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) are a good resource for environment
evaluation. Paint shall be carefully selected so as not to affect laboratory operations. The design
professional must also select finish materials for items and areas not specifically designated in the room
data sheets. These selections shall be submitted to the Government representative for final approval.
9.2.3.2 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE LIMITATIONS
Wall finishes on walls that are part of a means of egress must have an interior finish of Class A (flame
spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). (Interior finish ratings are derived from American Society for
Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 and NFPA 255.) For any existing construction that is not
protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval, wall finishes must
have an interior finish of Class A (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). All new construction
for EPA shall be protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval; in
construction that is so protected, wall finishes in all areas, except those that are a part of the means of
egress, may have an interior finish of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450), unless
otherwise restricted by an applicable code. The most restrictive requirement shall govern. In sprinkler-
protected exit accesses or passageways, the interior finish may be composed of materials with a Class B
interior finish rating (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450). (See NFPA 101 and PBS-P100 as
the sources of this requirement.)
9.2.3.3 WALL COVERINGS
Wall covering made of materials that are considered "environmentally friendly" shall be provided in
the administrative and other office areas when required (none shall be provided in the laboratory areas).
Such wall covering shall meet the following criteria:
Construction: All material shall be of uniform color throughout. Colors and patterns shall be
chosen and approved by EPA from standard manufacturer lines offered by the design professional.
Non-chlorine based materials are preferrable.
Maintenance properties: All wall covering shall be resistant to permanent stains and mildew and
shall be capable of being cleaned with mild, nonabrasive cleaners.
Fire hazard requirements: Each type of wall covering used will have a minimum interior finish of
Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450) when tested in accordance with ASTM E-
84.
Application: Application of all wall covering shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. In the product selection process, consider the VOC impact of the
manufacturer's recommended application.
9-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes
9.3 Finished Ceilings
9.3.1 GENERAL
Ceilings shall be set at a minimum height of 9 feet 8 inches in laboratory zones both in general spaces and
in laboratory spaces and at a minimum height of 8 feet in corridor and office spaces. Except in service
areas, ceilings must have acoustical treatment acceptable to the contracting officer, a flame spread rating of
25 or less, and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84). Protrusion of fixtures into traffic
ways is not allowed. Refer to the Safety Manual for fire-resistance requirements for ceilings.
9.3.2 CEILINGS NOT ALONG EXIT PATH
Ceilings and interior finishes in areas that are not part of the normal exit route may have an interior finish of
Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive.
9.3.3 CEILINGS ALONG EXIT PATH
In sprinkler-protected exit ways or enclosed corridors leading to exits, ceilings and interior finishes may be
composed of materials with an interior finish rating of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-
450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive. The most restrictive applicable code shall be used.
9.3.4 CEILING FINISHES
Where ceiling finishes are required, they will, in general, be suspended acoustical tile. Other ceiling
finishes will be required in special rooms, as specified on the room data sheets. These finishes will include
hard ceilings with sealed openings for clean analytical laboratories. Special consideration shall be given to
the type of grid system and acoustical tile when the ceiling is in a moist area or in food service and other
specialty areas. Ceilings in extraction, preparation, glassware washing, microbiology, and similar wet
laboratories shall be of water-resistant tile materials or painted gypsum wallboard.
9.3.5 OPEN CEILINGS
All areas above open ceilings shall be sealed and painted. The necessary coordination shall occur for all
requirements regarding painting of exposed areas, including engineered systems that require color-coded
painting or stenciling and general code-required stenciling of nomenclature defining the rating of fire walls.
9.4 Floor Treatments
9.4.1 GENERAL
Floor finishes shall be compatible with the intended use of the room and shall emphasize durability and low
maintenance. Floors and floor coverings may be of any material normal to the intended use. Materials may
be either combustible or noncombustible, including wood, asphalt tile, carpet, rugs, linoleum, concrete, and
terrazzo. When floor tiles or carpet are used, preference should be given to such items designated in the
CPG. Interior floor finishes shall meet the interior finish requirements noted above. (See subsection 9.1.1
for more information on interior finish requirements.) Materials must be smooth, nonabsorbent, skid-proof,
and wear resistant. Laboratory flooring should resist the adverse effects of acids, solvents, and detergents.
When a seamless floor material is required, the base shall also be seamless and integrally coved. Materials
must be monolithic or have a minimum number of joints. The base may be a 4-inch rubber base or an
integral-coved base where sheet flooring is used.
9.4.1.1 FIRE SAFETY
Interior floor finishes shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and shall be tested in
accordance with NFPA 253. Flooring materials used as wall sections or wall coverings shall comply
with the fire safety characteristics described in Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for flame spread and
smoke development. The flame spread and smoke development characteristics shall be determined
9-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
through testing in the orientation in which the material is to be installed (NFPA 253 results shall not be
used to evaluate flooring tested in the vertical position).
9.4.2 CARPET
Carpet tiles shall cover all typical office floors and must meet the static buildup and flammability
requirements that follow.
9.4.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications must be met for all new carpet installation:
Pile yarn content: Continuous, solution-dyed filament soil-hiding nylon or wool/nylon
combinations.
Carpet pile construction: Level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile.
Pile weight: Minimum of 28 ounces per square yard.
Secondary back: Recycled content, synthetic fiber, or jute for glue-down installation. Backings
with latex and 4PC should be avoided.
Total weight: Minimum of 64 ounces per square yard.
Flammability: In all areas except exits, carpet must have a critical radiant flux (CRF) of 0.25 or
greater, with a specific optical density not higher than 450. Carpet in exits must have a CRF of at
least 0.50. Carpet passing the Consumer Products Safety Commission FFL-70 (Pill Test) is
acceptable for office areas; it may also be used in corridors that are protected by automatic
sprinklers. Check applicable codes for any more restrictive requirements. The most restrictive
requirement shall apply.
Static buildup: 3.5 kilovolts (kV) maximum with built-in static dissipation is recommended; static-
controlled is acceptable. More restrictive levels shall be required in sensitive areas such as
computer rooms; these levels shall be determined by calculations for any special equipment in use.
Interior finish requirements: As required by NFPA 101, Section 6-5.
End of life/disposal: Required to be recyclable by manufacturer.
9.4.2.2 COLOR
For new carpet, the Government shall be provided with at least three color samples. The sample and
color must be approved by EPA prior to installation. No substitutes may be made after sample
selection. Use of solution dyed yarn shall be considered to minimize color fading and reduce water
pollution..
9.4.2.3 INSTALLATION
Carpet must be installed in accordance with the approved manufacturer's instructions.
In leased space, carpet shall be replaced at least once every 7 years during Government occupancy,
or whenever backing or underlayment is exposed and/or there are noticeable variations in surface
color or texture, whichever occurs first.
Consider alternative methods of installation where feasible, including gridded glue down in low-
traffic and low-moisture areas, and adhesive backing.
9-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 9 - Finishes
Carpet replacement shall include the moving and returning-in-place of all furniture. Floor
perimeters at partitions must have wood or carpet base. Any exceptions must be approved by the
contracting officer.
An additional 10 percent of the selected carpet tiles shall be provided by the contractor for the
owner's own stock and replacement. These carpet tiles are not to be used during the warranty
period.
The off-gassing requirements in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual shall be followed.
9.4.3 RESILIENT TILE
Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this document, all new resilient floor tile shall be 12 inch x 12 inch
x 1/8-inch thick, shall have 35 percent to 40 percent reflectance, and shall be high density, meeting the
requirements of Federal Specification SS-T-312, Type IV. Adhesives used to set tiles shall be low in
volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Colors and patterns will be selected from three or more samples by
the contracting officer or his or her duly appointed representative. If heavy duty, commercial grade floor
tiles are specified, preference should be given to floor tiles made with recovered materials as designated in
the CPG.
9.4.4 SEAMLESS VINYL FLOORING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES
Seamless vinyl flooring for laboratories shall be chemical-resistant as manufactured by Tarket or Mipolan
or an approved equal, and shall be coved 4 inches up the wall using the same material. Joints shall be
chemically welded smooth without any grooves. Adhesive used to set the flooring shall be environmentally
acceptable.
9.4.5 CERAMIC TILE FLOORING
Ceramic tile flooring shall be sealed in all grout areas. At least five color samples shall be incorporated into
the color boards for selection and approval by the contracting officer (or his or her duly appointed
representative).
9.4.6 SPECIAL FLOORING
Special floor-coating systems shall be troweled, jointless floor systems with slip-resistant top coatings
which shall be waterproof and resistant to alkalies and acids. The special flooring system selected should
be compatible with its intended use.
9.4.7 EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORING
Steel trowel finish shall be used on exposed concrete floors that will not receive other finish. Exposed
interior concrete floors shall be sealed with a penetrating-type solvent base or water-emulsion base
unpigmented sealer containing a suitable type resin and no wax.
9.5 Paint
9.5.1 GENERAL
Before occupancy, all surfaces designated for painting must be newly painted with paint finish and colors
acceptable to, and approved by, the contracting officer or that officer's duly appointed representative. The
contracting officer or duly appointed representative shall be provided with color samples and color
schemes, with their average surface reflectance value clearly identified, for selection. All paint must be low
VOC latex (i.e., <3 grams/liter) unless specified otherwise. For interior and exterior latex paints, preference
should be given to the use of reprocessed or consolidated latex paint, consistent with CPG guidance.
9-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 9 - Finishes
9.5.2 REFLECTANCE VALUES
Minimum average surface light reflectance values (LRV) that will be used as a base for the selection of
interior colors are as follows:
Ceiling: 80 percent.
Walls: 70 percent.
Floors: 30 percent.
Furniture and equipment: 50 percent.
Chalkboards: Not less than 15 percent nor more than 20 percent, as recommended in American
Standard Practice for School Lighting, AIA No. 32F28.
Deviations from the above reflectance requirements are allowed for aesthetic treatment of such areas as
conference rooms, lobbies, corridors, and executive offices. Surfaces shall also have a matte finish to
prevent excessive brightness ratios and to minimize specular reflections.
9.5.3 WALL AND CEILING COLORS
Ceiling color can be extended from 1 to 3 feet down the walls, or to the level of the fixtures, to obtain up to
20 percent increase in illumination.
9.5.4 ACCENT AREAS
Up to 20 percent of wall surfaces may have reflectance values lower than those listed, for accent purposes,
without being considered part of the average.
9.5.5 LEAD-BASED PAINT
Lead-based paint shall not be used in EPA facilities. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Safety, Health, and
Environmental Manual: Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual)
for restrictions on the use of lead-based paint.
9.6 Window Covering
Permanent devices installed on the outside of buildings to control sunlight and provide security are
discussed in subsection 8.3 of this Manual.
9.6.1 BLINDS
Window blinds may be either vertical or horizontal; nonmetallic slats or rollershades are required in
laboratories. Color selection will be made by the EPA representative. The hardware and blind mechanisms
in laboratories shall be made of acid-resistive materials.
9.6.2 BLACKOUT SHADES
Rooms requiring blackout capability shall be equipped with blackout shades. Shades should be a pre-
engineered unit with a fiberglass-coated fabric shadecloth. They must have a noncorroding, concealed-
variable adjustment mechanism, adjustable from 100 percent friction (static mode) with finite positions to
15 percent friction (dynamic mode) with only preselected positions.
9.6.3 DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
All draperies, curtains, and similar hanging materials shall be of a noncombustible or flame-resistant fabric
(chemically treated). Flame-resistant means that the fabric or films (e.g., thin plastic sheets or cellophane)
must meet the performance criteria described in NFPA 701. In addition, draperies, curtains, and other
window finishes shall be formaldehyde and chlorine free and shall meet the off-gassing criteria set forth in
Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.
END OF SECTION 9
9-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties
Section 10 -Specialties
10.1 Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and Tack Boards
Magnetic dry-marker boards (liquid chalk) shall be used except when the solvent markers used on these
boards would affect operations undertaken in laboratories; chalk-type chalkboards shall not be used.
Locations of magnetic dry-marker boards and tack boards shall be determined by the design professional in
close coordination with the contracting officer's representative (COR).
10.2 Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
10.2.1 GENERAL
All signage, identification, room numbering, and building directories shall comply with the requirements of
the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
10.2.2 DOOR IDENTIFICATION
Door identification shall be installed in approved locations adjacent to office entrances. The form of door
identification must be approved by the COR. Toilet, stairway, and corridor doors must be identified by the
international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to 66 inches above the floor; wherever possible, such
identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side of the door. Seldom-used doors to areas
posing danger to the blind must have knurled or acceptable plastic-abrasive-coated handles. Tactile
warning indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs.
10.2.3 ROOM NUMBERING
A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the facility.
Plans shall be submitted to the COR for review and approval before construction documentation begins.
10.2.4 BUILDING DIRECTORY
A wall-mounted, glass-enclosed directory with lock shall be provided at a conspicuous location in the lobby
or entrance of the building. The directory shall be approximately 2 feet by 3 feet in size. The building
directory shall be approved by the COR.
10.2.5 LABORATORY SIGNAGE
The laboratory signage should contain the room number, room name, occupants by name, hazardous
chemicals within the laboratory, emergency telephone number, and special procedures in case of
emergency.
10.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located within recessed cabinets, in accordance with
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. Portable fire
extinguishers shall be provided on the basis of the classes of anticipated fires and the size and degree of
hazard affecting the extinguishers' use. Portable fire extinguishers containing carbon tetrachloride orhalon
(chlorobromomethane) extinguishing agents shall not be used. As per requirements of PBS-P100, section
7.11, portable fire extinguishers and cabinets shall not be installed in common areas, general office or court
space when the building is protected throughout with quick response sprinklers. Additionally, in office
buildings protected throughout with quick response sprinklers, fire extinguishers shall only be installed in
areas such as mechanical and elevator equipment areas, computer rooms, UPS rooms, generator rooms, and
special hazard areas.
10-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 10 - Specialties
Fire extinguishers shall be approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and labeled to identify the
listing and labeling organization and the fire test and performance standard that the fire extinguisher meets
or exceeds. The minimum rating for a single Class A extinguisher shall be 2-A in low hazard or medium
hazard areas and 4-A in high hazard areas. The minimum rating for a single Class B extinguisher shall be
10-B in low hazard area, 20-B in medium hazard areas and 80-B in high hazard areas.
10.3.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. It is good practice to also locate a
fire extinguisher in the corridor outside the laboratory in addition to those located within the laboratory. In
the other areas of the building or in non-laboratory buildings, the minimum number of fire extinguishers
needed for protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA 10, Chapter 3, Distribution of
Extinguishers.
Class A and D extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the respective Class A and D
hazard areas does not exceed 75 feet.
Class B extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the Class B hazard areas does not
exceed 50 feet.
Extinguishers with Class C ratings shall be located on the basis of the anticipated Class A or B hazard.
One extinguisher may be installed to provide protection for several hazard areas provided that travel
distances are not exceeded.
10.4 Laboratory Casework
10.4.1 GENERAL
Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product
of one manufacturer and shall be installed under the recommendations of that manufacturer. The laboratory
casework shall meet the functional, aesthetic, flexibility, and maintenance needs of each user. Performance
set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance, and function. Products that fail
to meet these standards will not be considered.
10.4.1.1 MATERIALS
Unless noted otherwise, all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable, corrosion-
resistant material. For rooms that do not require casework of metal construction, the casework
materials shall be wood or approved plastic. Wood casework shall be from certified sustainable forests
or recycled material. Hardware used for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy coated. Plastic
laminate or other similar facing materials, over wood or composite material, are permitted only when
the laminate or surfacing material is certified by the manufacturer to be impervious to acids and other
common laboratory solvents.
10.4.1.2 QUALITY
The laboratory casework that is subject to the above requirements shall have components,
configuration, materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical
performance tests) comparable to cantilevered frame (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by
Hamilton Industries and Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipment manufactured by
others is acceptable if the products are of equal performance and have similar appearance and
construction, but only after approval by the contracting officer.
10-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties
10.4.1.3 MODULAR DESIGN
Design of laboratory casework (cabinets, counters, fume hoods) should be coordinated and compatible.
Basic laboratory casework systems shall be composed of modular dimensioned units of modern design
consisting of a self-supporting steel frame capable of containing service piping and drain lines and
permitting the attachment and/or support of various styles of countertops, sinks, cupsinks, and utility
hoses and connections, independently from base cabinet assemblies. Support systems shall provide the
flexibility and unlimited horizontal interchangeability of any or all cabinet sizes without removal of the
working top or interference of immediate vertical legs, supports, brackets, or framing between
cabinets. Fixed laboratory casework shall be similarly flexible. The design of fixed casework shall be
approved by the COR.
10.4.1.4 SUPPORT CAPABILITY
The system shall support work surfaces and steel undercounter cabinets independent of one another.
All components shall be self-supporting and essentially independent of the building structure. The
system shall support sinks, service fittings, plumbing fixtures, and service and waste lines by utilizing
pipe clamps. The assembly shall be designed and manufactured in such a manner that each linear foot
of span between supporting elements, is capable of supporting a live load of 200 pounds per linear foot
plus a dead load of 50 pounds per linear foot. In addition, it should be possible to place a concentrated
load of 250 pounds on the front edge of the assembly at any point (assuming legs spaced at 6 feet on
center) without causing the system to fail in its suspension or tip or deflect more than 3/ie of an inch.
10.4.2 CABINET ASSEMBLIES
Cabinet assemblies shall be suspended from the support system with fastener devices mounted in front of
the unit for attachment to the front rail and shall be designed so that removal of units can be easily
accomplished by use of common hand tools. Such fastener devices shall be of forged or cast steel and shall
be commercially cadmium plated. Filler panels shall be provided at exposed-to-view areas, between backs
of cabinets and walls, between backs of cabinets at the end of the peninsula or island benches, and at knee
openings, to allow for the maintenance of mechanical services.
10.4.3 BASE CABINETS
Casework shall be of a metal construction of slimline design and shall be built in accordance with the
highest standards and practices of the metal casework industry. Superior quality casework shall be
established by use of proper machinery, tools, dies, fixtures, and skilled workmanship so that the fit of
doors and drawers allows vertical and horizontal openings of minimum tolerance. All units shall be of
flush-front construction so that drawer and door faces are in the same plane as exterior case members. All
units shall include label holders on all drawers and doors. Each unit shall be a completely welded structure
and should not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs, or bottom. Six-inch drawers
are standard in the base drawer units. Unless otherwise noted in specific room data sheets, knee spaces
shall be 3 feet in length and 29 inches in height.
10.4.4 WALL CABINETS
Upper wall cabinets shall be designed so that cabinets hang rigidly vertical without sag or tilt. The design
professional shall be responsible for ensuring that proper reinforcement is installed at the walls to support
the load of the cabinets and contents. Construction of wall cabinets shall be of similar to that of base
cabinets; wall cabinets shall be modular in design and installation to permit immediate interchangeability of
all wall cabinets and/or shelf units.
10.4.5 SHELVING
The following subsections provide information on reagent and adjustable shelving.
10-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 10 - Specialties
10.4.5.1 REAGENT SHELVES
Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch-thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate,
with all exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (Vs-inch) thick polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or similar
performing material.
10.4.5.2 ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
Adjustable shelving shall be 16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing and shall be
interchangeable with wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches in
length, mounted at a height of 54 inches above finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard).
Brackets shall be 16-gauge metal with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.
10.4.6 VENTED STORAGE CABINETS
Vented acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot-wide metal cabinets. The inner surfaces of the cabinet
shall be factory coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills. One adjustable shelf shall be provided. Venting
shall be as for vented chemical storage cabinets.
10.4.7 COUNTERTOPS
Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use. The design professional shall be responsible
for evaluating the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable
for each specific application. The material used for the countertop shall also be used for back-splashes,
side-splashes, and services ledge covers. Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drainboards.
Casework along walls shall have a 4-inch-high backsplash.
10.4.7.1 PLASTIC LAMINATE
Chemically resistant plastic laminate countertops maybe used in many applications where the use of
extremely corrosive chemicals or large amounts of water is not expected.
10.4.7.2 EPOXY RESIN
Epoxy resin (water-based) countertops shall be utilized in laboratories or in areas where large
quantities of water or extremely corrosive chemicals are being utilized on a routine basis. All joints
shall be bonded with a highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having properties
similar to those of the base material.
10.4.7.3 STAINLESS STEEL
Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications where sterile conditions are required
(e.g., glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled environmental
temperatures (e.g., cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.
10.4.8 LABORATORY FUME HOODS
Fume hoods shall be provided in all laboratories and laboratory support spaces where hazardous chemicals
or other toxic materials are being utilized. The purpose of the laboratory fume hood is to prevent or
minimize the escape of contaminants from the hood into the laboratory. The fume hood work surface shall
be of recessed design so that spills can be effectively contained. The design professional shall be
responsible for determining, with the users of the facility, types and sizes of fume hoods appropriate to
their intended use. After the mechanical/laboratory fume hood exhaust systems have been installed, the
testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) has been completed, and the TAB Report has been approved by
SHEMD, each laboratory fume hood shall be certified by the hood manufacturer or his qualified
representative to be installed and functioning according to specifications. See Section 15, Mechanical
Requirements, of this Manual for more specific requirements.
10-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 10 - Specialties
10.4.8.1 FUME HOOD LOCATION
Fume hoods must be located away from doors, pedestrian traffic, and duct work. The location of the
hood shall be at the end of a room or bay, but not less than 1 foot from the corner, where the operator is
essentially the only one who enters the zone of influence. A 5-foot minimum aisle width shall be
maintained in front of fume hoods. It is good design practice not to have "dead-end" circulation
patterns that may trap an individual in case of a laboratory accident. Further, hoods shall be placed in
such a way that one hood cannot draw air from another hood.
10.4.9 ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
Environmental rooms shall be of modular, insulated panel construction, providing temperature and humidity
control with specified setpoint control. Temperature requirements for individual rooms shall be appropriate
to the rooms' intended use. Rooms shall be provided with emergency auxiliary power backup to allow 24-
hour operation. All rooms involving laboratory procedures shall be ventilated. Fume hoods shall not be
allowed in environmental rooms. The following should also be provided: remote air- or water-cooled dual-
sequencing compressor, temperature and humidity recorders, high/low alarm, adjustable epoxy-coated wire
shelving on wall supports or movable racks, and personnel emergency alarm.
END OF SECTION 10
10-5
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 11- Equipment
Section 11 - Equipment
11.1 Design
Planning for equipment shall be integrated with the planning of architectural, structural, mechanical, and
electrical systems. Equipment shall be arranged and organized to provide circulation, workflow, and
maintenance clearances.
11.2 Catalog Cut Sheets
Appropriate catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all items of equipment. Each cut sheet shall have a
logistical category and code. Each item shall be clearly identified if it has unique utility requirements,
structural support needs, or space requirements.
11.3 Layout and Clearances
Equipment should be arranged to provide service clearances and maintenance access so that service and
maintenance can be executed with minimum disruption to workspaces. When expansion is anticipated in a
project, the design professional should ensure that some additional equipment can be added without
disruption or reconfiguration of workflow.
11.4 Floor Preparation
Floor depressions shall be provided to accommodate items and design requirements, such as entrance walk-
off grilles, cart washers, environmentally controlled room equipment, walk-in refrigerators, computer
rooms, and any other appropriate spaces or items, except in laboratory spaces where future flexibility is a
requirement.
11.5 Structural Support
Wall-partitioning systems for wall-hung equipment, wall-hung workstation storage, and toilet accessories
shall be adequately reinforced. Ceiling support systems for service columns, hoist equipment, and other
ceiling-mounted items shall be structurally braced. All fixed equipment shall be mounted to resist seismic
forces in accordance with seismic levels defined for each applicable project.
11.6 Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
Control of ventilation for the employee working environment must be provided by the equipment supplier.
All indoor air quality requirements shall be in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.
11.7 Equipment Specifications
Equipment specifications shall be developed for all equipment that does not have current guide
specifications. All equipment specifications should permit procurement of the most current model of
equipment through General Services Administration (GSA) services where possible. All equipment
specifications should be developed to accommodate reputable vendors. Equipment specifications should
discuss the scope of services to be provided by mechanical and electrical contractors installing
Government-furnished equipment.
11-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 11- Equipment
11.8 High-Technology Equipment
Project-specific guidance should be obtained on high-technology equipment. Design shall be in accordance
with selection and guidance of the respective manufacturers.
11.9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
Refer to Sections 15 (Mechanical Requirements) and 16 (Electrical Requirements) of this Manual for
information on mechanical and electrical equipment, respectively.
11.10 Equipment Consultants
Use of an equipment consultant is recommended for defining and specifying what research equipment must
be procured. Such consultants shall also provide information on equipment during the design and
construction document phases to assist in planning and documentation.
END OF SECTION 11
11-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 12 - Furnishings
Section 12 - Furnishings
12.1 Furnishings
EPA requires that environmental evaluation be added to the criteria for furniture selection, considering
topics such as VOC emissions, manufacturing practices, materials origination, recycled content and
packing/shipping considerations. This enhanced consideration is a core value in EPA's Environmentally
Preferable Purchasing program.
All major furniture items should consider the use of an environmental assessment of the manufacturing
process and chamber-testing of the furniture emissions, following a strict protocol. The testing protocol,
chain-of-custody requirements, packing and shipping instructions, and the manufacturng assessment
instrument used for the EPA Headquarters project are available on EPA's web site, at
www.epa.gov/greeningepa.
Furnishings are discussed in Chapter 6 of the Space Planning and Acquisition Guidelines (volume 1 of the
EPA Facilities Manual). Additional information on "Green" specifications for furniture can be obtained
from the Sustainable Facilities Practices Branch (SFPB). Sample copies of Green Rider provisions are
available to assist in determining Green furnishings.
END OF SECTION 12
12-1
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction
Section 13 - Special Construction
13.1 Noise Control
Noise levels in the different rooms of the facility should be in accordance with the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) handbook, HVAC Systems and
Applications, Chapter 52 (Sound and Vibration Control). Proper schematic planning should isolate noise-
sensitive areas from noise sources by separation with a nonsensitive buffer area. In addition, dedicated
laboratory support spaces should be provided to isolate noise-producing equipment, such as centrifuges and
vacuum pumps, from laboratories. In any instrument or laboratory space in which one or more fume hoods
are used, the noise level should be 55 or less decibels of sound measured on an A-scale (dBA) but shall not
exceed 70 dBA at the working position in front of the hood.
The combined noise resulting from several pieces of equipment shall not exceed 65 dBA when measured 3
feet from any piece of equipment. Noise generated from vibration by heating, ventilation, and air-
conditioning (HVAC) systems may be minimized by several means: judicious equipment selection;
limitation of fluid flow velocities; isolation of key mechanical, piping, and ducting systems; and other
prudent engineering and architectural means.
13.1.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION
Vibration isolation systems should be provided on rotating mechanical equipment of greater than 1A
horsepower (hp) (for equipment located within a critical area), greater than 5 hp (for other areas in the
building), and greater than 10 hp (outside and within 200 feet of the building). Reciprocating equipment
(other than emergency equipment) shall not be used. Vibrating equipment shall not be placed on top of
buildings, unless no other locations are feasible. Vibrating equipment that must be mounted on the roof
shall be placed directly over columns and on pads and springs to totally isolate the vibration from the
building structure.
Concrete inertia bases will be used with rotating mechanical equipment handling liquids (e.g., pumps)
and with compressors. Steel frames will be used for air-handling equipment.
Flexible pipe connectors (e.g., twin-sphere connectors) will be used on piping connecting to isolated
equipment and where piping and ducting exit the mechanical room(s).
Flexible duct connectors will be used in a manner similar to flexible piping connectors.
13.1.2 PIPING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS
Passive piping and ducting systems are defined as those that are at a great distance from their energy source
and have low flow rates and/or infrequent use (examples of such systems are city water, gases, and waste
water). Conversely, active piping systems are defined as those that are close to energy sources and can
constitute a major vibration problem requiring isolation.
Active piping and ducting shall be sized for economical flow velocities.
Ducts that are less than 24 inches in diameter do not require isolation, provided that the flow velocities
do not exceed 1,200 feet per minute. Ducting that does not meet this requirement shall be isolated.
Active piping associated with HVAC (chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam, and refrigerant
piping) within mechanical rooms, or at least 50 feet (whichever distance is greater) from connected
vibration-isolated equipment (e.g., chillers, pumps, air handlers) or from the ground, shall be isolated
from the building structure; resilient penetration sleeves shall be used where this piping penetrates
13-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 13 - Special Construction
walls. Flexible piping connectors shall be used where the piping leaves the mechanical room. All
active piping in the critical area having a diameter of 4 inches or less shall be isolated.
13.1.3 SOUND DAMPENING
Sound dampening features (acoustical treatment), preferably of rigid materials, shall be provided in
instrument rooms so that the noise level does not exceed 55 dBa. If a hood is required in these rooms, the
noise level shall not exceed 70 dBa at the face of the hood.
13.2 Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
Fire walls must be structurally independent and have sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to
allow collapse of construction on either side of the firewall without collapse of the fire wall itself. The wall
is also required to allow collapse of the structure on one side without compromising the integrity of the
structure on the opposite side of the fire wall. Fire walls differ from fire barrier walls, which do not require
structural stability. Fire barrier walls may rely on the building structure for support. Refer to National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 221 for specific criteria related to fire walls and fire barrier walls.
13.2.1 FIREWALLS
Every fire wall shall be made of noncombustible material with the fire-resistance rating required by local
codes for segregating the building into separate buildings or fire areas. Openings in fire walls shall be
protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below. Unprotected windows are not allowed in fire walls.
13.2.2 FIRE BARRIER WALLS
Unless other fire-resistive construction is provided to create a complete enclosure on all sides, all fire
barrier walls must extend from floor slab to floor slab or to roof deck. Openings in fire barrier walls shall
be protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.
13.2.3 OPENINGS
Openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be protected with fire-rated components capable of
maintaining the fire-resistive integrity of the wall. The minimum fire-resistance requirement for protection
of openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be the more restrictive of Chapter 8 of NFPA 101 (2000
edition) and the state building code. Greater fire resistance may be required by code requirements for
specialized occupancies such as computer rooms and laboratories. Fire window assemblies are allowed in
fire barrier walls with a 1-hour or lower fire-resistance rating. The maximum allowed glazing area in
windows shall be the maximum area tested and shall be in accordance with NFPA 80. Refer to Chapter 2 of
the Safety Manual for restrictions on utilities penetrating required fireproofing.
13.3 Vertical Openings and Shafts
Fire-resistance ratings for enclosures of vertical openings and shafts shall conform to the requirements in
NFPA 101, Chapter 8. Openings into vertical openings and shafts shall be protected by fire doors or fire
dampers as outlined in subsection 13.3.2 and in Chapter 2, Fire Life Safety, of the Safety Manual.
13.3.1 ATRIUMS
Atriums and other openings, where permitted by NFPA 101, NFPA 92, and the local building code, shall be
protected in accordance with Chapter 8 of NFPA 101. hi addition, exits shall be separately enclosed from
the atrium. Access to exits is permitted to be within the atrium space.
13.3.2 SHAFTS
When telephone rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces are located one above the other, the enclosure
walls are considered to form a shaft, and protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 101 and the local building code. Shafts shall not be installed between a structural member and the
13-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction
fireproofing for that member. If allowed by the local building code, all floor penetrations within telephone
and electric closets can be sealed or otherwise grouted, in lieu of creating a shaft, to maintain the fire
resistance of the floor assembly.
Structural members passing through a shaft shall be fireproofed separately from the shaft enclosure so that
the entire structural member is protected as required by the model building codes. The fireproofing shall be
of concrete, plaster, or other hard material that is resistant to mechanical damage and not subject to rusting
or corrosion.
13.3.3 MONUMENTAL STAIRS
Large, open stairs shall be protected by one of three methods. If the stairs are not involved in the building
exit requirements, they may extend one floor above and one floor below the main entrance lobby, provided
that fire partitions and self-closing fire doors are installed at the upper and lower levels. Alternatively, they
may be protected as a vertical opening in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 8 of NFPA 101
(2000 edition). If the stairs are part of the exit system, they must be protected as outlined in Chapter 7 of
NFPA 101 (2000 edition).
13.3.4 ESCALATORS
Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with the additional option of using
curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in NFPA 13.
13.3.5 PENETRATIONS
Openings around penetrations in vertical openings and shafts shall be fire-stopped as described in
subsection 13.3.2 above.
13.4 Fire Protection
13.4.1 GENERAL
The decision to install sprinkler protection in the facility shall be based on NFPA 101, NFPA 45, the Safety
Manual, state and local codes, and the project criteria, whichever is most stringent. All sprinkler systems
shall comply with NFPA 13 and be approved by Factory Mutual or another nationally recognized insurance
company. Special protection systems may be used to extinguish or control fire in easily ignited, fast-
burning substances such as flammable liquids, some gases, and some chemicals. Such protection systems
shall also be used to protect ordinary combustibles in certain high-value occupancies that are especially
susceptible to damage. Special protection systems supplement automatic sprinklers as described by NFPA
and shall not be used as a substitute for them except where water is not available for sprinkler protection.
Halon systems shall not be used unless directed by the project criteria.
13.4.2 WATER SUPPLIES
Except as noted below, every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is available
for use by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be provided by fire
hydrants suitable for firefighting apparatus and located within 5 feet of paved roadways. The hydrants shall
be supplied from a dependable public or private water main system. Alternative water supplies shall be
developed in accordance with NFPA 1142. Other water supplies shall be available to buildings where fire
protection requires them. Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water standards.
The water supply system shall provide ample water for each of the three types of fire protection water use:
outside fire department hose streams from hydrants, small and large hose streams from inside-building
standpipe or hose connections, and automatic sprinkler systems. The minimum requirements for each type
of water use shall not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.
13-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 13 - Special Construction
13.4.2.1 FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE STREAMS
The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method outlined
in Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office. The needed
fire flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire area of the building. The fire
flow for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow for the building.
13.4.2.2 STANDPIPE HOSE STREAM
When standpipe systems are provided or required, the minimum water supply shall be in accordance
with NFPA 14 and the local building code and shall be based on the number of standpipe risers
provided in the building or in each fire area.
13.4.2.3 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic sprinkler system shall be determined by
hydraulic calculations as required for sprinkler system designs. The water supply requirements shall
include all sprinkler flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.
13.4.3 SIZE AND ZONING
The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the fire flow and pressure requirements set by the local
authority. Fire pump(s) shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room along with
the sprinkler system main valves. Sprinkler system protection zones shall have the same boundaries as the
fire alarm system fire zones. Each sprinkler system protection zone shall be equipped with electrically
supervised control valves and water flow alarm switches connected to the fire alarm system.
13.4.4 SYSTEMS
Fire protection systems must meet the following requirements.
13.4.4.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION
Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA facilities. All sprinkler systems shall
be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. All design documents, including the
hydraulic calculations, must be maintained at the building to facilitate future modifications of the
sprinkler system An analysis shall be performed to justify new facilities with no sprinkler protection.
The provision of sprinkler protection (when not required by another code or standard) shall not be used
as a basis for reducing other levels of protection provided for that facility. However, where a code or
standard allows alternatives based on the provision of sprinklers, as in NFPA 101, the alternatives
allowed for sprinklered space may be applied.
Existing facilities shall be provided with sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:
In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids, or explosive
materials.
Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy is 75 feet high or higher. The height
shall be measured from the lowest point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest
occupiable story.
Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the local building
code.
In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in local code.
In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the General Services
Administration (GSA).
13-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction
Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors of buildings, and windowless areas that
exceed the allowable limits of the local building code.
In cooling towers of combustible construction under the conditions described in subsection 15.5.5.
In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire-resistance
capabilities of exposed live-load-bearing structural elements (e.g., when a flammable-liquids
operation is moved into a former office area).
Throughout open-plan office space that has a fuel load in excess of 6 pounds per square foot.
Throughout electronic equipment operation areas, including data storage areas. On/off type
sprinkler heads and sprinkler guards may be used to minimize water damage in these areas.
13.4.4.2 WET PIPE
Sprinkler systems shall normally be wet pipe. Hydraulic designs shall be performed for all systems.
13.4.4.3 DRY PIPE
In unheated areas or other areas subject to freezing temperatures, dry-pipe systems shall be provided.
Because of the time delays associated with the release of the air in the system, water demands for dry-
pipe systems shall be computed on the basis of areas 30 percent greater than those used to computer
demands for comparable wet-pipe systems. Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective
to install an antifreeze system or a small dry-pipe system supplied from the wet-pipe system in the main
heated area.
13.4.4.4 PREACTION
A preaction system shall be used where it is particularly important to prevent the accidental discharge
of water. Each laboratory room must be provided with a preaction system with an individual isolation
valve. The need for a preaction system shall be determined on the basis of review by, and
recommendation of, a AEAMB professional fire protection engineer. The detection system chosen to
activate the preaction valve shall have a high reliability and shall be equipment with a separate
alarm/supervisory signal to indicate status. The detection system must be designed to be more sensitive
than the closed sprinklers in the preaction system but should not be so sensitive as to cause false alarms
and unnecessary actuation of the preaction valve.
13.4.4.5 DELUGE
For extra hazard areas and specific hard-to-extinguish fuels such as explosives and pyrophoric metals, a
deluge system with open sprinkler heads may be used to wet down the entire protected area
simultaneously. Deluge systems shall comply with NFPA 13. If quick response is required, deluge
system piping may be primed with water. The nozzles must be provided with blow-off caps for water-
filled deluge systems.
13.4.4.6 SELF-RESTORING
Self-restoring sprinkler systems, such as the on/off multicycle system or systems using individual on/off
sprinkler heads, shall be considered where the water from sprinklers will become contaminated by
contact with room contents, where there is a concern about water damage, or where water supply or
storage volume is marginal.
13.4.4.7 QUICK RESPONSE
Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited. Other
specialized automatic sprinklers, such as large drop, early-suppression fast-response, or extended-
coverage heads, are acceptable for use in sprinkler systems. The use of specialized sprinklers is
13-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 13 - Special Construction
appropriate when a higher level of protection is desired or an equivalent level of protection is necessary
to compensate for failure to meet other code requirements. Use of specialized sprinkler heads should
be limited to applications for which they have been specifically listed (e.g., UL, FM).
13.4.4.8 WATER SPRAY
Installation of water spray systems shall comply with NFPA 15.
13.4.4.9 CARBON DIOXIDE
Agent quantity requirements and installation procedures shall comply with NFPA 12.
13.4.4.10 DRY CHEMICAL
Systems shall comply with NFPA 17.
Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 17 and NFPA 96.
Discharge of dry chemical shall actuate a pressure switch connected to an alarm in the building fire
alarm system. Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm
requirements.
Acceptance tests. After installation, all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
ensure correct operation and function. When all necessary corrections have been made, a full
discharge test shall be conducted. Plastic or cotton bags shall be attached to each individual
nozzle, and the system activated. Cooking appliance nozzles must discharge at least 2 pounds of
the agent, and duct or plenum nozzles must discharge at least 5 pounds of the agent.
Preengineered systems that fail to discharge these amounts will be considered unsatisfactory.
13.4.4.11 FOAM
Foam systems shall comply with NFPA 11, NFPA 11 A, NFPA 16, NFPA 16A, and NFPA 409.
13.4.4.12 STANDPIPES AND HOSE SYSTEMS
NFPA 45 requires the installation of standpipe and hose systems in all laboratory buildings that are two
or more stories above or below the grade level. Installation of standpipe systems shall comply with
NFPA 14. If local building fire code requirements dictate the installation of hose systems, hose
systems shall comply with NFPA 14 and shall be pressure tested annually in accordance with the
methods presented in NFPA 1962.
13.4.4.13 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 except that halon extinguishers shall not be
placed in any EPA facility. See Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual for more information on
portable fire extinguishers.
13.4.4.14 HALON-1301 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Fire protection systems that contain halon-1301 (CF3Br, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be
installed in new EPA facilities. Existing systems that use halon-1301 should be removed from service
in accordance with Title VI of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. The hardware may be left in
place in anticipation of an environmentally acceptable replacement. This policy applies to both fixed
and portable systems. The halon recovered from systems should be made available through the Halon
Recycling Corporation (1-800-258-1283). Refer to the Environmental Management Guidelines for
information on removal of halon systems from EPA-owned or -leased facilities. Refer also to the list of
acceptable halon substitutes approved under the significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) (published
by EPA's Office of Air and Radiation Stratospheric Protection Division).
13-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 13 - Special Construction
13.4.4.15 GASEOUS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their
use as a total flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied. Any carbon dioxide
automatic extinguishing system that is to be used in usually occupied spaces must be reviewed and
approved by AEAMB and SHEMD and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12 and 29 CFR
ง1910.1 62(b)(5). A number of clean-agent, gaseous fire-extinguishing systems are becoming available
as an alternative to halon and carbon dioxide systems, among these FM-200 and Inergen. Because of
the unique nature and limited approvals for these new systems, any design and installation shall be
certified by a licensed professional engineer in the state and approved by the authority having
jurisdiction. The certification must include a detailed analysis of the hazards to be protected against;
any limitations on, or exclusions of, hazardous chemicals that may be protected against by the design;
and documentation to support the design concentration of the agent. The installation of such a system
shall meet the requirements described below.
Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 2001 and other
applicable standards for the hazard to be protected against. Discharge of a system shall actuate a
pressure switch or other device connected to initiate an alarm in the building fire alarm system.
Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm requirements.
Acceptance tests. After installation, all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
ensure correct operation and function. All approval or acceptance testing shall be performed in
accordance with Section 4-7 of NFPA 2001.
13.4.4.16 WET CHEMICAL SYSTEMS
Wet chemical systems are generally pre-engineered and are primarily used to protect exhaust hoods,
plenums, ducts and associated cooking equipment such as deep fat fryers and grills. Refer to NFPA
17A for technical requirements, applications, and specifications.
13.4.5 OPERATION
Operation and maintenance instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment. All
personnel who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain, or operate fire protection apparatus shall be
thoroughly trained and kept trained in the functions they are expected to perform.
13.4.6 CODES
In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall be
approved by the local authority having jurisdiction over the project.
END OF SECTION 13
13-7
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 14 - Conveying Systems
Section 14 - Conveying Systems
14.1 General
Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall be in accordance with American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A17.1. Other requirements are described below.
14.2 Elevators
14.2.1 ELEVATOR RECALL
All automatic elevators having a travel distance of 25 feet or more shall be recalled when any fire
alarm-initiating device, such as elevator lobby smoke detectors, manual fire alarm stations, or sprinkler
system waterflow switches, is activated. All elevators must be recalled when the recall system is activated.
Smoke detectors other than those required by ANSI A17.1 shall not initiate automatic elevator recall.
14.2.2 SMOKE DETECTORS
Smoke detectors shall be provided for every elevator lobby, including the main lobby. Smoke detectors that
activate the automatic elevator recall are also required in the elevator machine rooms. Elevator lobby
smoke detectors should not initiate the building fire alarm system but shall send an alarm to the fire
department or central station service and shall activate the elevator recall system.
14.2.3 CAPTURE FLOOR
An alternate capture floor shall be provided in accordance with Rule 211.3b(2) of ANSI A 17.1. Activation
of an alarm-initiating device on the main capture floor shall return the elevators to the alternate capture
floor.
14.2.4 SIGNAGE
Signs must be placed in the elevator lobbies next to all elevators to inform occupants not to use the
elevators if there is a fire.
14.2.5 CHEMICAL TRANSPORT USE
If elevators are used to transport chemicals, provisions shall be made to ensure that nonlaboratory personnel
and space (administrative or business occupancies) are not exposed to or contaminated by chemical
substances. For example, chemicals must be packaged in accordance with U.S. Department of
Transportation (DOT) specifications, or an alternative route of transport must be provided. This alternative
route may include an elevator opening into a vestibule separate from administrative or business
occupancies, a multiple-door elevator entering into a laboratory, separate dumbwaiters, or alternate
corridors or routes. A combination of these options can be used to achieve this goal.
14.3 Escalators
Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with an additional option of providing
curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13.
END OF SECTION 14
14-1
-------
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.1 General
The design professional shall be responsible for ensuring that all mechanical systems conform to the
requirements of this section and that all systems are installed and operating in accordance with all governing
codes, ordinances, and regulations; the most current edition of applicable publications; and as set forth
below. The design professional is responsible for the design of all mains, lines, meters, and other
mechanical components required for utility services. The building mechanical systems shall provide a safe
and suitable environment both for occupants and for functional operation of the facility, and shall meet
EPA's energy conservation and atmospheric emissions goals.
15.2 References
All work discussed in this section shall comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes,
regulations, ordinances, publications, and manuals. When codes or publications conflict, the most stringent
standard shall govern. Unless otherwise specified in this Manual or approved by the Architecture,
Engineering and Asset Management Branch (AEAMB) and the Safety, Health and Environmental
Management Division (SHEMD), all mechanical system installations shall conform to the standards listed
below:
Installation of Oil Burning Equipment (NFPA 31)
Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines (NFPA 37)
Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals (NFPA 45)
National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54)
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58)
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (NFPA 5 9 A)
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment (NFPA 75)
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials (NFPA 91)
Smoke Control Systems (NFPA 92A)
Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations (NFPA 96)
Water Cooling Towers (NFPA 214)
Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI/ASHRAE 62)
Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment (ANSI Z358.1)
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems (ANSI/American
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Z9.2)
Laboratory Ventilation (ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5)
Protecting Building Environment from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks
(OHHS/NIOSH Publication 2002-139)
Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standards
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI/ASHRAE 15)
Method for Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods (ANSI/ASHRAE 110)
Building Air Quality: EPA Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, EPA/400/1-91/033 or
December 1991
Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice, American Conference of Government
Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research
Council, 1995
15-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 49 for Biohazard Safety Cabinets.
NSF standard 61 Drinking Water System Components.
15.3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Design Criteria
A heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (HVAC) system that will satisfy the requirements indicated in
this document shall be provided.
15.3.1 GENERAL
Building HVAC systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major HVAC equipment components shall
be selected, on the basis of a consideration of health and safety requirements, occupant comfort, attributed
atmospheric emissions, initial costs, operating costs, and maintenance costs. A life cycle cost analysis
(LCCA) shall be performed using the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Handbook
135 "Life-Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program" to select the most cost-
effective HVAC system.
15.3.2 VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
Indoor space shall meet the EPA National Ambient Air Quality Standards and the ventilation rates
established in ASHRAE 62-2001. Design air quantities and transport velocities shall be calculated
according to the methods prescribed in the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, the
ASHRAE Applications Handbook, and the ACGIH Industrial Ventilation manual.
15.3.2.1 LABORATORY VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
Laboratories must comply with unique ventilation requirements in accordance with the latest version of
ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 and NFPA 45. The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building
(including corridors) where the laboratory and laboratory support rooms are located shall be designed
with 100 percent outside air ventilation systems with exhaust through hoods where hoods are used.
These sections of the laboratory building, as well as the hazardous chemical storage building, shall
have an independent air handling unit(s). Under no circumstances will the air supplied to any
laboratory space be recirculated to any other space. HVAC systems should be continuously operational
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, summer and winter. The general exhaust and special instrument canopy
hoods in these sections and in the hazardous chemical storage building shall be constant volume at all
times; the only exceptions are to accommodate variable air volume (VAV) systems or two-flow (night
setback) systems.
Minimum airflow requirement to be maintained in a laboratory is 25 cfm per square foot of laboratory
fume hood (LFH) work surface with the sash closed or four air changes per hour for an unoccupied
laboratory during night time, weekend or holiday setback, or calculated to prevent concentration of
volatile vapors at or above 25 percent of their lower flammable/explosive limit (LEL) within the hood;
and not less than eight air changes per hour during occupied hours. Specifications for controls and
monitoring devices for exhaust and air-handling units should be consistent with these minimum airflow
requirements. The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well as the temperature
and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum air changes per hour.
Laboratory spaces shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level relative to other common spaces
that is appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory
corridor and non-laboratory spaces. Levels of pressurization shall be project specific.
15.3.2.2 ADDITIONAL SPECIAL VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
All processes, operations, or other situations that present the possibility of hazardous accumulation of
combustible or explosive vapors, dust, fumes, or other airborne substances shall be provided with
ventilation in accordance with NFPA 91 and NFPA 45 and shall be 100 percent exhausted to
15-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
atmosphere outside the building. To avoid re-entrainment, design for exhaust systems shall conform to
ASHRAE 52-76 and ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation. Project criteria shall indicate other areas of
nonrecirculation. Air from adjacent spaces can be used as the ventilation supply air for the 100 percent
exhausted spaces, as long as:
Ventilation by this method does not violate any requirements of ANSI Z9.5, NFPA 45, NFPA
90A, or NFPA 101 or special space pressurization requirements.
The air supplied is not potentially more hazardous than the air from the space being exhausted.
Adjacent spaces are not laboratory or specialty spaces requiring once-through ventilation.
In addition, the following spaces have special ventilation considerations:
Restrooms, janitor closets, garbage rooms, and other malodorous spaces shall be exhausted to
atmosphere outside the building at a rate of not less than 50 cfm per toilet or urinal, and as
specified in ASHRAE 62 or in local building codes, whichever is more stringent, regardless of any
other calculated ventilation requirements.
Commercial cooking equipment used in processes that produce smoke or grease shall be designed
and protected in accordance with NFPA 96. Any insulation shall be of noncombustible materials.
If other utilities are included in a vertical shaft with the grease duct, they shall not be insulated or
lined with combustible materials.
Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be exhausted so that room temperature does not
exceed National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) equipment ratings. The project
criteria shall establish the space temperature limits. Where mechanical ventilation cannot maintain
a satisfactory environment, evaporative cooling systems (indirect evaporative cooling for electrical
rooms) or other mechanical cooling systems shall be provided. Exhaust air openings should be
located adjacent to heat-producing equipment to minimize ambient thermal loads. Thermostatic
controls shall be used to operate the ventilation and exhaust systems.
Equipment rooms containing refrigeration equipment shall be ventilated in accordance with
ASHRAE standard 15. For all equipment rooms with fuel-burning appliances or equipment,
combustion air for these appliances and this equipment shall be drawn directly from the outside, in
accordance with the International Building Code, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
codes, and the ASHRAE Guide and Data Books.
15.3.3 EQUIPMENT DESIGN TEMPERATURES
15.3.3.1 INSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
Environmental design temperatures and relative humidity for special space uses other than those listed
here shall be designated in the project criteria. The design temperatures shall be 5 degrees Fahrenheit
(ฐF) lower for cooling, and 5 ฐF higher for heating, than the required operating temperature.
When space cooling is required, the inside design temperature for maintaining personnel comfort shall
be 70ฐF, dry bulb (db), unless otherwise indicated in project criteria. The relative humidity shall be 50
percent. Summer humidification shall not be provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall be
designed to maintain the relative humidity conditions of space through the normal cooling process and
should not have controls that limit the maximum relative humidity unless system type or project-
specific criteria dictate.
15-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
The inside design wintertime temperature for personnel comfort shall be 72 ฐF db unless otherwise
indicated here or directed by other project-specific criteria. All storage areas shall have a minimum
temperature of 40ฐF to prevent freezing. Except where it can be substantiated from records or
engineering computations that the inside relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter
humidification for personnel comfort and health shall not be provided. Where such a condition has
been substantiated, a design relative humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum
requirements for humidification equipment.
15.3.3.2 OUTSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
The HVAC system equipment shall be designed by using the outside design temperatures shown in
Table 15.3.3.2, Outside Design Conditions, for the particular application. The percentages of dry bulb
(db) and wet bulb (wb) temperatures are derived from the sources of tabulated weather data described
below. When data for a particular location are not listed, design conditions shall be estimated from
data available at nearby weather stations or by interpolation between values from stations, taking into
account elevation and other local conditions affecting design data. Weather data for use in sizing
HVAC equipment shall be obtained from the local weather station and/or the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals.
Table 15.3.3.2 Outside Design Conditions
Winter Summer Application
99% to 99.6% db 1% to 0.4% db and mean coincident Process, laboratory, and other uses where close
wb temperature and humidity control is required by
project criteria
97.5 to 99% db 2.5 to 1.0% db and mean coincident Personnel comfort systems
wb
-|o/o wfo Cooling towers* and research, technical-type
systems
1% db plus 5EF Air-cooled condensers*
*Temperature should be verified by reviewing actual site conditions.
15.3.3.3 EVAPORATIVE/ADIABATIC COOLING
In locations where a wide variation exists between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for extended
periods of time, evaporative/adiabatic cooling shall be considered for the applications listed below.
Selection of cooler types shall depend on system configuration, user experience, and LCCA. All
evaporative coolers shall maintain a positive water-bleed and water-makeup system for control of
mineral buildup.
Applications for which evaporating adiabatic cooling are considered include warehouses, shops that do
not require close (within 5ฐF plus or minus) temperature control, nonresidential-size kitchens, makeup
air ventilation units, and mechanical equipment spaces.
Air duct design, number and location of coolers, and relief of the higher rate of air supply to the
atmosphere shall be considered as means of ensuring a satisfactory operating system. Multistage
evaporative cooling systems shall also be considered.
Indoor design dry bulb temperatures for spaces that are air-conditioned by adiabatic cooling systems
shall be as specified in project-specific criteria. Design operating efficiency of adiabatic cooling
equipment shall be at least 70 percent. System-installed capacity shall be based on the peak design
cooling load for the air-conditioned space. An arbitrary air-change rate shall not be used for design
15-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
airflow. Adiabatic cooler specifications shall be stated in terms of the air capacity, the entering
ambient dry and wet bulb temperatures, and the leaving dry bulb temperature.
15.3.4 EQUIPMENT SIZING
HVAC equipment shall be sized to satisfy the building and cooling load requirements and to meet all
equipment design and selection criteria contained in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and
Equipment, HVAC Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks. The capacity of central heating,
refrigeration, and ventilation equipment shall be set for the peak block building or the maximum
simultaneous zone heating and cooling design loads and in accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals. The equipment shall not be sized for future additional capacity or to provide redundancy
unless indicated in project-specific criteria. Individual zone equipment shall be sized according to the peak
zone load.
15.3.5 LOAD CALCULATIONS
Load calculations shall be based on data and procedures outlined in the ASHRAE handbooks and shall be
in accordance with the conditions specified in this Manual. Load calculations may be performed manually
or by a nationally recognized computer-based load program. Specialty programs that are not recognized
must be approved by the contracting officer prior to use. If a separate auxiliary air system is provided, the
auxiliary air must be heated and cooled to within the room dry bulb temperature. Auxiliary air shall not
exceed 70 percent of total fume hood exhaust requirements.
15.3.6 WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
Energy conservation and waste heat recovery systems shall be considered and designed according to the
procedures outlined in specific chapters of the ASHRAE Fundamentals, Systems and Equipment,
Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks, and the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National
Association (SMACNA) Energy Recovery Equipment and Systems Manual. The following types of heat-
recovery methods and systems shall be considered for incorporation into the building HVAC system design
where appropriate.
Use of heat pipe or coil runaround systems for heating and air-conditioning air-handling systems. Use
of rotary heat wheel heat exchange is not permitted in laboratory fume hood, laboratory, or laboratory
support area exhaust systems. Rotary heat wheels may be used in administrative area exhaust systems.
Recovery of rejected heat from the condenser systems of central station cooling equipment for use in
heating the remainder of the building (when the central station cooling equipment must operate during
the heating season to cool computer rooms or high internal gain areas or to meet process requirements).
Use of exhaust heat from the condenser systems of continuously operated refrigeration equipment for
space heating or domestic hot-water heating.
Use of a free cooling system that uses cooling tower water (water-side economizer) when air-side
economizer systems are not feasible.
Use of a heat pump run-around loop.
15.3.7 ENERGY EFFICIENCY
After a careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
departments has been made, systems shall be designed that meet the operating requirements in an energy-
efficient manner. The local utility companies shall be contacted to evaluate the attributed atmospheric
emissions and the system dollar credits for load shifting to off-peak times. The health and safety aspects of
the operation must be given first priority, and they cannot be relaxed or traded off for greater efficiency.
15-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.4 Automatic Control Systems
15.4.1 GENERAL
This subsection covers automatic temperature and humidity controls, space pressurization controls, safety
controls, and energy monitoring and central supervisory control systems. A complete automatic control
system shall be designed by an HVAC controls design engineer with experience in designing systems of this
type and complexity. A commissioning plan shall be submitted to and approved by EPA prior to the
commissioning of the control system.
The final product shall be a complete, reliable, fully functional, maintainable, fully integrated, addressable,
control system that has been properly designed, installed, and commissioned. In existing facilities, the
design shall be integrated and interfaced into the existing control system so that the new equipment and
conditions can be controlled and monitored similar to the existing controlled equipment.
15.4.1.1 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The control system shall be a direct digital control (DDC) system reflecting the latest technology that
has been widely accepted by the control industry. DDC systems shall be electric/electronic only.
Pneumatics shall not be allowed except in instances when the existing controls absolutely require that
the new controls be pneumatic. The system shall be complete and suitable for the HVAC systems to be
installed. The DDC system shall be compatible with any existing systems in the facility or shall be able
to completely and seamlessly interface with the existing central control and monitoring system (CCMS)
network. All control points, including the VAV controllers, shall be fully compatible with the CCMS,
allowing complete monitoring, control, and setpoint adjustment of all points and VAV terminal unit
controllers from the CCMS host. Outside air quantity to each air handling unit shall be automatically
controlled at a volume to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62-2001. Typical points to be
monitored and controlled include:
Air Handling Units
Leaving air temperature
Entering air temperature
Entering chilled water temperature
Leaving chilled water temperature
Entering hot water temperature
Leaving hot water temperature
Temperature and humidity in each zone
Fan speed indication
Filter differential pressure
Supply air quantity
Outside air quantity
Central Plant
Chiller on-off (each chiller)
Chilled water temperature in and out
Chiller status
Boiler on-off (each boiler)
Hot water temperature in and out
Boiler status
Steam-HW heat exchanger, water temperature in and out
Pump on-off indication, each pump
Cooling Tower fan speed
Condenser water temperature in and out
Steam pressure and temperature
15-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Variable Air Volume Zones (through VAV unit controller)
Zone temperature
Zone primary air flowrate (supply and exhaust volumes, CFM)
Zone temperature setpoint
Alarm Print Outs
Chiller failure to start
Air handling unit fan failure
Zone space temperature rise to 5 degrees (F) above set point
Chilled water rise 5 degrees above set point
Hot water fall 5 degrees below set point
Zone RH 5% above set point
Pump failure.
Water on Floor of Mechanical Room
Laboratory fume hood sash position and hood alarm condition
Points to be Controlled:
Start/stop chillers/chilled water pumps
Reset chilled water temperature
Start/stop boilers/hot water pumps
Reset hot water temperature
Start/stop air handling units
Start/stop exhaust and supply fans
Setpoint adjust - all controllers with setpoints
Enable/disable economizer cycles
Setpoint adjust - all VAV zone
15.4.1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
The following codes and standards shall be referenced as applicable:
ASHRAE 135-1995: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and
Control Networks. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
Inc. 1995 including Addendums A through E
UL 916, Energy Management Systems
NEMA 250, Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
NEMAICS1: General Standards for Industrial Controls
NFPA 45, Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (where
applicable to controls and control sequences)
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
15.4.1.3 CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMISSION
The design submission shall include complete control system drawings, complete technical
specifications, and commissioning procedures for each control system. As a minimum, the following
documentation shall be required for review by proper EPA officials:
HVAC Control System Drawings: Each control system element on a drawing shall have a unique
identifier. The HVAC control system drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal.
HVAC control system drawings shall include the following: drawing index, HVAC control system
legend, valve schedule, damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence
15-7
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
of operation and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay wiring
diagram, communication network and block diagram, DDC panel installation and block diagram.
The HVAC control system drawing index shall show the name and number of the building, state or
other similar designation, and country. The HVAC control system legend shall show generic
symbols and the name of devices shown on the HVAC control system drawings.
The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient Cv, pressure
drop at specified flow rate, spring range, actuator size, close-off pressure data, dimensions, and
access and clearance requirements data.
The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and actual
sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, locations of actuators and damper
end switches, arrangement of sections in multi-section dampers, and methods of connecting
dampers, actuators, and linkages. The damper schedule shall include the maximum leakage rate at
the operating static-pressure differential. The damper schedule shall contain actuator selection
data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and seal the dampers, access and
clearance requirements.
The HVAC control system schematics shall show all control and mechanical devices associated
with the HVAC system. A system schematic drawing shall be submitted for each HVAC system.
The HVAC control system equipment schedule shall be in the form shown. All devices shown on
the drawings having unique identifiers shall be referenced in the equipment schedule. An
equipment schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.
Sequences of operation shall be submitted for each HVAC control system including each type of
terminal unit control system. A complete sequence of operation shall be included on the drawings
along with a schematic control diagram for each typical system. The sequence of operation and
schematic control diagrams shall specifically cover the following items and others as the project
requires.
1) Refrigeration compressor control
2) Refrigeration system protective devices
3) Chilled, DX and hot water control
4) Water coil or evaporator control, temperature and/or humidity as required
5) Cooling tor or air-cooled condenser control
6) Air handling unit control with protective devices
7) Individual unit control
8) Motor interlocks with system, starting and stopping instruction
9) All thermostat, humidistat, and protective device control settings
The HVAC control system wiring diagrams shall be functional wiring diagrams which show the
interconnection of conductors and cables to HVAC control panel terminal blocks and to the
identified terminals of devices, starters and package equipment. The wiring diagrams shall show
necessary jumpers and ground connections. The wiring diagrams shall show the labels of all
conductors. Sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged equipment
control systems shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system
control panel, magnetic starter, or packaged equipment control circuit. Wiring diagrams shall be
submitted for each HVAC control system.
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Service Organizations: A list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC control system
shall be provided. The list shall include the service organization name, address, technical point of
contact and telephone number, and contractual point of contact and telephone number.
Equipment Compliance Booklet: The HVAC Control System Equipment Compliance Booklet (ECB)
shall be provided. It shall consist of, but not be limited to, data sheets and catalog cuts which document
compliance of all devices and components with the specifications. The ECB shall include a Bill of
Materials for each HVAC control system. The Bill of Materials shall function as the table of contents
for the ECB and shall include the device's unique identifier, device function, manufacturer, and
model/part/catalog number used for ordering.
Performance Verification Test Procedures: The performance verification test procedures shall refer to
the devices by their unique identifiers, and shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results
that will demonstrate that the HVAC control and LFH exhaust systems performs in accordance with the
sequences of operation, and other contract documents.
Training: An outline for the HVAC control system training course with a proposed time schedule.
Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 60 days prior
to the start of the training. Three copies of HVAC control system training course material 30 days
prior to the scheduled start of the training course. The training course material shall include the
operation manual, maintenance and repair manual, and paper copies of overheads used in the course.
Operation Manual. Maintenance and Repair Manual: The HVAC Control System Operation Manual
and the HVAC Control System Maintenance and Repair Manual shall be provided for each HVAC
control system.
15.4.2 HUMIDITY CONTROL
Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-
zone basis and not for the entire central ventilation system unless required for project-specific humidity
requirements as stated in the project criteria. No controls shall be provided for dehumidifying spaces to
below 50 percent relative space humidity or for humidifying spaces to greater than 30 percent relative space
humidity unless required by project-specific criteria.
15.4.3 SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING
Simultaneous heating and cooling, which controls comfort conditions within a space by reheating or
recooling supply air or by concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems to serve a
common zone, shall not be used except under the following conditions:
Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature or humidity.
Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
cooling to prevent space relative humidity from rising above special-space relative humidity
requirements.
Project-specific building construction constraints, as established in the project criteria, prohibit
installation of other types of HVAC systems.
15.4.4 MECHANICAL VENTILATION CONTROL
All supply, return, and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual control of
fan operation to shut off the fan when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside air
when ventilation is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual gravity-operated or
automatic control of dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief. Systems that circulate air shall be
15-9
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
provided with minimum outdoor air damper position control to ensure that the minimum amount of outdoor
air is being introduced into the system. Unless otherwise required by life safety or the specific project
criteria, automatic dampers should fail open for return air and fail to a minimum setting for outside air.
15.4.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONTROL SCHEMES
HVAC systems will be provided with automatic controls which will allow systems to be operated to
conserve energy. The following energy saving controls will be considered, if applicable to the system:
Enthalpy controlled economizer cycle
Controls to close outside air supply when the facility is unoccupied (for non-laboratory areas only)
Night setback controls where appropriate
Master outdoor temperature sensing unit that resets the supply hot water temperature in accordance
with outdoor ambient temperature. This sensing unit shall automatically shut off the heating system
and the circulating pumps when the outdoor temperature reaches 65 degrees F (unless needed for
research)
Controls to shut off exhaust fans, where appropriate
Reset controls for hot and cold decks on air conditioning systems having hot and cold decks.
15.4.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
Automatic air control dampers must be of the low-leakage type with a maximum leakage of 6 cfm per
square foot at a maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute (fpm) and a 1-inch pressure differential,
as stipulated in Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standard 500. The dampers shall be
opposed-blade type for modulating control, but may be parallel-blade type for two-position control. Pilot
positioners and operators shall be out of the airstream.
15.4.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEM FAN CONTROL
Variable-air-volume (VAV) systems shall be designed with control devices that sense ductwork static air
pressure and velocity air pressure, and control supply-fan airflow and static pressure output through
modulation of variable inlet vanes, inlet/discharge dampers, scroll dampers, bypass dampers, variable pitch
blades, or variable frequency electric drive controls, as described in ASHRAE HVAC Applications
Handbook, Chapter 41, and ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 18. These
control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in ductwork downstream of the
fan and one static pressure controller to vary fan output through either the inlet vane, the damper, the belt
modulator, or the speed control. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices that
control the operation of the fans to monitor air volumes and maintain fixed minimum outdoor air ventilation
requirements.
15.4.8 FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION AND PROTECTION CONTROLS
All air-handling systems shall be provided with the smoke and fire protection controls required by NFPA
72. All supply, return, relief, and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have interlock controls that interface
with the fire and smoke detection system controls. In the event of fire, these interlock controls shall either
turn offer selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the spread of smoke and fire through the
building. These controls shall comply with NFPA 90A.
Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls as required by NFPA
91. Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety controls as
required by NFPA 96.
Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:
NFPA 72
NFPA 90A
NFPA 92A
15-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
ASHRAE manual, Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems and Equipment.
Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in
Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.
15.4.9 GAS-FIRED AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL
Gas-fired air-handling units shall be equipped with operating limit, safety control, and combustion control
systems. Gas burner and combustion controls shall comply with Factory Mutual (FM) loss prevention data
sheets and be listed in the FM Approval Guide. Gas-fired air-handling units shall have controls that lock
out the gas supply in the following conditions:
Main or pilot flame failure
Unsafe discharge temperature (high limit)
High or low gas pressure
No proof of airflow over heat exchanger
Combustion air loss
Loss of control system actuating energy.
15.4.10 COOLING TOWER AND WATER-COOLED CONDENSER SYSTEM CONTROLS
Controls for cooling towers shall conform to NFPA 214, Standard on Water-Cooling Towers. Design of
cooling tower fans shall consider use of variable-speed drives (if feasible) or two-speed motors (if feasible)
and on/off controls to reduce power consumption and maintain condenser water temperature. Bypass valve
control shall be provided, if required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order to maintain
the temperature of entering condenser water at the low limit. To decrease compressor energy use,
condenser water temperature shall be allowed to float, as long as the temperature remains above the lower
limit required by the chiller. The design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the cooling
tower is operated under freezing conditions, shall provide additional heat and control system components to
maintain cooling tower sump water temperatures above freezing.
When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the condenser water system to provide
condenser water to laboratory equipment that may require it. In addition, provisions for supplying
emergency condenser water to laboratory equipment may be required.
15.4.11 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEMS
The entire control system shall be connected to the central control and monitoring system (CCMS) network.
The VAV controllers shall be fully compatible with the CCMS allowing complete monitoring, control, and
setpoint adjustment of all VAV terminal unit controllers from the CCMS host. One personal computer must
be provided for monitoring, controlling and resetting of any control device in the complex. This computer
shall also serve as the connection through a modem to a CCMS. A minimum of one laptop computer shall
also be provided for use as a field interface device to monitor, control, and reset any applicable point for
any control device. The supplier of the control system shall provide three (3) copies of the operating
software (one copy on the central control computer and 2 sets on CDs) and three (3) sets of technical
manuals for the control system to the EPA. This system must be expandable to include the future phases.
15.4.12 ENERGY METERING
All utilities including electric, gas, oil, and potable water utilities to be monitored shall be metered and
tracked by the central control and monitoring system (CCMS). All meters shall be compatible with the
installed control system, shall be provided with signaling devices and shall fully interface with building
HVAC control panel. Submetering of utilities to various buildings or equipment shall be based on project
criteria or, in the absence of these, on sound engineering judgment. Sub-metering of lighting systems
should also be considered.
15-11
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.4.13 DDC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. Each major component of
equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a
conspicuous place. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to
use on a project. The two years' use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The two years' experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers'
catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory, field operation, for not less than 6,000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's
factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. Items of the
same type and purpose shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts and components.
Portable Workstation/Tester: A portable workstation/tester shall be a Dell Inspiron 2600 or equivalent. It
shall include carrying case, extra battery, charger and a compatible network adapter. The workstation/tester
shall:
Run DDC diagnostics.
Load all DDC memory resident programs and information, including parameters and constraints.
Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
Control any analog output (AO) or digital output (DO).
Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full English
language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
Display database parameters.
Modify database parameters.
Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a specific DDC. Provide all
necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including an EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA
232-Fport.
Disable/enable each DDC.
Perform all workstation functions as specified.
Central Workstation/Tester: A central workstation/tester shall be tester shall be a Dell Dimension 4500 or
equivalent. The central workstation/tester shall:
Run DDC diagnostics.
Load all DDC memory resident programs and information, including parameters and constraints.
Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
Control any AO or DO.
Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full English
language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
Display database parameters.
Modify database parameters.
Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a specific DDC. Provide all
necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including an EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA
232-Fport.
Disable/enable each DDC.
Perform all workstation functions as specified.
15.4.14 DDC SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
All DDC software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete DDC system.
Updates to the software shall be provided for system, operating and application software, and operation in
15-12
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
the system shall be verified. Updates shall be incorporated into operations and maintenance manuals, and
software documentation. There shall be at least one scheduled update near the end of the first years'
warranty period, at which time the latest released version of the Contractor's software shall be installed and
validated.
15.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Systems
15.5.1 GENERAL
Selection of central station cooling systems shall be based on the LCCA procedures. Size, selection, and
design shall be based on guidelines in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and
HVAC Applications handbooks. Refrigeration equipment shall comply with Air-Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 520, ARI 550, and ARI 590. To ensure the most economical operation, the
number and size of central station cooling units shall be based on the annual estimated partial-load
operation of the plant.
The project design criteria shall provide direction on installed standby chiller capacity. Wherever
possible, the central station chilled-water equipment shall be designed into the chilled-water
distribution systems as part of a primary-secondary loop system maintaining the chilled-water inlet
temperature below a maximum predetermined value; ideally, the central station cooling equipment will
be the secondary portion of the loop.
Temperature-critical areas (such as laboratories and computer centers), as determined by project
criteria, shall be provided with independent refrigeration systems with backup systems if the areas are
involved with vital programs. Use of off-peak cooling systems shall be considered in areas that have
high electric peak demand charges.
15.5.2 AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment for the mechanical systems shall use refrigerants
acceptable under EPA's Significant New Alternatives Program (SNAP) under 40 CFR Part 82, Protection
of Stratospheric Ozone. Chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) refrigerants shall be avoided. The use of
hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) will be permitted only if the equipment required cannot be replaced with
equipment that uses a non-ozone-depleting refrigerant. Existing chillers should be retrofitted or replaced to
meet the requirements of 40 CFR Part 82. The refrigerant in air-conditioning systems should be recycled
during servicing, as required under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act. Except as set forth herein, all air-
conditioning and ventilating systems for the handling of air that is not contaminated with flammables or
explosive vapors or dust shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
15.5.3 WATER CHILLERS
The selection of centrifugal, reciprocating, helical, rotary-screw, absorption, or steam-powered chillers shall
be based on coefficients of performance under full-load and partial-load conditions; these coefficients are
used in analysis done by LCCA methods. LCCA shall also consider the pumping-energy burdens on the
chilled-water and condenser water system as part of the evaluation. Compression refrigeration machines
shall be designed with the safety controls, relief valves, and rupture disks noted below, and design shall be
in compliance with the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE 15 and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 207.
Controls shall include, at a minimum:
High-discharge refrigerant pressure cutout switch
Low-evaporator refrigerant pressure or temperature cutout switch
High and low oil pressure switches
Chilled-water flow interlock switch
Condenser water flow interlock switch (on water-cooled equipment)
15-13
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Chilled-water low-temperature cutout switch.
Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable-speed control for
capacity modulation. Units shall be capable of modulating to 10 percent of design capacity without
surge. Reciprocating compressors shall be designed for capacity control by cylinder unloading.
Designs using hot-gas bypass control of compressors for capacity modulation shall not be used except
when capacity modulation is required at conditions below 10 percent of the rated load. Compressor
motors for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in compliance with all requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC).
Absorption refrigeration machines shall be provided with the following safety controls, at a minimum:
Condenser water flow switch
Chilled-water flow switch
Evaporation refrigerant level switch
Generator high-temperature limit switch (gas-fired units)
Generator shell bursting disc (high-temperature water or steam)
Concentration limit controls.
Liquid coolers (evaporators) shall be designed to meet the design pressure, material, welding, testing,
and relief requirements of ASHRAE standard 15 and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII. Evaporators shall be selected according to the
requirements of ASHRAE standard 24-78.
15.5.4 CONDENSERS/CONDENSING UNITS
Water-cooled condensers shall comply with ASHRAE standard 15 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII. Water-cooled condenser shells and tubes shall have removable heads, if available, to
allow tube cleaning. The use of marine water boxes on the condenser shall be considered for ease of tube
cleaning.
Air-cooled condensers and condensing units shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ARI
460 and ASHRAE standard 20. Air-cooled condenser intakes shall be located away from any obstructions
that will restrict airflow. Air-cooled equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-
cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-head-pressure control to maintain satisfactory operation during
light loading.
15.5.5 COOLING TOWERS
Cooling towers shall be located and placed to avoid problems with water drift and deposition of water
treatment chemicals. Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict
airflow, cause recirculation of discharge air, or inhibit maintenance. Cooling tower location should
consider noise for building and neighboring occupants.
15.5.5.1 Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling
Tower Institute (CTI) Bulletin ATC-105.
15.5.5.2 Cooling towers shall have a conductivity meter installed to monitor water chemistry and automatically
control cooling tower blowdown and water treatment chemical addition. The conductivity meter shall
be regularly calibrated and maintained. Cooling tower water treatment vendors shall be instructed that
water conservation is a key operating consideration. Vendors shall be selected based on past
performance, cost to treat 1,000 gallons of make-up water, and highest recommended water cycle of
concentration.
15-14
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.5.3 Cooling towers shall have sump water heating systems if they will operate during freezing weather.
15.5.5.4 Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are
noncombustible. (Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fire-retardant-treated, fiberglass-reinforced plastic are
classified as combustible.) In determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible
and noncombustible in NFPA 214 shall be used. Cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a
combustible fill shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with
NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:
The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services.
The building is totally sprinkler protected.
A fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
building.
The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection.
The cost of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping
distribution system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or
extension of water supplies required.
15.5.5.5 Cooling towers with airstreams that pass through water shall have the water treated with an EPA-
approved biocide to control etiological organisms or any chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
herbicides, or other chemicals that may be present because of local conditions. A maintenance program
must be established to ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.
15.5.5.6 Cooling towers shall have meters that measure water input (cooling tower make-up water) and output
(blowdown water).
15.5.6 BUILDING HEATING SYSTEMS
This subsection applies to heat-generating equipment or heat-transfer equipment and accessories located in
individual buildings. The project criteria shall provide direction on factors to be considered in the selection
of heating system capacity; such factors include redundancy, future expansion or building modification,
thermal storage or solar assistance, and other project-specific considerations. If maintaining the building
design temperature is critical, a stand-alone heating system shall be designed with backup capability and
with no dependence on other facility systems.
15.5.6.1 Where buildings are connected to the central plant heat generation/distribution system, one of the
following shall be provided:
Steam-to-building hot water heat exchanger
High-temperature water (HTW)-to-building hot water heat exchanger
Steam-pressure reducing station.
15.5.6.2 For space heating by hot water, conversion of the central heating plant steam or HTW shall provide a
maximum heating-water supply temperature of 200 ฐF for building terminal units. For space heating by
steam, the building steam supply pressure shall be reduced to 15 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)
unless a higher supply pressure is needed for process requirements. For process-related or other high
temperature requirements, the project criteria shall indicate the capacities and the temperature and
pressure requirements. For facilities with a central plant condensate return system, a condensate
receiver with duplex pumps shall be specified. Steam-to-hot-water or HTW-to-building heating water
converters shall be selected on the basis of design criteria contained in the ASHRAE Handbook of
HVAC Systems and Equipment and ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
15-15
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.6.3 The use of direct and indirect gas-fired units, electric heating, heat pumps (air-cooled and water-
cooled), low-temperature gas infrared heating, and hot-water radiant heating and hot-water distribution
to terminal units, shall be considered, with selection based on the building type, the facility preference,
and LCCA. Office buildings, and particularly buildings with occupants sitting near fenestration, shall
be designed with perimeter finned-tube radiation heating systems or other perimeter heating systems.
If the selected heating fuel is fuel oil, storage tanks, installed in accordance with national, state, and
local regulations, shall provide 30 days of full heating capacity. Each tank shall be fully trimmed for
safety and operating conditions and shall include a remote level gauge and full monitoring. Tanks shall
comply with NFPA 30 requirements.
15.5.7 HEATING EQUIPMENT
Furnaces and boilers for central heating systems shall be enclosed in a room with 2-hour fire-rated walls,
floors, and ceilings, and with openings protected by automatic or self-closing 1 !/2-hour fire doors. For
small units consisting of a single furnace operating a hot air system or a boiler not exceeding 15 psi pressure
or a rating of 10 bhp, a 1-hour fire-rated enclosure is permissible.
15.5.7.1 STANDARDS
Heating equipment will comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:
Oil-fired-NFPA 31
Gas-fired - NFPA 54
Liquefied petroleum gas-fired - NFPA 58
Liquefied natural gas-fired - NFPA 59A
Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code - NFPA 85.
15.5.7.2 FUEL STORAGE
Where liquid fuel is used, a recessed floor or curb shall be provided, with ramps at the openings. The
height of the recess or curb shall be sufficient to contain all the fuel in case the tank or container
ruptures. For requirements, refer to NFPA 30, NFPA 45, NFPA 90A, and Chapter 5 of the
Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4).
15.5.7.3 SHOP OPERATIONS
Shop, storage, and other operations that involve flammable or combustible materials and are not
directly related to the operations in the furnace or boiler rooms shall be located elsewhere unless the
furnace or boiler room is sprinkler protected. Incidental operations that do not utilize significant
amounts of flammable materials are allowed in furnace or boiler rooms if proper separations are
maintained between combustible materials and ignition sources (e.g., boiler equipment).
15.5.7.4 BURNERS
Regardless of size, burners on suspended oil-fired heaters shall be provided with flame supervision that
will ensure shutdown in not more than 4 seconds if flame failure occurs or trial for ignition does not
establish a flame.
15.5.7.5 GAS PIPING
Gas piping entry into the building shall be protected against breakage due to settling, vibration, or,
where appropriate, seismic activity. Where practical, piping shall be brought in above grade and
provided with a swing joint before it enters the building. Where it is necessary for gas piping to enter a
building below ground, the physical arrangement shall be such that a break in the gas line due to
settling or other causes at or near the point of entry cannot result in the free flow of gas into the
building. Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing.
15-16
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Pipelines shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA's hazard communication standard. Local gas
utility and code requirements shall be followed.
15.5.7.6 GAS METER REGULATORS
To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators, or similar attachments shall be
adequately supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the outside of the
building.
15.5.7.7 VALVES
Earthquake-sensitive shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where required by local code.
15.5.7.8 GAS METER ROOMS
Gas meter rooms shall be vented in a way that removes any leaked gas without transporting it through
the structure.
15.5.7.9 FIRE-RESISTANT SHAFTS OR CONDUIT
For large-capacity gas services (piping greater than 3-inch diameter at 4 inches of water pressure head
or any other size with equivalent or greater delivery capabilities) within a building, the piping shall be
enclosed in fire-resistive shafts and vented directly to the outside at top and bottom. Any horizontal
runs of the gas pipe shall be enclosed in a conduit or chase, also directly vented at each end to the
exterior or to the vented vertical shaft. Automatic gas detection and automatic shutoff shall be
provided.
15.5.8 TWO-PIPE COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
Under normal circumstances, two-pipe combination heating and cooling systems shall not be considered.
15.5.9 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Economical pipe sizes shall be selected for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, boiler feed, and
condensate return systems based on the allowable pressure drop, flow rate, and pump selection criteria
prescribed in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and HVAC Applications
handbooks. Insulation shall be provided on all water distribution piping and system components. Strainers
shall be provided at the suction side of each pump and of each control valve. Flexible connectors shall be
specified for installation on the suction and discharge piping of base-mounted end-suction type pumps and
on electronically driven chillers.
Check valves and balancing valves, or combination check-shutoff-balance valves, shall be installed in
the discharge piping of all pumps operating in parallel pumping systems. Balancing valves shall be
installed in the discharge piping of all pump systems.
Service valves shall be installed in the suction and discharge piping of all major pieces of equipment.
Balancing valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of all coils and in central station cooling
equipment.
An air elimination pressure control, venting, and automatic filling system (with backflow prevention)
shall be provided for each hot-water and chilled-water distribution system; water treatment injection
should also be provided, if required.
Air chambers and/or surge tanks should be installed to safeguard system against water hammer.
Expansion or compression tanks and fill piping connections shall be located on the suction side of the
distribution system pump or pumps. Expansion tanks and air separation devices shall be sized
according to the methods in the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC and Equipment, and specified in
15-17
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1. Gauge glasses, drain valves, and vent valves shall
be provided for all expansion tank systems.
Water treatment design information for chilled water, hot water, and boiler feed water systems shall be
based on project criteria (tested water condition).
15.5.10 PUMPS AND PUMPING SYSTEMS
Pumps for chilled-water, hot-water, condenser water, boiler feed water, and condensate systems shall be
centrifugal-type pumps and shall be selected on the basis of the criteria in the ASHRAE handbooks.
Materials, types of seals, bearings, wear rings, shafts, and other features shall be selected on the basis of
specific system requirements. Use of primary-secondary type pumping systems and high-efficiency motors
shall be considered for pumps for all hot-water and chilled-water distribution systems.
For systems where system pumping horsepower requirements are greater than 20 bhp, use of variable-
speed drives or parallel-pumping arrangement shall be considered.
Standby pumps shall be provided for all systems, unless dictated by project-specific criteria.
15.5.11 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
All steam piping shall comply with ASME B31.1 and shall be at least Schedule 40 black steel. Fittings,
valves, and accessories shall be selected on the basis of pipe size and temperature and pressure conditions.
15.5.11.1 STEAM CONDENSATE RECOVERY
Steam systems shall incorporate condensate recovery. The condensate recovery system shall be
routinely inspected and maintained to maximize the recovery of condensate.
15.5.12 AIR-HANDLING AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Air-handling equipment and air distribution systems shall be sized to optimize performance, initial cost, and
operating and maintenance costs over the life of the system. Systems should be sized for 25% future
expansion in fume hoods, other ventilated equipment, and to accommodate future modernization
requirements.
15.5.12.1 SETBACK MECHANISM
The setback mechanism shall provide a low-speed operations setting for the fan motors of air-handling
unit(s) and fume hoods in a particular zone. Fan motors can be simultaneously activated. The setback
mechanism shall be designed to provide four air changes per hour or 25 cfm per square foot of LFH
work surface. The setback mechanism shall also provide room temperatures of approximately 55 ฐF in
the winter and approximately 85 ฐF in the summer unless other, overriding temperature requirements
are specifically stated. The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well as the
temperature and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum air changes per hour.
The HVAC system(s) nighttime setback shall be controlled by a timer connected to the energy
management control system of the building. The fume hood face velocity reduction of 25 percent of
full open-flow air volume (80 fpm hood face velocity at 100% sash opening) and the general exhaust
and special canopy hood operation at 100 percent airflow are to be balanced by an appropriate
reduction in supply air (air-handling unit) fan speed in order to maintain negative pressure in the
laboratory and laboratory support rooms with respect to the hallways.
15.5.12.2 NOISE LEVELS
All air-handling system equipment (e.g., fans, terminal units, air-handling units) shall be provided with
vibration isolators and flexible ductwork connectors to minimize transmission of vibration and noise.
Systems shall satisfy the noise criteria (NC) levels recommended for various types of spaces and the
15-18
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
vibration criteria listed in the ASHRAE handbooks. The combined noise level generated by
mechanical and electrical building equipment and fume hoods should not exceed 70 decibels dBa at the
face of the hoods (with the systems operating) or 55 dBa elsewhere. Where air-handling equipment
and air distribution systems cannot meet these requirements, sound, and vibration-attenuation devices
shall be installed in the air-handling systems.
15.5.12.3 VAV MECHANICAL VENTILATION
Use of a VAV mechanical ventilation system is permitted if the following design and installation
criteria are achieved.
VAV system must maintain a minimal flow of air within the laboratory fume hood and ductwork to
purge gases, vapors, and other substances; avoid condensation, impaction, and deposition in the
ductwork; and achieve sufficient exhaust stack velocity so that the contaminated air stream clears
the building and does not reenter the building along with supply air. Refer to subsection 15.3.2 for
minimum airflow requirements.
The system must be able to consistently provide 100 fpm average face velocity for restricted
bypass laboratory fume hoods at 80% face opening and all face openings below 100% until the
minimum exhaust volume of 25 CFM per square foot of LFH work surface is reached.
The supply and exhaust motors in the VAV system must be able to respond with no unacceptable
delays to changes in the sash height. This will prevent the backflow of contaminants into the
workspace and the temporary loss of negative pressure in the laboratory space relative to corridors
and other adjacent spaces.
15.5.12.4 AIR HANDLER CONDENSATE
Reuse of air handler condensate shall be considered, particularly in geographic locations with extended
periods of warm, humid climate conditions. In applications where air handler condensate reuse is cost
effective, it should be implemented. Condensate should ideally be used as cooling tower make-up, or
for other appropriate applications.
15.5.13 FANS/MOTORS
Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, nonpulsing aerodynamic operation in the range of
operation, over varying speeds. Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed with
adjustable motor pulley sheaves to assist in air balancing of systems. Fans with motors of greater than 20
hp shall use fixed (nonadjustable) drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley sheaves of
different diameters. Supply air-handling units and return air fans in VAV systems shall control capacity
through the use of variable-speed drives, inlet vanes, or scroll bypass dampers. All fans shall comply with
AMCA standard 210, ASHRAE standard 51, the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment,
and ACGIH Industrial Ventilation.
Fans shall be located within the ductwork system, in accordance with the requirements of AMCA
Publication 201. Motors shall be sized according to properly calculated bhp fan requirements and shall
not use oversized fans and motors to meet future capacity needs unless so directed by the project
criteria. Fan construction materials shall be selected on the basis of corrosion resistance and cost.
Spark-resistant construction shall be used where required by NFPA. All fans and accessories shall be
designed and specified to meet all smoke and flame spread requirements of NFPA 255. Fans used in
exhaust systems of fume hoods shall also be of the noiseless type and shall be corrosion-resistant to the
fumes generated in the hood.
Smoke detectors for automatic control in air distribution systems shall be located in accordance with
the requirements of NFPA 90A, Chapter 4.
15-19
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.14 COILS
Heating and cooling coils shall comply with ARI 410. Heating and cooling coil selection shall comply with
the guidelines in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems
and Equipment. Coil manufacturers shall certify coil performance by ARI certification or provide written
certification from a nationally recognized independent testing firm that coil performance is in accordance
with ARI 410.
Heating and cooling coils shall be composed of materials appropriate for the corrosive atmosphere in
which they operate. Cooling coils shall be designed with a maximum face velocity of 550 fpm. Coils
designed with face velocities exceeding 500 fpm shall have features that prevent condensate carryover
or use moisture eliminators. Coils shall have a drain feature.
Recirculating air systems designed for outside-air winter temperatures below freezing shall have a
preheat coil located either in the outside air intake or in the mixed-air stream upstream of the cooling
coil, unless the theoretical mixed-air temperature is calculated to be above 35ฐF. In this case, the
preheat coils may be omitted if adequate baffling is provided to guarantee positive mixing of the return
and outdoor air. Preheat coils shall be designed to maintain discharge air temperature without
modulation of the steam or hot-water flow through use of modulating face dampers and bypass
dampers. In moderate climates where the method has been proved to be reliable and there is no
concern about coil freeze-up, steam modulation may be used for control of steam coils.
15.5.15 WALK-IN ENVIRONMENTAL AND COLD STORAGE ROOMS
Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or humidity is controlled at a single set
condition within specified tolerances regardless of activity in the room. In determining the appropriate
room temperature, uniformity, and gradient, the design professional should discuss heat loads (in terms of
process loads and ventilation requirements) with the end user. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
capable of maintaining a 4ฐC room temperature with a uniformity of +0.5 ฐC and a maximum gradient of
1 ฐC, unless otherwise specified in the program requirements. A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable
of maintaining a minus 20 ฐC room temperature with a uniformity of + 1 ฐC and a maximum gradient of 3ฐC,
unless otherwise specified. Rooms shall feature temperature displays visible from a contiguous hallway and
shall be capable of producing a continuous record of temperature. Alarm systems with manual override
capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault conditions. Ventilation shall be provided if
work activity is performed inside chambers/rooms. Doors to rooms shall be provided with a locking
mechanism capable of release at all times from the room interior whether or not the door is locked. Walk-in
environmental and cold storage spaces shall include shelving. Walk-in coolers are considered enclosed
spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them. Walk-in cold storage rooms shall have
O2 sensors and alarms to ensure that oxygen has not been displaced.
A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for these rooms. If refrigeration is provided by the main
building's chilled-water system, a backup self-contained system shall also be provided.
15.5.16 CENTRAL PLANT HEAT GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
The following criteria shall be applied in the planning and design of steam and HTW generation and
distribution systems and of cogeneration facilities.
15.5.16.1 FACILITY SIZING
The design professional shall consider creating a plant design that can be easily expanded to meet
potential future loads in addition to meeting confirmed near-term loads. Load computations to
establish boiler capacity shall be based on the building design heating load, as determined in
conformance with the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, plus process heating loads (if any) and an
15-20
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
allowance for piping plants. The process heat losses shall be investigated during the design stage to
determine whether heat can be recovered, thereby reducing the boiler load.
Multiple boiler installations shall be considered for all applications in order to maintain high operating
plant efficiency throughout the year. The number and size of the boilers shall be based on the number
of operable hours at full and partial load operation, the turn-down ratio of the boiler being considered,
efficiency at partial loads, and year-round process or summer loads. Use of a base load boiler shall be
considered when a year-round process demand exists. The system shall be designed to satisfy peak
demand by operating over its maximum rating for short periods of time.
The possibility of operating small local boilers rather than the central plant to satisfy summer loads
shall also be considered. Sufficient capacity shall be furnished to allow one boiler to be down for
inspection or maintenance or to be on standby while the remaining boiler(s) maintain normal
operations.
The generating facilities shall be so located as to allow efficient steam/hot-water distribution
throughout the site and to allow for future expansion of the generating and distribution system. The
facility location shall also be chosen to take advantage of prevailing winds and to minimize problems
associated with noise, dirt, air pollution, harmful effects on adjacent property owners, and
accommodation of fuel deliveries and storage.
The option of installing one or more satellite boiler facilities rather than a single central boiler complex
shall be evaluated when one or more of the following conditions exist:
An extensive distribution system connecting several separate steam users is required.
Requirements exist for several different steam pressures.
Variable steam loadings exist with respect to time or quantity.
The use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative shall be considered in the planning of any
large steam generation facility. The feasibility of cogeneration with HTW or HTW boilers or HTW-to-
steam generators shall be considered. In determining the feasibility of cogeneration, the following
factors shall be considered:
Energy demand and cost, peak load, average load, seasonal variations, and utility rate structures.
Regulatory concerns: Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act (PURPA), relevant environmental
regulations, and current local regulations.
The applicability of cogeneration shall be thoroughly evaluated per EPA Cogeneration Partnership
Program (www.epa.gov/chp/about chp.htm). Cogeneration plants shall be sized to accommodate
existing loads.
15.5.16.2 STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATION
All boilers shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. In determining whether to
select a steam or a high-temperature water (HTW) system, the following factors shall be considered:
Whether the system will be operated intermittently or continuously
Whether fast response to significant load variation is important
Pumping costs
Length, size, and configuration of required piping
Possibility of using HTW to generate the steam at its point of use, in a facility where only a few
processes require steam.
15-21
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Steam boilers shall be designed to provide dry, saturated steam unless the economics of electricity
generation, meeting specific process requirements, or accommodating extensive distribution systems
necessitates use of superheated steam. If required for process, the use of high-pressure satellite boilers
located close to the process shall be considered in lieu of distribution of high-pressure steam.
An HTW system is a system that generates heating or process water with a temperature above 300ฐF.
HTW boilers shall be of the controlled forced-circulation type, specifically designed for HTW service.
Because of costs associated with high-pressure pipe, valves, and fittings, HTW systems should not be
designed for higher temperatures and pressures than are absolutely necessary.
In a gas-pressurized HTW system, an inert gas, such as nitrogen, shall be used and the pressurizing
tank shall be installed vertically to reduce the area of contact between gas and water, thus reducing the
absorption of gas into the liquid. Gas-pressurized systems should be maintained at a pressure that is
well above the pressure at which the HTW will flash to steam. Pump pressurization is generally
restricted to small process heating systems. In larger HTW systems, pump pressurization can be
combined with gas pressurization.
Boilers shall be equipped with meters to measure total potable water used as boiler feed water.
15.5.16.3 CIRCULATION PUMPS
In selecting and installing circulation pumps, energy efficiency shall be emphasized. Consideration
shall be given to the use of variable-speed circulation pumps. In steam-pressurized systems, circulating
pumps shall be located in the supply lines to maintain pressure above the flashpoint of the hottest water
in the distribution system. A mixing connection that allows some of the coil return water to pass into
the supply line at the pump suction shall be provided to safeguard against flashing or cavitation at the
pump(s). In a gas-pressurized HTW system, the circulating pumps may be installed in either the supply
lines or the return lines.
15.5.16.4 FUEL STORAGE AND HANDLING SYSTEMS
Control, containment, and treatment of rainwater runoff from coal storage yards shall comply with
effluent guidelines and standards for steam-electric power-generating point sources (40 CFR Part 423).
The relative economy of a central natural gas-fired plant compared with a gas distribution system
serving the individual requirements of each building shall be considered. The long-range availability of
the gas supply and the possible need for a secondary fuel shall be established. The economics of
interruptible versus uninterruptible gas service relative to availability of secondary fuel shall be
considered.
Fully automatic mechanical-firing equipment and mechanical draft equipment shall be provided.
Mechanical-firing equipment capable of developing 100 to 125 percent of the boiler capacity shall be
specified.
Ash-handling systems shall comply with Federal Construction Council Technical Report No. 51,
Chapter III, Section 3.1. Land availability for storage or disposal, water availability, nearness to
residential areas, the possibility of selling the ash, as a means of disposal, and environmental
regulations shall be considered. Collection and treatment of ash-carrying liquid effluents shall comply
with 40 CFR Part 423.
Stationary internal combustion engines, such as gasoline- or diesel-powered generators or fire pumps,
shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 37.
The use of underground tanks shall be avoided. Refer to Chapter 5 of the Environmental Management
Guidelines (Volume 4) for storage tank requirements (aboveground and underground).
15-22
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.5.16.5 BOILER WATER TREATMENT
Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits on or corrosion of internal boiler surfaces
and to prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam. A boiler water treatment specialist
shall be consulted to determine appropriate treatment measures. Water quality measures for the steam
plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated. The design of the plant shall
provide for daily sampling to determine internal water conditions. Provisions shall be made for
introducing treatment chemicals into the feed water. The plant shall contain adequate space and
equipment for storing, handling, and mixing chemicals. Continuous versus intermittent blowdown
operations shall be considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids
within acceptable limits. For continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat
recovery system shall be considered. Blowdown rates and boiler water chemistry control shall be
established in consultation with ASME's "Consensus Operating Practices for Control of
Feedwater/Boiler Water Chemistry in Modern Industrial Boilers " (1 994).
A minimum of two boiler feed pumps, each sized to handle the peak load, shall be provided to allow
one pump to be out of service without affecting facility operations. Pumps shall be equipped with
automatic controls that regulate feed water flow to maintain the required water level and with a relief
valve. Relief valves shall be preset to lift at a lower pressure than the boiler safety valve setting plus
static and friction heads.
15.5.16.6 BOILER ROOM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Boiler plant instrumentation and control panels shall include devices for monitoring the combustion
process and consoles in equipment in which such devices are mounted. Boiler room controls and
instrumentation shall comply with NFPA 85.
15.5.16.7 PLANT INSULATION
All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor, or on any catwalk, shall be insulated to prevent surface
temperatures above 60 ฐC (where contact would be unintentional and unlikely) and above 49 ฐC
(where contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation). Insulation shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
15.5.16.8 STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER DISTRIBUTION
Steam and HTW distributions systems shall be sized to accommodate, without extensive modification,
any future expansion anticipated in the project criteria.
When aboveground steam or HTW distribution systems are to be constructed, pipe shall be
installed on concrete pedestals, on concrete/steel stanchions, or on poles. Where piping crosses
over roadways, a minimum of 14 feet of clearance shall be provided.
Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in the piping system. Expansion loops
shall be provided where space allows. Where space does not allow expansion loops, expansion
joints may be used. Piping shall comply with ASME B31.1
Unless economics dictates otherwise, steam shall be supplied to the distribution system at the
lowest pressure that will adequately serve the connected load. The economics of higher pressure
distribution shall be considered. Processes requiring higher pressures shall be serviced, where
practical, by a separate section of the distribution system to avoid operating the entire system at
higher pressures than necessary.
15-23
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Warm-up bypass valves shall be provided at all shutoff valves in steam distribution lines. Steam
velocities shall be selected for the type of service being considered but shall not exceed 10,000
fpm.
Steam and condensate pipe shall, where possible, be graded at a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet in
the direction of flow. Drip stations and steam traps shall be provided at all low points in steam
lines.
To ensure tightness of the steam system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25
inches shall be welded, except in the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate
maintenance of equipment, connections, and valves.
HTW piping shall be sized for an average velocity of 5 feet per second, a maximum velocity of 10
feet per second, and a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second. To ensure tightness of the HTW
system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25 inches shall be welded, except in
the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate maintenance of equipment, connections,
and valves.
Unlike steam piping, HTW piping may follow the natural terrain; however, proper provisions shall
be made for draining and venting the piping.
15.5.16.9 PIPING INSULATION
Insulation containing asbestos is prohibited. The possibility that water infiltration will cause physical
damage to, or loss of thermal characteristics of, underground pipe insulation shall be considered in the
selection of insulation. All insulation installed aboveground, in tunnels, and in manholes shall be
provided with either a metal jacket, either factory or field installed, or a hard cement finish.
15.5.16.10 PIPING MARKING
Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ASME AB.1-1996 Scheme for Identification of Piping
Systems, and shall conform with requirements of Chap. 5 of the GSA Facilities Standards for the Public
Buildings Service, 2003 Edition (PBS P100); andNFPA45, Chap. 8.2, Storage and Piping Systems for
Compressed and Liquified Gases, 2000 Edition, as applicable
15.6 Ductwork
15.6.1 GENERAL
Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air to and from the conditioned spaces;
noise, available space, maintenance, air quality, air quantity, and optimum balance between expenditure of
fan energy (annual operating cost) and duct size (initial investment) shall also be considered.
Duct smoke detectors, as described under Section 16 Electrical Requirements, of this Manual, shall be
installed in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements.
15.6.2 FABRICATION
Ductwork for air supply, return air, and general exhaust shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, or
fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) that meets required fire ratings. Laboratory fume hood (LFH) and
equipment exhaust shall be of PVC-coated galvanized sheet metal or of Type 3 16 welded stainless steel,
depending on the specific laboratory function and type of process being exhausted. Polypropylene and
glass duct material shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications. LFH exhaust ductwork
shall be of welded or flanged/bolted air tight construction in accordance with ANSI/AIHA Z9.2 and Z9.5
15-24
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Duct linings or coverings shall be of noncombustible construction. The total assembly of the duct lining,
including adhesive and any coatings or additives involved, shall have an interior finish rating of Class A
(flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). Use of porous duct liners that can collect dirt and moisture
should be avoided and shall not be considered for new construction. Where such liners are already in use,
and particularly in areas close to humidification or dehumidification (cooling) equipment, the lining should
be removed unless coated or sealed to prevent fiber loss.
15.6.2.1 COMPLIANCE
Ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the SMACNA HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual. Ductwork, accessories, and support systems shall be designed to comply
with the following:
ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
NFPA 45 Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
NFPA 90A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
NFPA 91 Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
SMACNA HVAC Duct Design Manual.
ANSI/ASHRAE 62
ANSI/ASHRAEZ9.2
ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5
15.6.2.2 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Ductwork shall also meet the following requirements:
Ductwork shall be designed to comply with NFPA 90 A. This includes specifications and
installation of smoke and fire dampers at rated wall penetrations and smoke
pressurization/containment dampers as required for smoke pressurization/evacuation systems. Fire
dampers shall not be used on the exhaust system ducting if the system must maintain confinement
of hazardous materials during and after a fire.
Ductwork shall be designed to resist corrosive contaminants if any are present. Exhaust ductwork
from laboratory fume hoods shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the fume
hood for drainage of condensation, constructed with welded longitudinal seams, and welded
transverse joints, or equivalent construction, in accordance with the requirements of Section 6,
Ductwork, of American National Standard (ANSI/AIHA) Z9.5-1992. Laboratory ductwork shall
be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 45.
Ductwork that handles moisture-laden air that is exhausted from areas such as shower rooms,
dishwashing areas, and other areas where condensation may occur on the duct interior shall be of
aluminum construction, have welded joints and seams, and provide drainage at low points.
Penetrations of ductwork through security barriers shall be minimized. Any such penetrations that
are more than 96 square inches in area and 6 inches in smallest dimension must be provided with a
penetration delay equal to that required for the security barrier. The physical attributes, intended
service of the ductwork, and the axial configuration of the barrier penetration shall be considered
in the design of the penetration delay.
15-25
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.6.3 ACCESS PANELS
All ductwork shall have an access panel that provides access to each operating part, including:
Splitter dampers
Manual volume dampers
Motorized volume damper
Fire dampers.
15.6.4 INSULATION
All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier unless otherwise dictated by the project
criteria. Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation
if the surrounding air has a low dew point and condensation will not occur. Return and exhaust air
ductwork may be insulated where condensation may occur when air is routed through unconditioned areas.
15.6.5 FIRE DAMPERS
Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with codes, except in the exhaust systems of laboratory areas.
15.7 Laboratory Fume Hoods
EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall conform to current
EPA requirements. The design professional, in consultation with the users of the facility, shall be
responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the hoods' intended use. The
requirements of this subsection and of Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual shall be followed. Laboratory fume
hoods shall be considered an integral part of the overall building HVAC system and shall be part of the
laboratory mechanical system testing and balancing prior to building acceptance.
15.7.1 LABORATORY CONTROL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Major projects will require the services and review of a qualified engineer with experience of controls
design for laboratory fume hood. The following consideration shall be implemented during new and
existing design process:
Identify any user-specific needs for fume hood lab environmental monitoring.
Identify any specific containment requirements.
Determine the type of fume hood needed to perform operation
Identify if constant (full bypass) or VAV (partial bypass) fume hood controls are to be used.
Confirm satisfactory ASHRAE 110 performance testing of potential fume-hood/control-system
configurations.
Analyze expected laboratory space air flow dynamics to evaluate whether air flow tracking, active
pressurization control or a combination of both is required.
Carefully select the location and type of supply air diffusers. Supply diffusers shall be Titus, Radia
Tec, dome faced radial perforated diffusers or equal.
Determine the failure mode of all terminal boxes to ensure that the lab pressurization criteria are met
under all condition.
Confirm that laboratory temperature control does not override the minimum fume hood driven
ventilation requirements.
Identify all temperature control zones within the lab, and provide sufficient sensors to control each
zone.
Confirm that potential control suppliers have adequate presence and technical depth at the project
location to support the project installation, testing and operation
Additional consideration for existing facilities design process:
15-26
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Analyze total system - air flows, pressures and temperatures.
Select fume hood control type and size.
Alter or re-balance the HVAC system and reset controls to maintain proper air flows and temperatures.
15.7.2 HOOD REQUIREMENTS
EPA fume hoods shall have an ASHRAE performance rating, as manufactured, of 4.0 AM 0.05 and shall
conform to current EPA requirements. Before EPA purchases any hood model, the laboratory fume hood
manufacturer, at a test facility provided by the manufacturer, and at no cost to the Government, shall certify
the proper performance of the fume hood in accordance with the Procedures for Certifying Laboratory
Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards. After the new hoods are installed, EPA requires the manufacturer to
evaluate and certify in a written report that the installation and performance of the hoods complies with
EPA specifications prior to acceptance and use by EPA. This shall occur after the testing and balancing
(TAB) report is approved by AEAMB and SHEMD.
SHEMD is responsible for approving the certification of fume hoods. SHEMD will document the approval
of all newly installed fume hoods for AEAMB. A list of approved or certified hoods is available from
SHEMD.
Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of exhaust blowers shall meet corrosion-resistance
standards for the chemicals used and generated in the hood, as described in the hood uses; blowers should
be rated or otherwise approved for use; and plumbing fixtures and electrical outlets should meet existing
codes. In addition, fume hoods shall meet the following requirements:
Ceiling and wall supply s for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be designed for a
maximum air velocity of 25 fpm at 6 feet above the finished floor at the face of the hood. HVAC
diffusers shall be located so that they do not "short circuit" the airflow to a hood. Supply diffusers
shall be similar or equal to the Titus, Radia Tec, dome faced radial perforated diffuser.
Face Velocities: In accordance with Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA
Standards, the fume hood must be designed for an average face velocity of 100 fpm ฑ10 fpm with sash
80% open with a uniform face velocity profile of ฑ 20% for point measurements in a traverse of the
face opening. SHEMD will consider requests to operate hoods at 80 fpm average face velocity with a
sash opening of 80%. Any request for a lower operating average face velocity should include
information on the performance of the hood at lower operating velocities, the location of the hood and
the type and location of ceiling supply air diffusers. Under no circumstances can the control velocity
be less than 80 fpm at any sash height.
The sash shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height (e.g., releasable
sash stops).
Fume hoods shall be equipped with a low exhaust flow safety alarm system designed to signal unsafe
operating conditions whenever fume hood average face velocity falls below 70 fpm. The alarm system
shall consist of an audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe operating conditions.
Additional specific standard utility and service requirements shall be indicated for each specific
laboratory facility project.
15.7.3 CONSTANT VOLUME BYPASS-TYPE FUME HOOD
The laboratory fume hood is often an integral part of the building exhaust system. The volume of air
exhausted should be constant, achieved by an airflow bypass above the sash through which room air can
pass as the sash is lowered. A horizontal bottom and a vertical side airfoil must be specified and used on all
hoods, and the face edges must be shaped to minimize entering air turbulence. Vertical foils on the sides
also result in a slight airflow improvement by minimizing the eddies caused as air enters the hood. The
15-27
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
work surface should be recessed three-eighths of an inch or more so that spills can be effectively contained.
The front raised edge should extend just past the airfoil but not far enough to be used as a working surface
near the face opening.
The bypass sizing and design must be such that the following conditions are met:
The total airflow volume is essentially the same at all sash positions. As the sash is lowered, the face
velocity increases to a rate that shall not exceed three times the design velocity for a fully open sash
position.
The bypass must provide a barrier between the hood work space and the room when the sash is
lowered.
The bypass opening is dependent only on the operation of the sash. Selected sash configurations are
listed and described below:
The vertical-rising fume hood sash shall be full-view type providing a clear and unobstructed side-to-
side view of the fume hood interior and the service fitting connections. The sash shall be 7/32-inch
laminated safety glass. The sash system shall utilize a single-weight pulley cable counterbalance
system permitting one-finger operation along the length of the sash pull. The counterbalance system
will hold the sash at any position without creep and will prevent sash drop in the event of malfunction
or failure of a cable.
The combination vertical-rising and horizontal-sliding fume hood sash shall be similar in design to the
vertical-rising sash configuration but with multiple horizontal sliding sashes of 7/32-inch laminated
safety glass panels on multiple tracks within the vertical rising sash frame.
While current EPA policy discourages the use of auxiliary air-type hoods in new construction, their use may
be justified under special circumstances, such as in renovations where the existing ventilation system is
inadequate and where expansion of system capacity may be mechanically unfeasible or too costly.
Auxiliary air hoods are hoods that are provided with a source of air in addition to that taken from the room.
It is essential that all air for these hoods be supplied from outside the hood face. Any model that introduces
air behind the sash must not be used, because this arrangement reduces the control velocity at the face and
could actually pressurize the work chamber if the exhaust flow is reduced (e.g., by foreign matter in fan, a
broken belt, or normal wear and maintenance). Features described for the constant-volume bypass-type
hood, including the bypass arrangement, are applicable to the auxiliary air hood. Auxiliary air supplies
must be turned off to test the face velocity of the hood; a readily accessible means of turning off auxiliary
air electrical power will facilitate such testing.
15.7.3 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME (VAV) HOODS
VAV hoods shall be installed as approved by the manufacturer or per the manufacturer's recommendation.
The hood manufacturer, in conjunction with the control manufacturer, shall certify that the hood and
laboratory system operation is as designed. Response times for reestablishing the proper face velocity after
a maximum change in sash position shall not exceed 0.8 seconds. The minimum airflow through a VAV
hood must meet or exceed 25 cfm per square foot of LFH work surface with the sash closed with four room
air changes per hour for an unoccupied laboratory, or must be calculated to limit the accumulation of
volatile vapors within the fume hood to less than 25 percent of their lower flammable limit. The minimum
airflow during occupied hours will be capable of eight room air changes per hour in the laboratory. As an
alternative to relying on minimum airflows for preventing accumulation of vapors, fume hoods, whose
interior may be classified as described in NEC Article 500, and appropriate electric devices and equipment
within the fume hood enclosure may be used. However, the minimum flows still must be capable of
15-28
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
maintaining the laboratories at a negative air pressure relative to adjacent corridors and non-laboratory
spaces. Refer to NFPA 45 for guidance on electrical classification of fume hood enclosures.
15.7.4 RADIOISOTOPE HOODS
Radioisotope hoods shall meet all the requirements of the fume hood types described above, except that the
interior liner material shall have panels at the sides, back, top, and plenum enclosure of 18-gauge Type 302
stainless steel and structural members, reinforcements, and brackets of 16-gauge Type 302 stainless steel.
The work surface should be 14-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. Joints should be fully sealed by welding or
fine-line solder. The base structure should have a heavy angle frame reinforced to support 1 ton of lead
brick shielding. The work surface shall be reinforced from the underside with heavy steel grating to provide
the necessary strength for holding lead brick radiation-protection and/or shall be capable of supporting at
least 200 pounds per square foot. To minimize radioactive emissions into the atmosphere, high-efficiency
particulate aerosol (HEPA) filters should be considered as a best available control technology for
radioactive isotope hoods. Guidance on the limitations, selection, and design of radioactive air-cleaning
devices can be found in the Nuclear Air Cleaning Handbook, Energy Research and Development
Administration (ERDA) 76-21, and in Nuclear Power Plant Air Cleaning Units and Components,
ANSI/ASME N509.
15.7.5 PERCHLORIC ACID FUME HOODS
In addition to the features described for fume hoods, perchloric acid hoods must use materials that are
nonreactive, acid resistant, and relatively impervious. Type 316 stainless steel with welded joints should be
specified, although certain other materials may be acceptable. Corners shall be rounded to facilitate
cleaning. Work surfaces shall be watertight with an integral trough at the rear for collection of wash-down
water.
Perchloric acid fume hoods shall be constant-volume bypass or VAV type with an average face velocity
of 100 fpm +/- 10 FPM with sash 80% open.
A wash-down system must be provided that has spray nozzles to adequately wash the entire assembly
including the stack, blower, all ductwork, and the interior of the hood, with an easily accessible strainer
to filter particulates in the water supply that might clog the nozzles. The wash-down system shall be
activated immediately after the hood has been used.
All welded ductwork shall be installed with a minimal amount of horizontal runs and no sharp turns;
ductwork also must not be shared with any other hood.
Exhaust fans must be of an acid-resistant, non-sparking (AMCA Standard Type A) construction.
Lubrication shall be with fluorocarbon grease only. Gaskets shall be of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer.
Perchloric acid must never be used in hoods not specifically designed for its use. Organic materials,
strong dehydrating or desiccating agents, and oxidizing or reducing materials must not be used in a
hood used for perchloric acid.
15.7.6 SPECIAL PURPOSE HOODS
Special purpose hoods are defined as any hood that does not conform to the specific types described above
in this subsection. Special hoods may be used for operations for which other types are not suitable (e.g., as
enclosures for analytical balances, gas vents from atomic absorption, or gas chromatography units). Other
applications might present opportunities for achieving contamination control with less bench space or less
exhaust volume (e.g., using the hoods as special mixing stations, sinks, evaporation racks, heat sources, and
ventilated worktables). Special purpose exhaust hoods shall be designed in accordance with ANSI A9.2
and NFPA 45. Appropriate applications for specific types of special purpose hoods are described below.
15-29
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Canopy Exhaust (Capture) Hoods: These shall be provided as required for the removal of heat from
specific laboratory apparatus, such as furnaces, ovens, and sterilizers, or as otherwise called for in the
laboratory program. Refer to ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation for requirements and specifications for
canopy hoods.
Flexible Spot Exhausts (Snorkels): These shall be required to remove chemical fumes or heat from
specific laboratory instrumentation, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), gas
chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS), and atomic absorption (AA) units. Snorkels require an
estimated exhaust rate of 100 to 200 cfm or a rate appropriate to the intended use.
Gas Cabinets: Special exhaust cabinets will be required to house individual or pairs of
toxic/pyrophoric gas cylinders. Leak detectors and low-exhaust flow alarms, as well as a gas purge
system, shall be considered to provide for safe exchange of cylinders. Exhaust for these cabinets is
estimated at 50 to 75 cfm each.
15.7.7 HORIZONTAL SASHES
Horizontal sashes, as well as other nonstandard features (larger-than-usual opening in distillation hoods,
vented sinks, hoods larger than 6 feet), may be used under the following conditions. (It should be noted that
horizontal sashes may put additional demands on VAV performance.)
A conventional hood does not meet the specific requirements of the user (this should be reflected in the
standard operating procedures).
The hood is used as intended by the manufacturer (i.e., the hood is not altered after installation).
The hood passes the pre-purchase performance test.
15.7.8 NOISE
The noise exposure at the working position in front of the hood shall not exceed 70 dBa with the system
operating and the sash open, nor shall it exceed 55 dBA at benchtop level elsewhere in the laboratory room.
Each new hood installation shall be certified as meeting this requirement before initial use and shall be
recertified annually thereafter. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed the
limits specified in 29 CFRง1910.95.
15.7.9 EXHAUST SYSTEM
Individual exhaust systems should be provided for each fume hood when the mixing of effluents from the
individual hoods is inadvisable or when the effluent must be filtered, scrubbed, washed down, or otherwise
treated before discharge. Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent
areas. Blowers should be rated and should be installed at the end of each duct system so that all ducts
within the occupied areas of a building are maintained under negative pressure. Hood exhaust should be
designed in accordance with the recommendations in ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation, ANSI Z9.5, and
NFPA 45.
Fume hoods and general laboratory exhaust shall be routed to a stack discharge point at the highest area of
the building roof line and shall be positioned to prevent entrainment of fumes at fresh air intake points.
Fume hood exhaust stacks shall be constructed without caps or heads. Exhaust stacks should extend a
minimum of 10 feet above the adjacent roof level and operate at a minimum of 3,000 fpm exhaust discharge
velocity. The exhaust velocity may be lower than 3,000 fpm and the stack height lower than 10 feet if
proven to prevent entrainment through performance of site atmospheric air flow characteristics and exhaust
stack dispersion performance analyses as recommended in 1999 ASHRAE Application Handbook.
15-30
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.7.9.1 MANIFOLDING OF FUME HOODS
Manifolding of fume hood exhausts is allowed if a single discharge point is advantageous, and the air
supply suitably controls comfort conditions while maintaining proper laboratory pressure. Manifolded
exhaust systems should incorporate staged, multiple constant volume fans with control dampers to
maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold in order to ensure quick response to changing hood
conditions. Variable-speed fans are permitted if they are advantageous. In order for manifolded fume
hoods to be safe, sufficient dilution of air within the ductwork must be maintained to avoid significant
chemical reactions that may result in fire, corrosion, deposition, and/or increased toxicity. Low
airflows afforded by VAV may increase the potential for significant reaction. Manifolding of fume
hoods shall meet the requirements of NFPA 45.
Fume hoods, biological safety cabinets, and general laboratory exhaust may be combined in a
commonly manifolded exhaust duct system for blocks of hoods; however, such combined systems
require the prior approval of SHEMD. Provisions should be made for separate, dedicated duct and
exhaust systems for special fume hood exhausts, including, but not limited to, perchloric acid hoods,
high-energy radioisotope hoods, and exhausted biological safety cabinets, that cannot be combined in a
commonly manifolded system. Hoods used for dissimilar purposes or hoods that are far apart from
each other should not be manifolded.
15.7.10 EFFLUENT CLEANING
When air-cleaning devices are required, the type is determined by the contaminant and the degree of
cleaning necessary. The type of air cleaner required can vary from a simple scrubber and filters to
incinerators or specially designed units. All cleaning systems must be approved by AEAMB and SHEMD
A typical cleaning system consists of a prefilter, followed by a solvent-resistant HEPA filter, followed by an
activated-charcoal filter. It is good practice to install a prefilter ahead of a HEPA filter to prolong the life
of the HEPA filter. In some situations, bag-in/bag-out filter housings should be used to minimize the spread
of contaminants when the HEPA or prefilter is changed. It is recommended that a compensating damper be
installed with a HEPA filter so that the airflow will remain constant over the life of the filter. The resistance
of HEPA filters to airflow, especially when airflow is loaded with contaminants, must be considered in
designing a system with HEPA filters. The pressure drop across HEPA and prefilters should be monitored
and alarmed, and filters changed when necessary. The filter plenum should be located on the inlet side of
the fan to allow the fan to be serviced from the clean side of a filter. It is good practice to allow a straight
run of 4 duct lengths before and after the fan in order to obtain good fan performance as well as to allow for
future installation of other air-cleaning equipment.
15.8 Other Ventilated Enclosures
Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate heat and ensure containment of
chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work. These types of enclosures
have special design requirements for their intended uses. Ventilated devices used to control hazardous
materials must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEAMB. Ventilating devices used for removal of
heat or nuisance odors must comply with the parameters set forth in ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.
15.8.1 GLOVE BOXES
Glove boxes are often required by laboratory personnel to ensure containment of chemical and biological
airborne contaminants produced during the employee's work in the box and to prevent escape of those
contaminants into the room. Such enclosures permit manual manipulations within the box by means of
armholes provided with impervious gloves, which are sealed to the box at the armholes. These types of
enclosures shall comply with NSF Standard 49.
15-31
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.8.2 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
Laminar-flow biological safety cabinets shall meet minimum standards for cabinet classifications in NSF 49
for personnel, environmental, and product safety and shall be listed and identified by a distinctive NSF seal.
Field recertification, performed by an NSF 49 listed competent technician and done according to the
procedures outlined in NSF 49, will be required once the cabinet(s) is installed. Cabinet classification shall
be determined during laboratory programming, in consultation with the users of the facility. These types of
cabinets have special design requirements depending on their intended use (such as protecting personnel
from harmful agents inside the cabinet; protecting the work product, experiment, or procedure from
contaminants outside the cabinet; or protecting the laboratory environment from contaminants inside the
cabinet) established by the end user and listed in the design criteria/POR.
15.8.3 FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE CABINETS
Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class II, and Class IIIA liquids shall be provided in accordance with the
design, construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA 30, Chapter 4. Venting of storage
cabinets is not required for fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to comply with local codes
or authorities having jurisdiction. Nonvented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs supplied with the
cabinet or with bungs specified by the manufacturer of the cabinet.
If cabinet venting is required, the cabinet shall be mechanically vented to the outside in accordance with
requirements of NFPA 30, Chap. 4 listed below:
Both metal bungs must be removed and replaced with flash arrester screens (normally provided with
cabinets). The top opening will serve as the fresh air inlet.
The bottom opening must be connected to an exhaust fan by a substantial metal tubing having an inside
diameter no smaller than the vent. The tubing should be rigid steel.
The fan should have a non-sparking fan blade and non-sparking shroud.
The cabinet shall exhaust directly to the outside (the cabinet shall not be vented through the fume hood)
The total run of exhaust duct should not exceed 25 ft (17.6 meters).
The design velocity of the duct should not be less than 2,000 fpm per Table 3-2, Industrial Ventilation,
22nd Edition.
The cabinets shall be marked in conspicuous lettering "Flammable - Keep Fire Away. "
15.9 Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems
15.9.1 DRY FILTRATION
Air filters for ductwork and equipment installation shall be easily removable, serviceable, and maintainable.
Air filters shall have face velocities as recommended by the filter manufacturer in order to achieve the
specified efficiency at the lowest possible pressure drop. Filters shall be constructed of noncombustible
materials that meet the requirements of UL 900, Class I. Air filters shall be located on the suction side of
fans and coils and in other special locations as required for air treatment. Air-filter pressure drop gauges of
the diaphragm-actuated dial type (preferred) or the inclined manometer type shall be located on all filter
assemblies except small fan coils and fan-powered VAV terminal units. The ASHRAE dust spot method
shall be used in specifying the efficiencies required for medium-efficiency filters. Filters shall be specified,
and installed for use, as prefilters, medium-efficiency filters, or high-efficiency filters.
15.9.2 ABSOLUTE FILTRATION
Absolute filtration, where required in fume hood exhaust systems, will have an efficiency of 99.97 percent,
as determined by the dioctyl phthalate (DOP) aerosol test for absolute filters and shall satisfy ASHRAE 52-
76.
15-32
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.9.2.1 TEST ACCESS
The test access location shall facilitate in-place testing of HEPA filters, with particular attention given
to plenum hardware that allows the HEPA filter bank to be tested without requiring the testing
personnel to enter the plenum. Utility services shall be extended to the plenum location (e.g., electrical
receptacles and compressed air) to facilitate testing work. In-place testing design requirements shall
meet all the recommendations of UL 586 and ASME N510. HEPA filtration systems shall be designed
with prefilters installed upstream of HEPA filters to extend the HEPA filter's life. The installation of
prefilters may be omitted if an analysis of filtration requirements and consideration of the filter
assembly justify omission.
15.9.2.2 FIRE PROTECTION OF HEPA FILTER ASSEMBLIES
In providing fire protection for the HEPA filters, the design shall sufficiently separate prefilters or fire
screens equipped with water spray from the HEPA filters in order to restrict impingement of moisture
on the HEPA filters. Under conditions of limited separation, moisture eliminators or other means of
reducing entrained moisture shall be provided. Moisture eliminators may be omitted where system
design provides sufficient filter redundancy to ensure continued effluent filtration in the event of fire
within any portion of the system. The HEPA filter fire protection system shall be activated in a manner
consistent with the fire protection system in the room or building in which the filters are located.
15.9.3 AIR-CLEANING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Filters include dry-type dust collectors, wet collectors, centrifugal collectors, absorbers, oxidizers, and
chemical treatment filters, which are used primarily in industrial and process-type applications associated
with air or gases that have heavy dust loadings in exhaust systems or stack gas effluents. Filters shall be
designed according to the requirements given in the project criteria, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
Systems and Equipment and ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.
15.9.4 OPERATION
All building systems shall be designed for continuous operation, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, unless
otherwise specified in the project criteria. Additionally, night and weekend set backs are required.
15.9.5 MAINTENANCE ACCESS
The air supply and exhaust plenums shall be designed so that such elements as motors, bearings, control
valves, and steam traps are easily accessible for maintenance.
15.9.6 LOCATION OF AIR INTAKE
The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building
and shall be so placed, relative to the building's exhausts and vent stacks, as to prevent entrainment of
contaminated air from outside sources, including, but not limited to, fume hood exhaust, vehicle exhaust,
exhaust from adjacent structures, and sources of potential microbial contamination, such as vegetation,
organic matter, and bird and animal droppings. Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air
intakes toward the loading dock area. Idling trucks located in loading dock areas may cause contamination
of intake air. For security reasons, air intakes must be located in accordance with "Guidance for Protecting
Building Environments from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks" DHHS (NIOSH)
Publication 2002-139, May 2002.
15.9.7 AIR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS STUDY
The location and design of the exhaust stacks as well as the fresh-air intakes to avoid adverse air quality
impacts shall be based on criteria developed by a study of prevailing wind patterns utilizing recognized
wind modeling technology, such as the EPA Industrial Source Complex Model (ISC3) utilizing Briggs
plume rise equations, and the design criteria of Chapter 16 of the 2001 ASHRAE Handbook, and Chapter
44 of the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook, as applicable. In addition, the study should take into consideration
15-33
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
recommendations of Sect. 5.16, Exhaust Stack Outlets, including Figures 5-29 and 5-30, of Industrial
Ventilation, 22nd Edition, as applicable.
15.10 Plumbing
15.10.1 GENERAL
The criteria in this section apply to plumbing systems (fixtures, supply piping, drain, waste and vent piping,
service water heating system, safety devices, and appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet beyond
the building exterior wall. Plumbing shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) or
local plumbing code, the ASHRAE handbooks, and ASHRAE standard 90. Access panels shall be provided
where maintenance or replacement of equipment, valves, or other devices is necessary.
15.10.2 WATER SUPPLY
Type K copper tubing shall be used below grade. Type L copper tubing shall be used above grade.
Polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe and tubing may be used in lieu of copper tubing above grade where not
subject to impact damage or otherwise prohibited by the project criteria. For new systems, domestic water
shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a combined fire protection and potable-water service
or a combined process water and potable-water system within the building.
Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for
Type L tubing shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing shall
be solvent-cemented or shall use Schedule 80 threaded. No lead solder shall be used for copper pipe in
potable-water systems.
Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches
serving floors, fixture batteries for isolation, or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also
shall be provided to isolate equipment, valves, and appurtenances for ease of maintenance.
Accessible drain valves shall be provided to drain the entire system. Manual air vents shall be
provided at high points in the system.
Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction cause piping systems
to move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the piping system
as laid out, by loops, by manufactured expansion joints, or by couplings.
Accessible manufactured water hammer arresters shall be provided. Dielectric connections shall be
made between ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe.
Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be
provided to protect against differential settlement or seismic activity, in accordance with the NSPC and
NFPA 13, respectively.
15.10.2.1 METERING
All incoming water to an EPA facility shall be directly metered so that the total facility water
consumption is measured and known. Facility subsystems, such as cooling towers and reverse osmosis
equipment, that may consume a significant (10 percent or more) portion of the facility water intake,
based on engineering calculation or estimate, shall be equipped with flow-totalizing sub-meters.
Meters and sub-meters shall be calibrated and maintained according to the manufacturer's
specifications. Total metered and sub-metered water consumption shall be recorded and tracked at
least monthly in a manner that allows facility operating personnel to identify and resolve any unusual or
unexpected consumption.
15-34
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.2.2 LEAD IN POTABLE WATER
Potable water systems components, such as piping, valves, fittings, drinking fountains, and fixtures,
shall conform with requirements of the EPA National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (NPDWR)
for lead and copper, 40 CFR Parts 141 and 143. Components shall not be incorporated unless bearing
the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 mark signifying compliance with NPDWR
requirements. Upon substantial completion of the building, the potable water system within the
building as well as the potable water supply main shall be tested for lead content in accordance with
EPA Publication entitled "Lead in Drinking Water in Schools and Residential Buildings," EPA 812-B-
94-002, April 1994. Testing of the building potable water system and the potable water supply main
shall be coordinated with the local water company as well as the state environmental protection agency.
15.10.2.3 STERILIZATION
New supply systems or existing supply systems that have undergone rehabilitation will require
sterilization in accordance with American Waterworks Association (AWWA) C652, AWWA C5186,
or the local governing plumbing code.
15.10.3 DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES
Underground lines that do not service laboratory areas shall be service-weight cast-iron soil pipe hub-type
(with gasket); hubless cast-iron soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible. Aboveground
(above grade) lines that are !1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hubless or hub-type (with
gasket) service-weight cast-iron pipe. Lines that are !1/2 inches through 6 inches in diameter may be
acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe where allowed by the project criteria. Pipe and fittings shall be
joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals. Lines that are less than !1/2 inches in diameter shall be either
(1) Type L copper with solder-type bronze fittings or wrought copper fittings or (2) galvanized steel with
galvanized malleable iron recessed threaded and coupled fittings. Cast-iron soil pipe fittings and
connections shall comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) guidelines. Provisions for expansion
shall be included, as above.
Underground lines servicing the laboratory area shall be acid-resistant sewer pipe ANSI/ASTM D-2146-69;
polyethylene plastic pipe and fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM D-1785; PVC plastic pipe, Schedule 80 and 120,
ASTM D-2241; PVC plastic pipe (SDR-PR), ASTM D-2683; polypropylene fusion welded pipes, Schedule
80, and approved equal products; or socket-type polyethylene fittings for outside diameter-controlled
polyethylene pipe. They shall be welded together following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS)
Dl.l, structural welding code; ASTM D-2241; and ASTM D-2855.
15.10.3.1 TRAP SEAL PROTECTION
A trap primer valve and floor/funnel drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall be used
where there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps.
15.10.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure-zone type shall be provided on any domestic water and fire
protection lines serving the building. All domestic water lines shall be provided with water hammer
suppressors and vacuum breakers at high points of supply lines or at the fixture.
15.10.5 SAFETY DEVICES
Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe pressure-balance type. Hot-water generation equipment shall be
provided with ASME code-stamped tanks, when of sufficient capacity, water temperature, or hot input rate
to be within the jurisdiction of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Approved pressure-relief
devices, such as combination temperature-pressure or separate units, depending on the application, shall be
provided. Backflow preventers and air gaps shall be used to prevent cross-connection (contamination) of
potable-water supplies. Vacuum breakers (to prevent back-siphonage) shall be used only in conjunction
with administrative controls.
15-35
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.5.1 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the
normal operating range recommended by the manufacturer. Wherever a pressure-reducing valve's
failure may cause equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-re lief valve shall be provided
downstream of the reducing valve.
15.10.6 LABORATORY SAFETY DEVICES
Eye and face washing equipment and safety showers must be provided for every laboratory and laboratory
support room where chemicals are being utilized, or stored, in accordance with the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Z358.1. The location and installation of emergency showers and
eyewash equipment shall be in accordance with the Safety Manual. Discharge from emergency showers or
eyewashes should not impinge on powered electrical equipment. Safety equipment must meet ADA
accessibility requirements.
15.10.6.1 EMERGENCY EYEWASH UNITS
Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety shower units shall be provided in all work
areas where, during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual
may come into contact with a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue
damage, or that is toxic by absorption. At least one eyewash, initiated by a single action, shall be
provided within every laboratory, or for every two laboratory modules. Eyewash units shall be
designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously and to provide hands-free operation.
The eyewash units chosen should provide protection of the nozzle area with pop-off covers, and other
protective features to prevent contamination of the flushing system. Design, operation, flow, water
temperature, and similar characteristics shallmeet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1998. Water for the
units shall be supplied by the potable-water system. The temperature of flushing fluid for the
emergency units shall be tepid, 60-95 ฐF. Emergency eyewash units shall be provided with sanitary
drains.
Eyewash units shall be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach. Their
location in all laboratory spaces shall be standardized as much as possible. Units shall be placed in a
location away from potential sources of hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and near the exit door. The location
shall be well lighted and shall be clearly identified with a highly visible sign. Final location shall be
approved by the EPA project officer during the design phase.
15.10.6.2 EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWERS
Emergency safety shower units shall be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during
foreseeable emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive,
severely irritating to the skin, or toxic by skin absorption. Each safety shower unit shall be equipped
with an installed flexible hand-held drench hose with a spray head like that used in hand-held eyewash
units; this shall be mounted on a rack. All piping for the emergency safety showers shall be above the
ceiling except for the shower head and the pull bar connection. Design, operation, flow rates, and
similar characteristics shallmeet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1998. Water for shower units shall be
supplied by the potable water system. The temperature of flushing fluid for the emergency units shall
be tepid, 60-95 ฐF. Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and should
extend to within 54 inches of the floor. The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be
textured, well lighted, identified with a highly visible sign, and maintained free of items that obstruct its
use. A water flow alarm shall sound when the safety shower is activated.
Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much as possible. Emergency safety showers in
laboratories shall be located at the room entrance on the right-hand side of the exit door (hinge side);
instrument laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have showers located in the corridor at the
pull side of the room door. Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations that require no
15-36
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
more than 10 seconds to reach from hazard locations, preferably inside or just outside the door of each
laboratory work area. Safety showers should be no more than 50 feet travel distance from the hazard
source. Refer to Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual for additional information.
15.10.7 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets and shall be
compatible with their intended use. All service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be of cast brass with a
minimum copper content of 85 percent, except for items that are to be brass-forged or bar stock. All service
valves, fittings, and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use. All laboratory service
fittings shall have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating applied over a clean, polished,
chrome-plated surface. Service fittings at fume hoods shall have an acid-resistant and solvent-resistant
plastic coating applied over a fine sandblasted surface, properly cleaned.
15.10.8 GLASSWARE WASHING SINKS
Sinks dedicated to the purpose of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot with
a swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a
hand-held sprayer whose weight is supported for ease of operation. All glassware washing sinks shall be
ventilated at a rate of 280 to 300 cfm with an exhaust air duct connection at the top of the sink below the
bench top.
15.10.9 CENTRALIZED LABORATORY WATER SYSTEMS
The following requirements apply to laboratory water systems.
15.10.9.1 DEIONIZED WATER (DI) SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, the central deionized water system shall have a
resistivity of greater than 10 megaohms at the tap in each laboratory. This system may be a centralized
system or several decentralized systems depending on the requirements of the specific laboratory
facility. Water quality shall conform to ASTM Type I requirements for reagent-quality water and to
American Pharmaceutical Association (APhA) requirements for water used in microbiological testing.
Type I water is typically prepared by reverse osmosis, then polishing it with mixed-bed deionizers and
passing it through a 0.2-micron membrane filter. Pipes and fittings for the DI system shall be
polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) schedule 80 or unpigmented polypropylene. A bypass or drain legs
shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to avoid stagnation of water at the branch
pipes during extended periods of non-use.
15.10.9.2 HOT AND COLD WATER, POTABLE
The laboratory potable-water supply shall be piped in Type K or Type L copper. Only potable water
shall be used for emergency eyewash units and emergency showers.
15.10.9.3 INDUSTRIAL HOT AND COLD WATER, NONPOTABLE
The laboratory nonpotable-water supply, identified as industrial hot/cold water, shall be piped in Type
K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable
water system from the potable-water system. Hot-water supply shall be insulated, and hot water shall
be recirculated to conserve energy.
15.10.9.4 CULTURE WATER SYSTEM
Culture water system piping shall be of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no
metal in contact with the water. The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene.
Transfer pumps shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene.
15-37
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.10.9.5 METERS
Special centralized laboratory water supply systems, such as deionized water, reverse osmosis water, or
culture water systems shall be equipped with flow totalizing meters that measure total water
consumption.
15.10.9.6 SIZING
Systems shall be sized to meet the needs of the facility. Designs should accommodate anticipated
future growth through the ability to add modular additional capacity, rather than by providing initial
overcapacity.
15.10.10 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
At least one drinking fountain shall be provided on each block of space so that no person will have to travel
more than 150 feet to reach it. Self-contained mechanically refrigerated coolers shall be provided wherever
a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ARI 1010. Electrical equipment shallbe UL
listed. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled using lead solder, and all components must bear the
marking NSF 61 indicating the components are free of lead. All drinking fountains and locations for
drinking fountains shall comply with ADA.
15.10.11 TOILET FACILITIES
Separate toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided. The facilities must be located so that
employees will not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach them. The toilet rooms' hot water should be
set at 105 ฐF, or as required by the project criteria. Water closets and urinals shall not be visible when the
toilet room entry door is open. All public toilet rooms shall be located along an accessible path of travel;
must have accessible fixtures, accessories, and doors and adequate maneuvering clearances; and shall meet
UFAS and ADA requirements.
15.10.11.1 TOILET SCHEDULE
Unless otherwise specified by EPA, each toilet room shall have a minimum of two for each men's toilet
room and a minimum of four for each women's toilet room, enclosed with modern stall partitions and
doors. Each men's toilet room should also have at least two urinals. The number of water closets in
each women's toilet room shall be no less than the sum of water closets plus urinals of the adjacent
men's toilet room. The number of water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall comply with all state and
local codes and with project criteria. If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and
local codes, the more stringent shall apply unless otherwise directed by the contracting officer.
15.10.11.2 ACCESSORIES
Each main toilet room shall contain:
A soap dispenser, shelf, and mirror above the lavatory
A toilet paper dispenser in each water closet stall
A coat hook on the inside face of each water closet stall door and on the wall immediately inside
the door of the toilet room.
At least one modern paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle for every two lavatories
A coin-operated sanitary napkin dispenser in women's toilet rooms
Ceramic tile or comparable wainscot from the floor to a minimum height of 4 feet 6 inches
A disposable toilet-seat-cover dispenser
A convenience electrical outlet located adjacent to one mirror in each toilet room
A small covered container located inside each water closet partition enclosure in the women's
toilet room for the disposal of used sanitary napkins
Toilet partitions made of recycled material.
15-38
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
The toilet room shall have at least one towel rack, towel dispenser, and other dispensers and disposal
units mounted no higher than 48 inches from the floor, or 54 inches if a person in a wheelchair has to
approach it from the side. One mirror with shelf shall be provided above the lavatory at as low a height
as possible and no higher than 40 inches above the floor, measured from the top of the shelf and the
bottom of the mirror. A common mirror provided for both the able and the disabled must provide a
convenient view for both.
15.10.11.3 TOILET STALL ACCESSIBILITY
All toilet rooms designated for public access shall have one toilet stall that:
Is 60 inches wide.
Has a minimum depth of 56 inches when wall-mounted toilets are used or 59 inches when floor-
mounted sets are used.
Has a clear floor area.
Has a door that is 32 inches wide and swings out.
Has handrails on each side (front-transfer stall) or on the side and back (side-transfer stall).
Handrails shall be 33 to 36 inches high and parallel to the floor, shall be 1 to !1/2 inches in outside
diameter, shall have !1/2 inches of clearance between rail and wall, and shall be fastened securely
at ends and center. Handrails shall have no sharp edges and must permit the continuous sliding of
hands.
Has a water closet mounted at a height of 17 to 19 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the
seat. Hand-operated or automatic flush controls shall be mounted no higher than 44 inches above
the floor.
A toilet stall measuring 36 or 48 inches wide by 66 inches, but preferably 72 inches, deep may be
acceptable, as determined by EPA.
15.10.11.4 LAVATORY ACCESSIBILITY
At least one lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance of 29 inches from the floor to the top of the
bottom of the apron. The height from the floor to the top of the lavatory rim shall not exceed 34
inches. Faucets shall be lever operated, push type, or electronically activated for one-hand operation
without the need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must
be covered, insulated, or recessed far enough so that individuals in wheelchairs who are without
sensation will not burn themselves.
15.10.11.5 URINAL ACCESSIBILITY
Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-mounted urinals with elongated lips, with the basin opening no
more than 17 inches above the floor. Accessible floor-mounted stall urinals with basins at the level of
the floor are acceptable.
15.10.11.6 WATER-CONSERVING WATER CLOSETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
Flow control devices shall be installed (unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria) on all water
closets, sinks, and lavatories. Devices shall limit water closet flow to 1.6 gallons per flush, urinals to
1.0 gallon per minute, and regular lavatories to 1.5 gallons per minute. New lavatory faucets shall be
equipped with automatic, sensor-operated shut-off valves. Automatic sensors shall be adjusted and
maintained according to the manufacturer's specifications. Waterless urinals shall be considered
whenever new facilities are built or renovations are made to an existing site.
15.10.12 SHOWER STALLS
Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, shower head, separate hot-
and cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain. Shower stalls shall also
15-39
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
provide a small change area with lockers. Emergency shower deluge heads shall not be used in regular
shower stalls. Shower stalls shall conform with requirements of ADA and/or UFAS, as applicable.
15.10.13 HOSE BIBBS
Three-quarter-inch hose bibbs should be provided on exterior walls of the building(s), 30 inches above
grade. At least one hose bibb shall be installed on each wall. When an exterior wall exceeds 75 feet in
length, additional bibbs shall be installed so that distance between bibbs does not exceed 75 feet.
Depending on the geographical location of the facility, the design professional shall use freeze-proof hose
bibbs.
15.10.14 WATER CONSERVATION ELEMENTS AND TECHNIQUES
All significant water-using processes should be evaluated using the pollution prevention hierarchy of
reduce, recycle, and reuse. Water use reduction should be considered as the first alternative. Each system
shall be designed and operated in a manner that uses the minimum amount of water practicable. Within a
system, water shall be recycled to the maximum degree practicable, prior to discharge. Water discharged
from processes that require high quality water shall be considered for reuse in systems where the residual
quality is sufficient for proper operation.
15.10.15 SINGLE PASS COOLING
Use of potable water for single pass cooling is prohibited. Acceptable replacements for single pass cooling
are recirculated chilled water loops or point of use chillers.
15.11 Acid Neutralization System
All nonsanitary laboratory wastewaters are required to pass through an acid neutralization system to control
pH as well as other chemical and/or material constituents, before discharging into a local publicly owned
treatment works (POTW). The system shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 40 CFR 403.5,
National Pretreatment Standard Prohibited Discharges, the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
System (NPDES), and the local POTW. The system shall have the capability of automatic, continuous
monitoring and recording of wastewater discharge flow, pH, and other constituents to conform with POTW
requirements. System components shall be accessible for monitoring, sampling, and maintenance. In
addition, the system shall be provided with emergency power and an audible and visual alarm to alert staff
in event of non-conforming discharges.
15.12 Laboratory Gases and Process Piping Systems
15.12.1 NONFLAMMABLE AND FLAMMABLE GAS SYSTEMS
Systems for flammable and nonflammable gas must meet the following requirements.
15.12.1.1 GENERAL
Special gas services for flammable and nonflammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories
requiring their use. Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with NFPA 45, Fire Protection for
Laboratories Using Chemicals', NFPA 50A, Gaseous Hydrogen at Consumer Sites; NFPA SOB,
Liquified Hydrogen at Consumer Sites', NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code; and NFPA 55,
Compressed and Liquefied Gases in Portable Cylinders, as applicable. In situations not covered by
NFPA code, the Compressed Gas Association (CGA) shall be consulted for guidance. No piping from
any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit corridors.
Gas cylinders for nonflammable gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded from a
remotely located space that is central to the laboratory areas and served by and accessible from the
15-40
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
main storeroom or loading and receiving dock area. This space shall be designed and ventilated in
accordance with code requirements.
Flammable-gas cylinders shall be provided at the point of use only and shall be housed in
ventilated cabinet enclosures mechanically ventilated to atmosphere with leak detection and alarm-
monitoring devices.
15.12.1.2 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a seamless-copper-piping gas distribution
system for nonflammable gases shall be provided to all designated laboratories. Ideally, the length of
the gas distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet to avoid the necessity for pipe joints. If pipe joints
are required due to line length, prior approval by EPA is required. The process piping contractor shall
propose proper sleeving. Regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required to furnish gas at the
required pressures shall be provided. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the
gas from the cylinders(s) to the point of application. The number and type of gas outlets in each room
are indicated in the room data sheets. Exact and final outlet location in each laboratory must be
approved by EPA during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual
room cutoff.
15.12.1.3 DISTRIBUTION TO METALS LABORATORIES
For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a seamless Teflon-piping gas-distribution system shall be
provided. The lines shall be placed inside larger PVC pipes and vented to the outside of the building.
Each line in this system shall be equipped at both ends with regulator valves and other auxiliary
equipment required to furnish gas at required pressures. Gas-distribution systems other than Teflon
may be utilized if approved by EPA. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the
gas from the cylinder(s) to the point of use.
15.12.1.4 BOTTLE GAS SUPPLY
The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic changeover valves
and controls. For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the
laboratories. Rooms may be clustered in the panel as long as the distance between the point of use and
the panel does not exceed 75 feet.
When toxic or explosive gases are used in a confined space, a multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system
shall be provided to monitor concentration of the gases within this space. This system shall consist of
gas sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a microprocessor-based monitoring-and-alarm control panel. The
number and type of sensors/ transmitters shall depend on the specific application. Each
sensor/transmitter shall transmit a frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and shall have
a special amplifier to eliminate the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be
capable of monitoring, and providing an alarm on, different types of gases in different zones; the panel
shall have an audible and a visible alarm. The control panel shall also have a factory-wired terminal
strip to interface with the energy management system for remote monitoring and alarms.
15.12.1.5 LIQUID NITROGEN AND LIQUID ARGON
Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form. Insulation in the
delivery system must be sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The gas distribution
room for these two gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the gases are
usedpreferably adjacent to them. This gas distribution room shall also be directly accessible from the
outside of the building without use of the laboratory corridors. One large tank for each gas shall be
provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the room. The tanks shall be outfitted with necessary
valves and controls, as required by the gas supplier.
15-41
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.12.1.6 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each laboratory must have a natural gas distribution
system.
15.12.1.7 TESTING AND PURGING
Before acceptance, the distribution system must be pressure tested and purged. The required level of
purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
purging.
15.12.2 COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
When compressed-air systems are required, these systems should have oil and water traps, a dryer, and all
controls. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed-air system shall have duplex
compressors (one redundant) with an automatic lead/lag switch and a single compressor tank. Compressed-
air systems for processes shall be completely independent of the compressed-air system for the HVAC
controls. The compressed-air system shall provide a water trap and pressure regulation at each laboratory.
An audible alarm and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure. Air
compressors shall use vibration pads and springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound
generated by compressors. Further, compressor location should minimize transmission of vibration and
sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.
15.12.3 VACUUM SYSTEMS
When a laboratory vacuum system is required, it shall be composed of several vacuum pumps capable of
evacuating air at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria. Storage
volume and number of pumps shall be determined at the design stage as needed to meet laboratory
benchwork requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have
duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch, and a single tank. An audible alarm and remote annunciation
shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum. Vacuum pumps shall use vibration pads and
springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound generated by the pumps. Further, pump
location should minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the pumps
service.
15.13 Testing and Balancing
15.13.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
An independent air balance and testing agency that specializes in the balancing and testing of HVAC
systems shall be used to balance, adjust, and test air-moving equipment and the air distribution system,
water system, gas system, and compressed air-piping systems, as applicable. The independent contractor
shall be an organization (1) whose specialty is testing and balancing environmental systems, (2) that is a
member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(NEBB), and (3) that has satisfactorily balanced at least three systems whose type and size are comparable
to those of this project. The independent testing and balancing contractor shall be registered in the state in
which the project is located.
15.13.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The testing and balancing (TAB) work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following
items:
All air-conditioning supply and return systems
Air exhaust systems
15-42
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Laboratory fume hood (LFH) supply and exhaust systems (including certification and performance
testing of the laboratory fume hoods in accordance with EPA Procedure for Certifying Laboratory
Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards)
All hydronic systems
Gas and compressed-air systems.
15.13.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
The TAB procedures shall be in accordance with those prescribed by AABC or NEBB. The certification of
the newly installed laboratory fume hoods requires use of test methods described in the ANSI/ASHRAE
110 "Method of Testing Performance Laboratory Fume Hoods" and the Scientific Equipment & Furniture
Association, "Laboratory Fume Hoods Recommended Practices." The tests are modified to meet EPA
standards and include:
Measurement of cross draft velocities using a velocity anemometer located with the tip of the probe
approximately 12 to 18 inches in front of the hood. Cross draft velocities should be measured parallel
and perpendicular to hood face opening in front of the left, center and right sides of the hood.
Measurement efface velocity with the vertical sash open 100 percent, 80 percent (design opening and
height of mechanical sash stop) and vertical 6 inches open. The grid velocity measurements must be
made using a velocity anemometer. Each grid velocity measurement should be recorded as the average
velocity over a minimum of 10 seconds or ten readings per grid location.
Smoke Visualization Tests at the 80% design sash opening. The smoke tests must include a low
volume challenge and a high volume challenge.
VAV Tests that measure flow response and stability in response to sash movements between 6 inches
open and 80% open. The VAV tests are conducted by measuring face velocity or slot velocity in the
baffle (variations in face velocity greater than 10 percent requires slot velocity measurement). A data
logger is required to record face velocity data at a rate of at least 1 sample per second. The VAV tests
consist of a 5 minute response test and two five minute stability tests. The response test is conducted
by recording velocity while raising and lowering the sash three times during the 5 minute period. The
sash is raised and lowered at a rate of approximately 1.5 ft/sec following the sash being lowered for 30
seconds and raised for 60 seconds. The stability tests are conducted by measuring velocity for five
minutes at the 6 inch sash height and the five minutes at the 80% sash height.
Recording of exhaust flow at the 6 inch sash opening and 80% sash opening. The flow rates are
particularly important when slot velocities are measured and be verified against face velocity
measurements.
The certification and/or performance testing of the LFH shall be performed by the fume hood manufacturer
in presence of a SHEMD representative after the testing and balancing work has been completed, and the
testing and balancing report submitted and approved by SHEMD. The TAB contractor shall be present and
available to make needed adjustments during certifications and performance testing of LFHs by the LFH
manufacturer. Criteria for the tests are summarized in Table 15.13.3.1.
Table 15.13.3.1 Testing Criteria for Newly Installed Laboratory Fume Hoods
Test
Cross Draft Test
Face Velocity - 1 00% Open
Face Velocity - 80% Open
Criteria
Vcd < 25 fpm
Max < 50 fpm
Vfavg = 80 fpm
Vfmin > 70 fpm
Vfmax < 90 fpm
Vfavg = 1 00 fpm
Vfmin > 90 fpm
Vfmax < 110 fpm
Notes
Sash 80% open
VAV hoods can have 100 fpm face
velocity at 100% sash full open.
Mechanical sash stop installed.
Monitor must indicate within 10% of
actual face velocity.
15-43
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Table 15.13.3.1 Testing Criteria for Newly Installed Laboratory Fume Hoods
Test
Criteria
Notes
Face Velocity - 6" Open
VAV Response Test
VAV Stability Test - 6 inch
Opening
VAV Stability Test - 80%
Opening
Vf avg < 300 fpm for CAV
hoods
Vfavg 100 fpm for VAV hoods
Dynamic Sash Movement
DSSV6 > 100 fpm (equivalent
slot velocity)
DSSD6<10%
DSSV80 = 100 fpm ฑ 10 fpm
DSSD80<10%
DRT80 < 5 seconds
DRD80 < 20%
Stability Test
SSSV6>100fpm
SSSD6<10%
QBAS6 > 50 cfm/linear ft of
hood width
Stability Test
SSSV80 = 100 fpm ฑ 10
SSSD80<10%
QBAS80 ฑ 10% of design
flow
Average steady state velocity at 6
inches
Steady state deviation
Average steady state velocity at
80% open
Steady state deviation
Response time
Max deviation from average steady
state velocity.
Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
or equivalent
Steady state deviation
Reported flow at 6 inch opening
Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
or equivalent
Steady state deviation
Reported flow at 80% opening
15.13.4 TESTING AND BALANCING DEVICES
HVAC air and water distribution systems shall be provided with permanently installed, calibrated testing
and balancing devices, such as pressure gages, balancing valves, pilot tubes, dampers, thermometers, test
holes, with access, as needed, to accurately measure and adjust water and air flows, pressures, and
temperatures as required. At a minimum, the balancing devices in Table 15.13.4.1, Required Balancing
Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems, and Table 15.13.4.2, Required Balancing Devices for
Air Distribution Systems, shall be provided. Test devices shall be located and installed according to AABC
Volume A-82.
15-44
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Table 15.13.4.1 Required Balancing Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems
System Components (Water) Required System Devices
Pump suction and discharge piping Manifold pressure gauge with pressure taps
Pump discharge piping Flow-measuring device (type depending on accuracy
required) or inlet and discharge pressure gauges
Chiller evaporator water suction and discharge piping Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge and
gaugecock
Boiler or heat exchanger suction and discharge piping Same devices as required for chiller evaporator
piping
Heating or cooling coil (air-handling unit [AHU]) Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge/pressure tap
suction and discharge piping
Heating or cooling coil (AHU) discharge piping Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
pressure test ports
Reheat coil, fan coil unit, unit heater, ports, and finned Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
tube radiation, convector: (1) discharge piping pressure test ports; temperature test; and pressure
(2) suction piping tap
Three-way control valves (each port) suction and Pressure tap
discharge piping
Boiler discharge piping Flow-measuring device (orifice or venturi type)
Table 15.13.4.2 Required Balancing Devices for Air Distribution Systems
System Components Required System Device
Diffusers, grilles, registers Round butterfly or square/rectangular opposed-blade
volume damper, either integral with device or in spin-in
takeoffs
Branch ductwork runs Rectangular/square or round (with more than one
opposed-blade damper and terminal device). Sealed
test hole for pitot tube traverse
Fan discharge ductwork Sealed test holes for pitot tube traverse. Sealed test
hole for static pressure measurements
Fan suction ductwork Sealed test hole for static pressure measurement
Cooling coil suction and discharge airstreams Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Heating coil suction and discharge airstreams Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Mixed-air plenum airstream Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
15.13.5 REPORTING
At the completion of the testing and balancing work, the testing and balancing contractor shall submit a
report for EPA approval that conforms in format, and content to the requirements of AABC and/or NEBB
The report shall reflect all aspects of the testing and balancing work, including a comparison of the
adjusted/balanced performance of the systems with design requirements. The report shall be delivered at
least 15 days prior to final inspection of the building.
15-45
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.14 Commissioning
Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning requirements.
END OF SECTION 15
15-46
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1 General
16.1.1 CODE COMPLIANCE
All work done in this section shall comply with the applicable requirements of the most current edition of
the following codes and references:
National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70)
National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)
Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 110)
Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111)
Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780)
Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-4, Transformers
29 CFR งง1910.303-305
Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research Council
Title III Standards for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards, sections 2, 3, 4, and 4a, respectively, of the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, as amended
NACE International Standards
Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IBS) Lighting Handbook
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards
PB S-P1 00, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service.
In addition, all work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes, regulations,
ordinances, publications, and manuals. All newly manufactured equipment shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) or a similar testing laboratory acceptable to EPA. When codes conflict, the most
stringent standard shall govern.
16.1.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke
control, zoning, and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA
101.
16.1.3 ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DESIGN
After careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
departments, the design professional shall design systems that meet facility operating requirements in an
energy-efficient manner. The health and safety aspects of the operation must retain first priority, however,
and cannot be relaxed or traded off for more efficient systems. System and lighting design shall comply
with the requirements of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE) standard 90, IBS Lighting Handbook, the Facilities Management and Services Division
(FMSD) Energy Conservation Planning Handbook, EPA's Energy Star Program, and any state or local
energy conservation codes or recommendations.
16-1
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1.3.1 LOCAL ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMS
The local utility company shall be contacted to find the latest information on any and all energy
conservation programs in effect sponsored by the utility company. The economic validity of pursuing
these programs shall be presented to EPA with the first design submittal, and if the programs are
deemed viable, they shall be incorporated into the design for the project. The design professional, with
EPA, shall pursue rebates and other assistance to install energy conserving equipment, if applicable.
16.1.3.2 LOAD SHEDDING/PEAK SHAVING
The payback and attributed atmospheric admissions involved in introducing a load-shedding/peak-
shaving system into the facility design shall be evaluated. If a preliminary evaluation indicates a
payback of 5 years or less, a detailed evaluation of load shedding/peak shaving systems for the project
shall be prepared and submitted to EPA for funding consideration. The operational duty ratings of the
systems evaluated and proposed is of utmost importance. Continuous duty operation equipment is
required. Factors such as the various fuel sources, exhaust fume contribution to outdoor air quality,
local air quality standards, and energy-efficient generator equipment shall also be considered.
16.1.3.3 DEMAND-SIDE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand of the facility below a predetermined
level shall be evaluated. An economic analysis to determine the payback on such a system shall be
performed. This system, if feasible, shall have the capability to follow the demand variations as an
operator manually switches the loads.
16.1.4 COORDINATION OF WORK
A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural; electrical; heating, ventilation, and
air-conditioning [HVAC]; plumbing; equipment; and structural systems for bidding) shall be provided.
Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work among the trades and delineate the coordination
responsibilities of the contractor. Special attention shall be given to designed-in equipment and equipment
to be provided by the facility occupants.
16.1.5 POWER FACTORS
The design professional shall design the facility's electrical system so as to assure that the overall power
factor of the entire electrical installation is a minimum of 90 percent. This power factor may be achieved by
selection of electrical utilization equipment with individual power factor ratings that would render the
required facility power factor or through the installation of power factor correction devices to meet the
overall facility power factor requirement. The design professional shall assure that certain groups of
inductive type loads, such as motors of 5 HP and above, fluorescent lighting fixtures, transformers, etc., are
equipped with power factor correction at an individual level so that combined, the overall facility power
factor will be attained. All required power factor correction devices shall be switched with the utilization
equipment unless doing so results in an unsafe condition.
16.1.6 HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
The facility shall also comply with the electrical requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility
Standards (UFAS) (1984), adopted by the General Services Administration (GSA) in 41 CFR Parts 101-
19.6, as well as with ADA and all state and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities that must be
accessible and usable by physically handicapped people. The most stringent of these codes shall apply.
16.1.7 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
All specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers that are regularly and
currently engaged in production of such items. Items that are obsolete or to be discontinued by the
manufacturer, as well as materials and equipment of an experimental nature (or products that would be
installed in a facility for the first time with this project), are not acceptable and will not be permitted. All
16-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
material and equipment shall be specification grade, new, free from defects, and high quality, and shall be
entirely suitable for these specific facilities.
16.1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Careful consideration shall be given in the design to the types of materials to be used for the project as they
relate to the environment in which they will be installed. Exterior equipment may be subject to different
types of corrosive atmospheres and environments. Interior equipment in laboratories and testing and
storage areas may also be subject to corrosive conditions. All equipment and material shall be suitable for
the environment in which it will be installed. Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment such as
transformers and generators. Environmental considerations for electrical raceways and enclosures are
further discussed in paragraph 16.13 of this section.
16.2 Primary Distribution
16.2.1 DUCTBANKS AND CABLE
All primary electrical distribution at new sites shall be underground. Underground cables should be
preferably installed in conduit; however, very long cable runs may be installed where the cost of installing
cables in conduit is extremely high. A cost comparison between direct burial cables and cables installed in
conduit shall be submitted to the Project Officer for approval within ten (10) calendar days after contract
award. The minimum conduit size for primary voltage cables shall be 4 inches. On multiple conduit
ductbanks for primary distribution systems and for the emergency power distribution system up to the
emergency distribution switchgear, 25 percent and not less than one (1) spare empty conduit shall be
provided. Spare empty conduits for other critical equipment feeders, like the central HVAC equipment,
shall be provided as directed by the FOR or the Project Officer.
16.2.1.1 DUCTBANK ENCASEMENT
All underground cables and wires shall be installed in conduit. Underground conduit for circuits rated
600 volts or higher shall be encased in concrete. Multiple ductbanks where the heat produced by
adjacent circuits affect the current carrying capacity of each individual circuit shall be encased in
concrete.
16.2.2 SWITCHES
When a new campus-type utility distribution system or an extension of an existing campus-type distribution
system is a part of the project, a loop system shall be considered. This system shall have sectionalizing
primary switches. Primary switches shall be of load break design. All switches shall be pad mounted and
lockable. Enclosures for switches shall be suitable to the environment in which the switches will be located.
Where switches are to be located indoors, they shall be physically isolated from any emergency electrical
equipment and shall be located in electrical rooms only.
16.2.3 OVERHEAD POWER SUPPLY LINES
Overhead power supply lines can be used only where service is to be installed in remote or unsettled areas,
industrial areas, or areas where underground service is not feasible. Maximum use shall be made of single-
pole structures. Overhead power supply lines may also be used for feeders to small single-phase loads or
buildings. Careful consideration shall be given to the location of overhead lines in relation to future land
16.2.3.1 POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES
Joint use of poles for power and communications distribution shall maintain safety standards and shall
limit electrical interference to communications services. In joint use of poles, either for multiple
electrical distribution systems or for both electrical distribution and communication lines, underbuilt
lines or cables shall be of vertical construction. Use of double-stacked cross run construction shall be
allowed only where proper clearances for hot-line maintenance work can be ensured. Clearances shall
16-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
comply with the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) [American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) standard C2].
16.2.4 TRANSFORMERS
Transformers shall be located and installed in accordance with NEC Article 450 and in such a way as to
minimize the fire and contamination hazards to the EPA facility and its occupants. The following
requirements also apply:
Whenever any public utility transformer or other equipment involves a dielectric fluid that is
combustible, toxic, or otherwise hazardous, it shall not be located inside an EPA facility.
Utility transformer vaults or transformer locations abutting an EPA building shall conform to the
requirements of the NEC. Transformer equipment shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath,
any exit.
Transformers, fluorescent ballasts, and other electrical devices containing polychlorinated biphenyls
(PCBs) shall not be used in EPA facilities.
All transformers located within an EPA building shall be dry-type only (unless they are located within a
transformer vault and furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure relief vent).
16.2.4.1 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Dry-type transformers shall be provided with four 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated
primary voltage. All transformers shall be designed for continuous operation; the insulation for dry
type transformers shall be class "H." All transformers shall conform to the design, temperature-rise,
testing, and other requirements specified by the Acoustical Society of America (ASA), NEMA, and
IEEE standards and shall have a rated sound level of 45 decibels (dBA) or below. To ensure against
objectionable levels of noise being transmitted through the building, the dry-type transformers shall be
mounted on approved vibration-isolation mountings. Connection to transformers shall be made with
flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) with grounding jumper. All dry-type transformers shall be designed
for nonlinear loads and shall be isolated-type transformers. They shall be K-rated and shall be shielded
and located as close as possible to the load. The designer shall consider the use of shielded isolation
transformers for sensitive computer and other electronic equipment loads.
16.2.4.2 OUTSIDE SUBSTATIONS AND TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
In addition to the requirements above, outside substations and transformers meet the most current
requirements of Article 450 of the NEC and applicable local utility company substation construction
standards.
16.2.5 SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
A risk/benefit analysis should be performed to justify added capital costs for system redundancy.
16.3 Service Entrance
16.3.1 GENERAL
All service entrance equipment shall be UL listed for use as service entrance equipment. All components
shall be factory wired for switchboards, panelboards, or unit substations before shipment. Service entrance
equipment shall be physically isolated from all emergency power systems so that a failure in either system
will not affect the operation of the other system. All service switchboards shall have factory-installed
ammeters and voltmeters.
16-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.3.2 OVERHEAD SERVICES
Overhead services to buildings should not be used except in particular circumstances where underground
services are not feasible, and then only with approval of the EPA contracting officer's representative
(COR). Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads, and
supports shall be provided. The main service switch, panelboard, or switchboard shall be located
immediately adjacent to the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be
maintained under all overhead lines. The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall be
grouted or otherwise fire-stopped.
16.3.3 UNDERGROUND SERVICES
All underground secondary (voltage less than 600) conductors shall be installed in direct buried conduits.
Where secondary-service reliability is a prime consideration, secondary service ductbanks shall be concrete
encased. Minimum duct size of service entrance ducts shall be 4 inches, all other secondary conduits that
might be necessary for power distribution to exterior lighting and other electrical loads shall be sized based
on conduit fill as calculated in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. A minimum of 25 percent
spare service entrance ducts (but not less than one spare duct) shall be provided. Spare ducts shall be
plugged or capped to prevent contamination. The locations where manholes (if required) are to be included
shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly.
16.3.4 SERVICE CAPACITY
Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate
the full design load plus 30 percent. To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be
located outside of the actual building. If public utility transformers must be located within buildings
because of site constraints, they shall be installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the
requirements of the NEC. These vaults shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from
the building. In calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for lighting and
fixed mechanical equipment loads and a demand factor of 75 percent for all other loads. The incoming
service shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the full design load plus 30 percent additional
capacity for future growth.
16.3.5 METERING
Where medium voltage power is brought to the facility, electrical energy metering (kilowatt hour [kwh])
shall be furnished at each substation of 500 kilovolt-ampere (kVA) or greater capacity. Demand metering
(kilowatt demand [kwd]) shall be furnished as required for load management. The economics of primary
metering and secondary metering for campus-type facilities shall also be investigated; the most cost-
effective method shall be used. Coordination with the local utility company should be performed to
determine points of utility metering requirements. Single metering is preferred. Sub-metering of lighting
and equipment in individual buildings is encouraged to monitor and adjust energy performance.
16.3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker or circuit
breakers, or a main switchboard or panelboard. In determining whether the service entrance equipment
should be of the fused or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit
current available at various points in the proposed distribution system.
16.3.5.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
All service entrance equipment shall have copper busing. If the main service consists of a switchboard
or panelboard, it shall have at least 10 percent of the switchboard rating as spare breaker or switches
and 20 percent of the rating as bused spaces. The electrical system shall be properly coordinated for
selective tripping in order to permit removal of only that portion of the system that has experienced a
fault or overload condition.
16-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.3.5.2 RENOVATION
If this project is a renovation or an extension of an existing building, the history of the loads shall be
carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient capacity to handle
the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.
16.4 Interior Electrical Systems
16.4.1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Electrical systems shall be designed so that all components operate within their capacities for initial and
projected loads. Preferred standard voltages (per ANSI C84.1) shall be used, with a single voltage level
characteristic in any classification, in order to minimize stocks of spare equipment and to standardize
operating and maintenance practices and procedures. On-site acceptance testing shall be required for each
major electrical system. Tests shall be performed in the presence of EPA personnel. Copies of all test
results shall be submitted for approval. All receptacles, switches, and wiring devices shall be specification
grade. All safety switches shall be heavy duty. All equipment shall be new and shall be installed and used
in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling as required and acceptable to EPA
(i.e., UL listing or other EPA acceptable listing).
The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account
the effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system. Harmonics from nonlinear
loads can affect the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors, and emergency
generators. "K" rated transformers shall be used where the associated panelboards are feeding a large
quantity of nonlinear loads. Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by variable-speed
and variable-frequency drive units used for control of HVAC equipment.
16.4.2 CONDUCTORS
All conductors (wire and cable) shall be copper. All conductors for systems operating at 480 volts and
below shall have 600-volt insulation with distinctive markings, as required by UL, for identification in the
field. All conductors shall be continuous, without splices. All conductors operating at 600 volts and above
shall be insulated and shall have the appropriate voltage and insulation ratings as required by their location
in the system and in the facility. Branch circuit wiring shall not be smaller than No. 12 American Wire
Gage (AWG). All conductors shall be color coded to identify each phase and the neutral. The grounding
conductor shall be green or bare.
16.4.3 RACEWAYS
All electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway or shall be otherwise physically protected in
accordance with the NEC. Conduit shall be at least % inch.
16.4.3.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT
Service entrance conduit shall be provided as permitted by the NEC for the intended purpose. Service
entrance conduits shall be enveloped in a minimum of 2 inches of concrete encasement. An empty
conduit shall be provided up to the service entrance disconnect.
16.4.3.2 FLEXIBLE-METAL CONDUIT
Liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit shall be used for connections to meters, transformers, pumps, and
other equipment, as required by the NEC and local codes, where vibration or movement can be a
problem and where there is a need for protection from liquids, vapors, or solids.
16.4.3.3 RATED ASSEMBLIES
Raceways that penetrate fire-rated assemblies shall be noncombustible. Openings shall be sealed to
maintain the established fire ratings as defined by UL.
16-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.4.3.4 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
Surface metal raceways shall be used to provide receptacles with power and for low-potential services
(e.g., data and telecommunications wiring) in the laboratories themselves. The design professional
shall review and make recommendations to EPA concerning the type of surface metal raceways
appropriate to the project. The design professional shall consider using single-compartment surface
metal raceways (2% inches high by 1% inches deep, minimum size) where only power receptacles are
required and double-compartment surface metal raceways (4% inches high by 2% inches deep,
minimum size) where both power receptacles and telecommunications/data outlets are required.
Raceway covers shall be precut to 12-inch sections. The raceway shall be divisible into two or three
separate wiring components to facilitate installation of power or low-potential wiring. The material and
color of the raceway shall be appropriate to the atmosphere in which the raceway will be installed.
16.4.3.5 PLENUMS, DUCTS, AND OTHER AIR-HANDLING SPACES
All wiring shall be in accordance with NEC Article 300, except that communication circuits (Article
800) and Class 2 and Class 3 circuits (Article 725) need not be run in conduit when conductors are of
materials that are classified by UL as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
characteristics.
16.4.4 NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
The neutral conductors of four-wire system feeder(s), directly serving nonlinear load shall be sized at
double the ampere rating of the phase conductors through the entire interior electrical distribution system.
The neutral conductors of 480/277-volt, four-wire feeders serving the lighting panels that control the
electronic ballast fluorescent fixtures shall be sized at double the wire size of the phase conductors. Neutral
conductors of circuits serving nonlinear load shall be dedicated to the circuit only. Therefore, when there is
more than one circuit in a single conduit run and any of the circuits are serving nonlinear load, a dedicated
neutral wire for each of the circuits serving nonlinear loads, in addition to the neutral wire serving the other
circuits, shall be provided.
16.4.5 PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Panelboards shall comply with UL 50 and UL 67. Panelboards for use as service-disconnecting means shall
also conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be equipped with a main circuit breaker and all branch circuit
breakers as required. Design shall be such that any individual breaker can be removed without disturbing
adjacent units and without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining
clearances as required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, provisions should be made for the future
installation of a breaker, which shall be sized as indicated. All panelboard locks included in the project
shall be keyed alike. All distribution panels serving fluorescent fixtures, laboratory room distribution
panels, and any other panels serving nonlinear load shall be UL listed and labeled for nonlinear loads. An
isolated neutral bus shall be provided in each panel for connection of circuit-neutral conductors. A separate
ground bus marked with a yellow stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet shall be provided for
connecting grounding conductors. A separate ground bus marked with a green strip along its front and
isolated from the panel cabinet shall be provided for connecting isolated insulated ground wires.
16.4.5.1 DIRECTORIES
Directories shall be provided to indicate the load served by each circuit. These directories shall be
typed and shall be mounted in a holder behind a transparent protective covering. Bus board shall be
supported on bases independent of the circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so
that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.
16.4.5.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Molded-case circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1 and UL 489 and UL 877 for circuit
breakers and circuit breaker enclosures located in hazardous (classified) locations. Circuit breakers
shall be thermal magnetic type with an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum.
16-7
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
The design professional is required to submit for approval by the EPA, short circuit calculations; if
these calculations indicate that a higher circuit breaker interrupting capacity is required, then circuit
breakers with the calculated interrupting capacity shall be provided. Breaker terminals shall be UL
listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided. Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable.
Common trip-type multiple breakers with a single operating handle shall be provided. Breaker design
shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Phase sequences
should be maintained throughout each panel so that any adjacent breaker poles are connected to phases
A, B, and C, respectively. Circuit breakers should be provided with ground fault interrupter as required
by the NEC and in conformance with UL 1053. In addition, ground-fault circuit interrupter circuit
breakers should be provided with a push-to-test button, visible indication of tripped condition, and an
ability to detect a current imbalance of approximately 5 milliamperes.
16.4.5.3 SHUNT TRIP BREAKERS
Shunt trip main breakers shall be provided in panelboards to remove power to laboratory modules upon
activation of fire protection systems or devices and emergency power off (EPO) button(s) in the
immediate lab module. Shunt trip branch circuit breakers may also be required in order to remove
power to other specific areas or equipment (e.g., to elevators with equipment room protected by a
sprinkler system, computer rooms protected by sprinkler systems). It shall be the responsibility of the
design professional to consult with the EPA very early in the electrical design (such as during the
conceptual design phase) to enable the EPA to indicate and designate where shunt trip breakers are
required in each specific facility that is being designed. Note: The activation of a fire sprinkler head in
an individual laboratory module is required to shutdown the power to that laboratory module. This
power shutdown may be accomplished through the use of shunt trip breakers in the power panels.
16.4.5.4 LABORATORY MODULE
Each laboratory module shall be provided with a separate 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
panelboard. The branch circuit system shall be as flexible as possible to accommodate any type of
laboratory alteration. In addition, each laboratory module shall be provided with emergency power
from an emergency power panelboard; the emergency power panelboard may serve more than one
module. The panelboard should be rated for nonlinear loads. Each lab module shall be provided with
UPS power from a UPS power panelboard. The UPS power panelboard may serve more than one lab
module.
16.4.5.4.1 EMERGENCY POWER OFF (EPO) BUTTON
Each laboratory module and computer rooms protected by sprinkler systems shall have an EPO
button by each main exit into the corridor. Activation of the EPO button shall shut down the
power to the normal power panelboard for the laboratory module. The EPO button shall
simultaneously shut down the power of each emergency circuit into the lab module and each UPS
circuit into the lab module. The EPO button should activate the appropriate circuits via shunt trip
breakers in the normal, emergency, and UPS power panels. The design professional should
confirm with EPA early in the design if any HVAC components or equipment are required to be
shutdown or required to provide a reduced air flow in the lab module when an EPO button is
activated
16.4.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS
Motor controllers and starters shall be provided for all motors and equipment containing motors. All
controllers shall have thermal-overload protection in each phase. Solid-state motor controllers shall have
undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have
undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches.
When used with a pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, the controller
shall have a hand-off-automatic selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
the normal automatic regulatory-control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position.
All safety control devices, such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-
overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic"
positions. Control circuit connections to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one
automatic regulatory-control device shall be made in accordance with a manufacturer-approved wiring
diagram. The selector switch shall be capable of locking in any position.
For each motor that is not in sight of the controller, either the controlled disconnecting means shall be
capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated, nonfused switch that will disconnect
the motor from the source of supply shall be placed within sight of the motor location.
Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings, shall be of the thermal
inverse-time-limit type, and shall include a manual-reset pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller
case. The cover of a combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked
with the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker so that the cover cannot be opened unless the
handle of the switch or circuit breaker is in the off position. Variable-frequency drive units shall be
considered for larger HVAC equipment loads, and for other motor loads as feasible. See Section 15,
Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for equipment to be used with variable-speed drives.
16.4.6.1 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Control equipment shall comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) standards, NFPA 70 (NEC), and with UL 508. Single-phase
motors may be controlled directly by automatic control devices of adequate rating. Automatically
controlled polyphase motors and all polyphase motors rated greater than 1 horsepower (hp) shall have
magnetic starters. Control devices shall be of adequate voltage and shall have an adequate current
rating for the duty to be performed. Pilot control circuits shall operate with one side grounded and at
no greater than 120 volts. Where control power transformers are required, they shall be located inside
the associated motor starter housing, shall be protected against faults and overload by properly sized
overcurrent devices, and shall be of sufficient capacity to serve all devices connected to them without
overload. Reduced-voltage starters or variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall be provided for larger
motors to avoid an unacceptable voltage dip when the motors are started. As a minimum, reduced
voltage starters shall be required when the locked rotor current of motors exceeds the full-load of
supply transformers or supply conductors.
16.4.6.2 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Safety disconnect switches shall be provided for all hard-wired electrically operated equipment and
motors in locations where they are required by code. Switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA
Type HD. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for exterior use. All safety
switches shall be horsepower rated. The switches shall be of the quick-make quick-break type, and all
parts shall be mounted on insulating base to permit replacement of any part from the front of the switch.
All current-carrying parts shall be of higher rated load without excessive heating. Contacts shall be
plated to prevent corrosion and oxidation and to ensure suitable conductivity.
16.4.6.2.1 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
With the exception of emergency systems, systems carrying 150 volts or greater to ground and not
exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase shall be provided with ground fault protection for each
service-disconnecting means rated 1,000 amperes or more. Necessary precautions shall, however,
be taken to minimize the possibility of nuisance tripping. In addition, all buses or other conductors
at motor control centers, switchgear, switchboards, and busways shall be insulated or isolated. The
facility may have special requirements with respect to ground fault protection on the main
switchboard (such as two levels of ground fault). Very early in the design phase (such as during
the conceptual design submittal phase), it shall be the responsibility of the design professional to
16-9
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
consult with EPA concerning any special requirements above those required by the NEC. All
special ground fault requirements above those required by the NEC shall be incorporated into the
facility design.
16.4.6.2.2 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL
At a minimum, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection shall be provided for all 125-volt,
single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles located outdoors; elevator electrical systems; as
required by NEC Article 620, the Safety Manual, and the National Research Council's Prudent
Practices', and receptacles installed on roofs. GFCI protection shall also be required in the
following circumstances:
In any location where EPA personnel are operating electrical equipment in direct contact
with water or other liquids or where electrical receptacles are installed within 6 feet of a
sink provided with a plumbed water supply or a drain, tub, or other water source.
If GFCI protection is prescribed for electrical equipment by the equipment's
manufacturer.
If previous experience indicates a need for GFCI protection.
This protection shall be provided in new and existing construction by means of interrupter devices
incorporated in receptacles or circuit breakers. These GFCI receptacles maybe terminating type
or feed-through type, whichever will satisfy the need. GFCI receptacles shall be color coded or
shall otherwise indicate GFCI protection. Scheduled testing of the GFCI is required in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than semiannually. Upon completion of the
initial installation, the electrical ground system shall be checked or verified for continuity with the
conduit system, the equipment housing, and the final connection to the receptacle grounding stud.
In aquatic laboratories and other required areas, not only will the GFCI-protective device be
installed in the receptacle, but also the receptacles will be connected to the grounded system.
16.4.6.2.3 REMOVAL OF GFCI CIRCUITS
Existing circuits with GFCI protection shall remain unless persistent problems are encountered or
unless renovations occur that would alter the use so that GFCI protection is not necessary. An
example of such a renovation would be converting an aquatic laboratory to office space.
16.4.6.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
Where several motors (all of larger-than-fractional horsepower) are located in one room or space, a
motor control center should be used. Busing in the control center should be arranged so that the center
can be expanded from both ends. Bus shall be of silver-plated copper. Interconnecting wires shall be
copper.Terminal blocks should be of the plug-in type so that controllers may be removed without
disconnecting individual control wiring.
16.4.7 GROUNDING
The grounding system must meet the requirements of the NFPA 70 and IEEE 142. All electrical outlets and
non-current carrying metal parts of permanently connected electrical equipment shall be permanently
connected to ground. All EPA facilities will be provided with two different equipment grounding systems:
the general facility grounding system that is connected to the building structure and other systems, and an
isolated grounding system to provide equipment grounding to the laboratory and critical computer
equipment. Raceway systems shall not be accepted as the only grounding path. The isolated grounding
conductors shall be green and the general facility ground conductor shall be gray.
16-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.4.7.1 LABORATORY BUILDING MODULE GROUNDING
All laboratory building modules shall be connected to the isolated grounding system described in
paragraph 16.4.8. The isolated grounding system shall consist of a bare earth copper ground grid or
field, direct buried outside to provide an isolated ground for instrumentation. This ground system
(critical computer equipment in areas of the facility other than in the laboratory modules are also
connected to this isolated grounding system) shall be clearly identified and protected against improper
usage. All building ground systems shall be tied together as required by NEC Article 250.
16.4.7.2 GROUND BUS
Every panelboard and switchboard in the facility shall be provided with a ground bus.
16.4.8 LABORATORY POWER REQUIREMENTS
Specific and generic electrical requirements are indicated for most spaces in the room data sheets generated
during the pre-design process. In the design of a new facility, however, these requirements must be
reviewed, verified, and tested with the appropriate EPA representatives and must gain approval from EPA.
This reviewing, verification, and testing should occur during the program verification and design phase of
the project.
Duplex convenience outlets shall be laboratory standard grade, 20 amps, 120 volts in surface metal
raceways, as defined below. These outlets should be provided in addition to specific electrical outlets and
receptacles called for or shown in the respective room data sheets, and in addition to outlets needed to feed
the equipment used in each room. These convenience outlets shall be located either on the reagent shelf or,
if no reagent shelf is required, 8 inches above countertop level when base cabinets are used, and 44 inches
above floor level in other locations. The maximum spacing between convenience outlets shall be 3 feet. In
addition, the following requirements apply:
Peninsulas. Provide a quadruplex receptacle outlet every 3 feet over the peninsula on overhead carriers
(these carriers also support the various gas lines that terminate at the peninsulas). No pedestal
receptacle outlets shall be installed. The receptacles on the overhead carriers shall be installed in
surface metal raceway mounted to the overhead carriers.
Equipment Outlet Location. Electrical outlet location shall be near the equipment to be powered; the
exact location of equipment and outlets shall be determined by the Government during early design
stage.
All 120-volt general convenience receptacles shall be rated a minimum of 20 amperes and shall be
grounding type (NEMA 5-20R) and specification grade.
120-volt circuits shall have a minimum rating of 20 amperes.
A maximum of four general convenience receptacles shall be connected to a circuit.
Equipment such as refrigerators, freezers, and centrifuges shall each have individual dedicated circuits.
Receptacles located within 6 feet of a sink (or other water sources) shall be GFCI type.
All branch circuits or panelboard feeder conduit runs shall be provided with separate equipment
grounding conductors sized per NEC Table 250.122.
Each laboratory shall be provided with separate, dedicated 120/20 8-volt, three-phase, four-wire
panelboards; panelboards shall be spaced at a maximum spacing of one panelboard every two modules.
16-11
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Additional panelboards shall be provided as required by electrical usage or as directed by the EPA
project officer.
Each laboratory panelboard shall be provided with a separate ground bus.
Receptacles that are located above wall, peninsula, or island benches and at equipment spaces shall be
in surface metal raceways wherever possible. Raceways shall be single compartment or double
compartment (for both power and telecommunications/data) as directed by the EPA project officer.
In accordance with NEMA 14-30R, 30-ampere, 125/250-volt single-phase receptacles will be provided
for 30-ampere, 208-volt single-phase equipment.
One receptacle on a dedicated 20-ampere, 120-volt emergency power circuit shall be provided in each
laboratory. Emergency power shall also be provided for special equipment requiring such power.
UPS systems within the computer/data-processing rooms and laboratories and their supply and output
circuits shall comply with NEC Article 645.10. The disconnecting means shall also disconnect the
battery from its load.
16.5 Interior Lighting System
16.5.1 ILLUMINANCE LEVELS
The minimum acceptable levels of maintained general overhead illuminance shall be as indicated in Table
16.5.1, Illuminance Levels, for the particular areas. The maximum illuminance level shall be no greater
than 115% of the minimum level of the table. Illuminance levels shall manifest an energy conserving
design that indicates coherence to EPA energy conserving initiatives. For areas not listed in Table 16.5.1,
the recommendations of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IBS) handbooks shall be followed. The
lighting illuminance on the work surface or at the prescribed height above finished floor (AFF) is to be the
area with the highest illuminance level within the lab module or office space.
Table 16.5.1 Illuminance Levels
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
General office space - ambient and task 50
Animal room 70
Autopsy 100
Boiler room 20
Corridors 10
Emergency lighting (general, at floor level) 3
Emergency lighting in laboratory blocks, at floor
level 5
Examination 100
Laboratory module at work surface 36 inches
AFF (dual switching) 50/100
Loading dock 20
Lobby 20
Locker rooms 20
Shops (dual switching) 50/100
General office and record rooms - ambient
and task 50
Parking, driveway, and walkways
Stairways
Storage
Inactive
Rough bulky
Medium
Fine
Telephone equipment room
Toilets
Exterior entrances
Desk level (task lighting)
Utility rooms
X-ray
Parking decks
1-3
20
5
10
20
50
70
30
5
50-100
20
10
5
Library-conference rooms (dual switching) 50/100
Note: These values represent general illumination 30 inches above the floor unless indicated otherwise.
16-12
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.5.2 LIGHTING CONTROLS
Switches shall be provided to control lighting in all areas. Provide at least one switch for room lighting at
54 inches above the finished floor at each door that provides hallway egress and the controls described
below. Large rooms (more than 200 square feet) shall have multiple switching to reduce the lighting level
by approximately half.
16.5.2.1 DAYLIGHT-LEVEL SENSORY CONTROLS
In building areas (except laboratories) that are larger than 200 square feet and that will have a large
contribution of natural daylight, daylight-level sensory controls shall be used to control lighting levels.
16.5.2.2 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
In buildings with building automation systems (BAS), the B AS (in addition to light switches) shall
control overall building lighting. Each floor shall be a separate control zone with appropriate
subzoning of each floor for special functions.
16.5.2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Occupancy sensors shall be provided (in addition to switches) to control lighting in offices and smaller
rooms, bath and locker areas, conference rooms, storage rooms, and mechanical rooms. For offices,
conference rooms and other non-support rooms, the occupancy sensors shall be manual on/automatic
off type.
16.5.3 LAMPS AND BALLASTS
Electrical discharge lamps and high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps should be the primary lamps
considered in the selection of the illumination concept. The lighting system shall use, to the maximum
extent feasible, energy-efficient fixtures with electronic high-frequency ballasts, T-5 and T-8 fluorescent
lamps, and high-quality light reflectors and lenses. The use of filament light sources should be kept to an
absolute minimum (i.e., only in spaces that do not have a need for high levels of illuminance, that are
normally occupied only for short durations, and for which discharge lamps are not suitable). Where
fluorescent lamps will be utilized, these lamps shall be of the T-5 or T-8 type to conserve energy.
16.5.3.1 INDOOR HID LIGHTING
In using HID lighting indoors, the required color rendition shall be carefully considered from both
visual and health safety perspectives.
16.5.3.2 BALLASTS
All ballasts to be used in EPA facilities shall be of the energy-saving type (electronic high-frequency
ballasts shall be used in all possible locations).
16.5.3.3 LIGHT FIXTURE SELECTION
The selection of light fixtures should involve careful consideration of the quality of construction, ease
of maintenance, ease of relamping, efficiency, illumination characteristics, mounting technique, and
special purpose characteristics (e.g., vapor-proof, explosion-proof, elimination of radio frequency
interferences). For office areas and laboratories, pendant lighting with direct/indirect light is
recommended.
16.5.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING (GENERATORS AND BATTERY UNITS)
An emergency lighting system shall be provided in accordance with NEC Article 700 and arranged to
provide a minimum of 3 footcandles of illumination (measured at floor level) throughout the path of egress,
including exit access routes, exit stairways, and other routes, such as exit passageways to the outside of the
16-13
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
building. The emergency lighting system in laboratory modules shall provide a minimum of 5 footcandles
of illumination.
Laboratories and large open areas such as cafeterias; assembly areas; large mechanical, electrical, and
storage rooms; and open-plan office spaces where exit access is normally through the major portion of
the areas shall be provided with emergency lighting. In addition, emergency lighting systems shall be
provided in computer rooms and in any location where chemicals are stored, handled, or used.
The emergency lighting in laboratory rooms should provide at least 5 footcandles of illumination,
measured at the exit access door.
The type of system used shall be such that it will operate in the event of any failure of a public utility or
internal disruption of the normal power distribution system in a building.
Buildings seven stories high or less may be powered from two separate substations which are served by
two different primary lines not constructed in the same right of way or path. This dual feeder
arrangement can be used instead of having to install an emergency generator, but the transfer to feed
the building from one substation to the other must be automatic and within the maximum time lapse
required by the life safety code and the facility operation needs.
Egress lighting in offices/lab areas should be connected to the fire alarm system, where permitted by
code, so that these lights do not remain on 24 hours/day.
The emergency lighting shall be connected to a generator, when a generator is provided. In buildings
where there is no emergency generator, battery backup shall be provided for egress and emergency
lighting. This battery backup may be by unit-type battery fixtures, battery packs in fluorescent fixtures,
or use of inverters. Where HID lamps are used (and connected to a generator), a standby lighting
system shall be provided to meet emergency lighting requirements during HID lamp restrike periods.
16.5.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION
EPA seeks to minimize energy use dedicated to electric lighting and the resulting cooling loads through
proper use of natural lighting in the facility. In effect, it seeks a well-integrated lighting system for its new
buildings that makes optimum use of both natural and artificial lighting sources and balances the buildings'
heating and cooling needs. A lighting-power budget shall be determined, in conformance with ASHRAE
90, and strictly adhered to in the design of the lighting and cooling load for each facility. This budget may
be exceeded in laboratory areas and in shops where a higher level of illumination is required because of the
type of work being performed. All design of lighting for EPA facilities shall be in accordance with the EPA
Energy Star Program.
16.5.6 GLARE
The selection of the type of diffuser and lens to be used on the lighting fixtures shall take into account the
glare that can be produced on the work surface. All lighting design shall minimize the effects of glare on
the task surface. Indirect lighting shall be used wherever possible. Additionally, fixtures should be located
to keep glare to a minimum. In locating lighting fixtures, consideration must be given to the fact that many
of the surfaces in the facility (especially in laboratory areas) have highly reflective materials at the task
location.
16.5.7 AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING AREAS
Lighting fixture types, location, and illumination levels shall be coordinated with the equipment and
functions of the telecommunications, alarm, and automatic data processing (ADP) centers to provide the
required illumination without:
16-14
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Interfering with prompt identification of self-illuminated indicating devices
Creating reflecting glare that might detract from adequate observations of essential equipment
Creating electrical or electromagnetic interference detrimental to proper operation of equipment.
16.6 Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
Lighting fixtures shall comply with the NEC and the following criteria.
16.6.1 MOUNTING
All lamps shall be mounted in a way that prevents direct contact between the lamp and any combustible
material. Wherever accidental contact is remotely possible, the lamp shall be protected by a guard, globe,
reflector, fixture, or other protective means (NEC Article 410).
16.6.2 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
All fluorescent fixtures installed indoors shall be provided with ballasts that have integral thermal overload
protection (NEC Article 410).
16.6.3 LIGHT DIFFUSERS
Light diffusers shall be either of noncombustible material or of a design or material that will drop from the
fixture before ignition. Where combustible dropout-type fixtures are used, plastic material shall not
constitute more than 30 percent of the total ceiling area. Where luminous or diffuser ceilings are used,
these restrictions also apply.
16.6.4 LOCATION
Lighting in locations where dangerous gases, liquids, dusts, or fibers may exist shall meet the requirements
of NEC Article 500.
16.7 Exterior Lighting Systems
16.7.1 GENERAL
Exterior lighting systems shall comply with the IBS Lighting Handbook. System controls shall use a time
clock and/or photocell to provide illumination only when needed. In buildings with a building automation
system (BAS), exterior lighting circuits shall be switched by photocells and the BSA system, which shall be
able to override the photocell switch on request.
16.7.1.1 EXTERIOR LIGHT GLARE
Light glare shall be kept to a minimum in situations where it would impede effective operations of
protective force personnel; interfere with rail, highway, or navigable water traffic; or be objectionable
to occupants of adjacent properties. Uplighting should be minimized.
16.7.1.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
Maximum use shall be made of HID lamps such as metal halide or high-pressure sodium vapor lamps.
16.7.2 PARKING LOT LIGHTING
Lighting over driveways and parking areas shall consist of a complete HID lighting system, including
control equipment, underground wiring, luminaries, and all necessary accessories for a complete and
functioning system. The maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles. Consideration
shall be given to reducing the amount of light in parking lot areas during times (e.g., between 12:00 AM to
4:30 AM) when it is very unlikely that the lots will be in use. EPA personnel at the site shall be contacted
and approval must be obtained from the appropriate EPA facility personnel prior to incorporating this
lighting feature into the design.
16-15
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.7.3 BUILDING EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Appropriate security and accent lighting shall be provided. All exterior doors and entrance ways shall be
illuminated for security. Entrance ways shall have a maintained illumination level of at least 3 footcandles.
Entrance ways with cameras shall have an illumination level as required by the security camera to operate.
16.7.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL LIGHTING
If the facility is on a site where traffic controls are necessary and will not be provided by the local
municipality or state transportation authority, a complete traffic control system for the facility shall be
designed, including all stoplights, directional lights, controls, and wiring, for a complete operating system.
16.7.5 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All new access roadways, or continuations of loop or access roadways, and driveways shall be lighted. The
maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles on vehicular roadways and pedestrian
walkways. The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots (HID source) shall be used for roadways.
16.7.6 EXTERIOR ELECTRIC SIGNS
All exterior electric signs and nonelectric signs shall be integrated into the total design of the facility and
approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR).
16.8 Emergency Power System
16.8.1 GENERAL
An emergency power system shall be designed and provided for all administrative and laboratory space.
The system shall provide electric power in the event of loss of normal power and shall provide power for
emergency and egress lighting. The system shall also supply power to critical equipment during planned
outages for maintenance. The emergency power system shall comply with NFPA 37, NFPA 70 (the NEC),
NFPA 101, NFPA 110, and IEEE 446.
16.8.1.1 BATTERY-TYPE LIGHTING
In smaller buildings when the emergency power system is installed primarily for egress lighting,
battery-type lighting units shall be used.
16.8.1.2 EMERGENCY POWER
In facilities where the emergency power needs are larger than can be handled by battery packs, an
emergency power source shall be supplied. Normally, the emergency power source will be a generator;
however, other power sources should be considered by the design professional whenever they appear to
be feasible, can be justified for approval by EPA, are allowed by the applicable code(s) (e.g., NFPA
101 and NFPA 110), and are acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction. Alternate sources
that might be considered, but not necessarily be limited to, fuel cells, micro turbines, turbines,
photovoltaic (solar), wind, and biomass. The design professional shall justify the use of emergency
power sources other a than generator by submission of design justification documents to EPA for
approval. These justification documents shall include a complete life cycle cost analysis indicating a
payback period acceptable to EPA, a narrative pertaining to the reliability of the current technology of
the source, a narrative of the availability and applicability of the particular source to the specific facility
and environment, a discussion of environmental impact considerations, and any other pertinent
information relating to the alternative source that may be necessary for EPA to determine if the
alternative source is acceptable for the specific project.
When it is not feasible to consider other sources for a specific project or when other sources prove to
be unacceptable, a diesel engine-driven generator shall be provided to serve as the emergency source of
power. If the loads and the availability of natural gas allow, a natural gas generator shall be
16-16
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
considered. Any emergency power system provided shall be equipped with phase-synchronized
automatic transfer switch or switches and with necessary controls for automatic operation. All
automatic transfer switches shall be of the isolation/bypass type. The generator(s) (or alternate
emergency power source) shall transfer and pick up the critical load(s) within 10 seconds. The system
shall be able to carry a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The generator exhaust and fuel
pipe vents shall be arranged and located away from fresh-air intakes. The generator exhaust shall be
located where maximum dilution can be accomplished. The generator shall be water cooled. The
emergency power source shall be designed to handle nonlinear loads.
16.8.1.2.1 EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENTS
Table 16.8.1, Emergency Power Requirements, outlines the emergency power requirements for
different building heights and particular fire safety systems. Generators are not required by these
criteria unless an analysis of the cost of installation and maintenance of acceptable emergency
power sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power source or as required by
applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction (however, a generator may be required by EPA
regardless of the outcome of this analysis). Automatic switching schemes shall be provided for all
emergency power sources. Where emergency generators are used, their installation shall be in
accordance with NFPA 110 and NEC Article 700.
Table 16.8.1 Emergency Power Requirements
Acceptable Sources of Emergency Power*
Emergency System
Emergency lighting (1% hours)
Exit lighting (1% hours)
Fire alarm
Fire pump
Jockey pump
Elevator
Smoke control
Sprinkler system air compressor
Special extinguishing system power supply (dry chemical,
CO2, or other EPA-approved system)
Fume hoods (full or partial containment or where deemed
necessary)
Building Height f
75 Feet or Less
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,3
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
Building Height f
Over 75 Feet
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,2
1,2
1,2*
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
Note: 1 = Generator; 2 = Connection either to two separate primary sources or to a utility network system; 3 = Battery with charger;
N.R. = Not Required.
* Power source must be capable of providing power to one elevator on a selective basis when the building contains six or fewer elevators.
Otherwise, two elevators must be supplied on a selective basis.
1 The building height for application of the criteria shall be determined by measurement of the distance from grade level of the lowest
accessible floor to ceiling height of the highest occupied floor in the building. Mechanical rooms and penthouse are not considered occupied
floors in this case.
16.8.1.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION
The preferable location for the generator is outdoors. However, whatever the final approved location
of the generator might be, the design professional must adhere to the following location parameters:
locate with exhaust away from fresh air intakes; and locate away from vibration, acoustic, or
electrically sensitive equipment. The location should be such that the generator will be hidden from
view (including screening, as necessary, to appropriately hide the generator) and should be to the rear
16-17
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
of the main facility when located outdoors (the preferred location). The generator should be placed
over vibration isolators and should make use of noise dampers and other devices, as required, to
substantially attenuate noise and vibration resulting from its operation. The generator exhaust
requirements must be addressed and incorporated into the design. The generator shall be equipped
with a low-noise exhaust silencer (hospital or critical type) and weatherproof housing (outdoor
locations). If the generator is located indoors, the size and shape of the generator room, including
usable space around the generator, must be considered and resolved during the facility design phase.
Additionally, fuel supply and location (incorporating code and environmental requirements) must also
be addressed during the design phase.
16.8.1.4 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
For all installations where a generator is provided, an economic analysis shall be done to determine the
economic feasibility of including load-shedding or peak-shaving equipment as part of the installation.
EPA will provide instructions on the possible inclusion of this item in the project after the economic
analysis has been completed. It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to specifically
request these instructions pertaining to the inclusion of this item from EPA after completion of the
economic analysis.
16.8.1.5 FUEL STORAGE TANK
If a diesel-type generator is used, the system shall be provided with a fuel storage tank that is capable
of carrying a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The preferred type of tank is an
aboveground storage tank. If allowed by EPA, the tank may be installed underground. If so, the tank
shall be of double-wall construction and of noncorrosive material with interstitial monitoring
capabilities. The tank shall meet the most current promulgated rules effective on the date of
installation. The design professional shall justify in writing the need or lack of need, whichever may be
the case, for a cathodic protection system for the site and type of construction and equipment specified.
This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission.
16.8.2 EMERGENCY LOADS
In addition to the loads required by NFPA 101, NEC, and the room data sheets, the following loads shall be
connected to the emergency power system:
Fire alarm system
Exit lights
Emergency lighting system3 footcandles minimum for egress; 10 footcandles at switchboards
Critical operations laboratory equipment
Telephone relay system
Certain HVAC systems (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls
All animal care facilities
Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms
Paging system
Selected elevators (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
Gas chromatograph
Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by EPA)
Incubators
X-ray fluorescent analyzer
UPS system
Air-conditioning system associated with computer rooms, UPS room, and environmental rooms
Security systems
Safety alarm systems.
16-18
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.8.3 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power. The application of UPS
systems shall comply with IEEE 446. The design professional shall make a recommendation concerning the
appropriate type of system for a particular facility (i.e., rotary or stationary [static] type). UPS equipment
shall be capable of supplying power through multiple means-(normal, static switch bypass, and total system
bypass). The UPS system shall be sized to provide at least 5 minutes of protection upon loss of normal
power. The UPS system shall be rated for "multi-range" input voltage and shall provide a sinusoidal or, as
a minimum, a quasi-sinusoidal power output wave form. Total system bypass power shall include an
isolation transformer. All components shall be UL listed. The supplied UPS system shall be specified to
operate properly with an emergency generator.
16.8.3.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The UPS system shall operate continuously and in conjunction with the existing building electrical
system to provide precise power for critical equipment loads. The static system shall consist of a solid-
state inverter, a rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch, synchronizing
circuitry, and an internal maintenance bypass switch. The rotary system shall include a solid-state
inverter, a battery charger, a storage battery, an automatic transfer assembly, an internal (automatic)
bypass switch, and a low-voltage transient synchronous generator with flywheel. The UPS system,
along with the supporting equipment, shall be housed in dedicated room(s) under controlled
environmental conditions that meet the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.
16.8.3.2 CODES, STANDARDS, AND DOCUMENTS
The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following:
NFPA
NEMA
IEEE inverter standards
ASA
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
National Electrical Code (NEC)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
Local codes.
16.8.3.3 ON-LINE REVERSE TRANSFER SYSTEM
The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line-reverse transfer system in the following modes:
Normal (Static). The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The
rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and it
shall in turn supply direct current (DC) power to the inverter while simultaneously float-charging
the battery.
Normal (Rotary). The critical load shall receive power from the motor-generator set which is
supplied power from the utility company. While the motor-generator supplies power to the critical
load, it simultaneously charges the batteries.
Emergency (Static). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied
by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains its power from the storage battery. There
shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.
Emergency (Rotary). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the control logic shall turn on
the inverter which is supplied power from the battery. The inverter then supplies AC power to the
16-19
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
motor-generator set which subsequently supplies power to the critical load. The inverter shall be
capable of full-power operation within 50 milliseconds after loss of utility power.
Recharge. Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to complete discharge of the battery),
the rectifier/battery charger powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery. This
shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.
Bypass mode. If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal
failures, the static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the utility alternating
current (AC) source without interruption. Automatic transfer of the load shall be accomplished
after the UPS inverter output synchronizes to the utility alternating current (AC) source (or the
bypass input source). Once the sources are synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall
transfer the load from the bypass input source to the UPS inverter output by paralleling the two
sources and then disconnecting the bypass AC input source. Overlap shall be limited to one-half
cycle.
Maintenance bypass/test. Test switching shall be provided to simulate a normal power outage,
transfer the load to the source of backup power through the UPS, and switch the load back to the
normal power source upon completion of the test.
Downgrade. If only the battery will be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be
disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external battery
disconnect. The UPS shall continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage
protection and transient characteristics.
16.8.3.4 UPS OUTPUT
The UPS output shall have the following characteristics:
Frequency: 60 hertz (Hz) nominal +0.5 Hz (when synchronized to the bypass AC input source).
Output voltage transient characteristics for:
25 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ฑ4 percent
50 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ฑ6 percent
100 percent voltage fluctuation load step change +10 percent/-8 percent.
Output voltage transient response: The system output voltage shall return to within +1 percent of
the steady state value within 30 milliseconds.
Output voltage regulation: The steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than +1.0
percent from no load to full load.
16.8.3.5 OUTPUT FREQUENCY REGULATION
The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency ฑ0.1 percent when the UPS
inverter is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line and also when the utility
alternating current (AC) source is not available (i.e., operation from battery source only).
16.8.3.6 SYSTEM OVERLOAD
System overload is a load of at least 125 percent of the system rating for a period of 10 minutes, and
150 percent current for 1 minute. Overloads in excess of 170 percent of the UPS rating, on an
instantaneous basis, or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall cause the static
bypass transfer switch to reverse-transfer and allow the AC bypass input source to supply the necessary
16-20
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
fault-clearing current. After approximately 5 seconds, the static bypass transfer switch shall
automatically forward-transfer, and normal UPS operation shall resume. If the overload still exists
after the 5-second period, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically reverse-transfer the load
to the AC bypass input source and the UPS inverter shall turn off. The system shall require manual
restart after this sequence.
16.8.3.7 SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
The overall efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 95 percent with the battery fully charged and the
inverter supplying full-rated load.
16.8.3.8 LOCATIONS AND LOADS
The UPS system shall be located in special rooms or in the same room as computer equipment. These
rooms shall have special HVAC equipment to maintain the proper environmental conditions for the
UPS system and its batteries both under normal conditions and during a power outage.
UPS LOAD
The UPS load will consist of the equipment and outlets designated for UPS power connection in
the room data sheets.
BATTERY ROOM
The battery room for the UPS shall be well ventilated so as not to allow an explosive mixture of
hydrogen to accumulate. Refer to Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this manual for the
following battery room requirements: minimum air change rate, make-up air, monitoring,
ventilation, emergency eyewash station, emergency shower, and all other mechanical requirements
for this room. Additionally, these battery rooms shall contain all devices required by the Safety
Manual (including mechanical ventilation, an emergency eyewash station, and a fire/smoke
sensing device). The ventilation fans shall be connected to the emergency power system so that in
the event of normal (utility) power system failure, electrical power to the fans will be maintained.
The installation of the UPS system shall be in accordance with NFPA 111. Explosion-proof wiring
methods, however, are normally not required in battery rooms. The provision for sufficient
diffusion and ventilation of the gases from the battery to prevent the accumulation of an explosive
mixture, as required by this paragraph and Section 15 of this manual, is necessary in order to
prevent classification of the battery room as a hazardous (classified) location, in accordance with
NEC Article 500. A fire- or smoke-sensing device shall be installed in battery rooms. Selection of
this device should be appropriate to the design of the battery room.
16.9 Lightning Protection System
16.9.1 MINIMUM SCOPE
A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as
for facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials. The requirements and installation criteria for
lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and the local building code.
16.9.2 ADDITIONAL SCOPE
For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of
loss due to lightning.
16.9.3 MASTER LABEL
For buildings described in subsection 16.9.1 and for facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780),
equipment, accessories, and material necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system
for all building components should be furnished and installed. The system shall comply with NFPA 780,
16-21
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
UL 96A, and Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) 175. All cables, lightning rods, and accessories shall be
copper. All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.
16.9.3.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The installed system shall be unobtrusive, with conductors built during construction (so they are
concealed). The system shall also be properly flashed and watertight. Installation shall be done in
conformance with shop drawings prepared by the supplier and approved by the EPA.
16.9.3.2 CERTIFICATION DELIVERY
Before the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
supervising architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.
16.10 Seismic Requirements
16.10.1 SEISMIC REVIEW
The design and construction of all new EPA facilities shall comply with those standards and practices that
are substantially equivalent to, or exceed, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP)
Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures.
16.11 Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Power Systems
16.11.1 COMPUTER POWER
All ADP equipment in a centralized ADP room shall be connected to the uninterruptible power supply
(UPS) power. Utility or emergency input power to the UPS system shall be 480 Volt, 3 phase. Output
power from the UPS system shall be 208Y/120 Volts. Power distribution units (PDUs) shall have
208Y/120 volt input and output power. UPS and PDUs shall have monitoring capabilities with transient
protection. PDU shall limit the cable runs to 100 feet from the PDU to the ADP equipment. The user will
provide a list of equipment cable types and plug types. All circuits shall have separate neutrals. All UPS
units and PDUs shall be connected to a central monitoring and control system.
16.11.2 NON-UPS/PDU OUTLETS
Non-UPS/PDU outlets shall be spaced every 20 feet around the computer room for utility use (vacuums,
drills, etc.).
16.11.3 LIGHTING
Under-floor lights with cutoff timer(s) shall be installed in computer room(s). Room lighting for computer
rooms shall be either indirect lighting, to reduce glare on terminal screens, or overhead lighting of the
parabolic type, to reduce eye strain.
16.11.4 GROUNDING
All computer power shall be grounded to the isolated grounding system described in paragraph 16.4.8 of
this section. This isolated grounding system can only be connected to the general facility power grounding
system at the main building service entrance grounding electrode or at the isolation transformer/equipment
grounding on a separately derived system. A grounding mat may be locally provided to the computer room
to connect the non current carrying metal parts of the critical equipment, but this mat must be electrically
isolated from the general facility grounding system in order to meet the NEC.
16.12 Cathodic Protection
16.12.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
An investigation shall be conducted and a determination made, on whether cathodic protection is required
for buried utilities. The design professional shall justify in writing the need or lack of need, whichever may
16-22
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
be the case, of a cathodic protection system for the type of construction and equipment specified for each
specific buried utility. This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission. For additional
information on corrosion control requirements for underground fuel storage tanks, see paragraph entitled
"Fuel Storage Tank" of this section. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be
recommended to satisfy the local conditions. The cathodic protection system shall be designed by a
professional who is certified by NACE International as a Cathodic Protection Specialist or Corrosion
Specialist or who is a registered professional corrosion engineer. Additionally, the design professional must
have a minimum of 3 years experience in similar installations. The cathodic protection design, as a
minimum, shall be in compliance with the applicable NACE International standard corresponding with the
type of structure that is to be cathodically protected. The installed cathodic protection system shall be able
to provide protective currents to the intended structure meeting the minimum performance criteria as
defined in NACE International standards.
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways, Enclosures)
16.13.1 CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE
Special consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (such as
chemical storage areas, some laboratories, and areas near air exhausts for spaces with corrosive fumes). All
raceways to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the raceway manufacturer for the
atmosphere in which they will be installed.
16.13.1.1 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels, switches, breakers) shall have the proper NEMA
rating for the atmosphere in which the equipment is being installed.
16.13.2 SALTWATER ATMOSPHERE
Only hot-dipped galvanized steel and PVC conduit and fittings are acceptable for buildings in salty weather
16.13.3 EXTREME COLD
Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers, and switch gear installed in weatherproof
enclosures of the facility that are subject to extremely cold temperatures should be provided with
supplemental heating within the enclosures.
16.14 Communication Systems
16.14.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA SYSTEMS
One telephone outlet and one Local Area Network (LAN) computer shall be provided per 125 net usable
square feet (NUSF) of office space. If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one
telephone outlet and one LAN outlet will be required per workstation or single module space. One
telephone outlet and one Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS) shall be provided per single
laboratory module space. One LIMS outlet shall be provided per 125 NUSF of laboratory office space.
The exact location for all communications/data outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early
design stage. All telephone and computer outlets shall be provided with PVC or equivalent corrosion-
resistant cover/face plates; metal covers shall not be used.
16.14.2 VIDEO CONFERENCE ROOMS
Cabled video teleconference space (CVTS) communication wiring should be limited to 300 unrepeated
cable runs. The network interface (service delivery point) to support CVTS rooms will be located in the
network control facility (NCF); therefore, CVTS room locations must be within 300 cable feet of the NCF
and have conduit access for 22-gauge shielded solid copper twisted-pair wire. Longer runs may require
16-23
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
repeaters and require additional expenses, but they must remain within the 1.5-decibel loss specifications of
the technical advisory manuscript concerning the wiring.
16.14.3 RECORDING SYSTEMS
In areas where conferences are to be recorded, built-in microphones shall be provided along with a closet
containing the recording equipment. Wiring shall be installed from the microphone (omnidirectional) to
recorders for a complete system.
16.14.4 SATELLITE DISHES
An area may be required for the installation of satellite dishes that will be used for telecommunications,
television reception, or data transmission. If required, an area shall also be designed for location of satellite
dish head-in equipment (receivers and transmitters). Where use of a satellite dish is required, power shall
be furnished for all head-in equipment. Cable raceways shall be provided from the satellite dish location to
the room for the head-in equipment and from the head-in equipment to each outlet served and to the
controller location for the dish. All equipment and cable will be furnished by EPA.
16.14.5 TELEVISION BROADCAST SYSTEMS
In facilities from which a local or national television station will be broadcasting live meetings or press
conferences, a complete raceway (or cable-tray) system shall be furnished to allow the station to run cables
from the designated television van parking areas to the conference/press room. If cable tray is provided, it
shall be completely accessible throughout its length.
16.14.5.1 WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
In addition, weatherproof receptacles or disconnect switches (fused) shall be provided at the van
parking areas to allow each van to receive power from the building.
16.14.6 MICROWAVE COMMUNICATIONS
Where required, an area shall be designed for the installation of a microwave dish that will be used for
telecommunications or data transmission. An area shall also be designed for microwave head-in equipment.
Power shall be furnished for all head-in equipment. Cable raceways shall be provided from the microwave
dish location to the room for the head-in equipment and, from there, to the room where the controller will
be located. All equipment and cables will be furnished by EPA.
16.14.7 OTHER
A complete raceway system shall be furnished for other communication/data systems (systems not otherwise
mentioned in subsection 16.14). The raceway system shall include raceways, outlet and junction boxes, and
power connections (direct or receptacle) for all associated equipment to be located in the facility. Unless
otherwise directed by EPA, all cabling and equipment for these other systems will be furnished by EPA.
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems
16.15.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Fire alarm systems must be installed in accordance with NEC Article 760 and NFPA 72. Devices that
activate fire alarm systems and evacuation alarms must be completely separated from other building systems
such as environmental monitoring systems and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm system
(e.g., fan shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of the fire alarm
system must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated in this subsection. In general,
auxiliary functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm system
but by other mechanical or electrical systems. The main fire alarm system should supervise any auxiliary
system (e.g., computer room). Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible (and visual,
if applicable) devices of the auxiliary system in the associated alarm area. The fire protection system shall
16-24
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
be in compliance with the most current codes and publications, as listed below (see other sections for
additional codes and standards):
Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13
Standpipe and Hose Systems, NFPA 14
National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, NFPA 90A
Life Safety Code, NFPA 101
GSA handbook PBS-P100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service
UF AS and ADA Requirements
Safety Manual, Chapter 2
Local codes.
16.15.1.1 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Pull stations shall be installed adjacent to all exit doors and all exit stairs' access doors. Automatic
smoke and temperature rise detectors shall be installed as required by all applicable national and local
codes and as determined by the standard practice. Activation of a manual station or any of the
automatic detectors shall set off the fire alarm system throughout the building or the building zone, and
shall send an alarm signal to the local fire department or a central station service unit. Activation of
any automatic fire suppression system (sprinkler or chemical) shall set off the fire alarm as described
for a manual station but will also send a suppression activated signal to the local fire department or a
central station service unit, as required. The fire alarm system shall be totally supervised. All alarm
initiating devices, all the alarm conditions indicating devices, all fire alarm signal carrying circuits, the
fire alarm back up battery system, the circuits carrying the fire alarm signal to the local fire station or to
a central station service unit, all the sprinkler system and/or standpipe system valves and switches
operational position shall be supervised. The supervisory system alert signal shall be different than a
fire alarm signal and shall be transmitted both to the local fire station or central station service unit and
to the building's fire alarm control panel. The buildings shall be divided into fire zones and the
elevator lobbies smoke detection system shall have its own zones with its own identifiable codes or
labeling system. Activation of any smoke detector shall send a pre-alarm conditions signal to the local
fire station or central station service unit and to the building's fire alarm control panel.
16.15.1.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS
Unless the most recent edition of NFPA 101 has more stringent requirements, fire alarm systems are
required, as a minimum, in any office, computer room, library, classroom, meeting room, cafeteria, or
similar business-type occupancy, if the occupancies have any of these characteristics:
The occupancies are two or more stories above the level of exit discharge.
The occupancies may have 100 or more occupants, above or below grade.
The occupancies consist of more than 50,000 square feet.
A human voice, gas-powered horn, or other similar nonelectric system cannot efficiently or
effectively be used to alert occupants to an emergency.
Storage occupancies equal to or larger than 100,000 square feet shall have fire alarm systems. All
other occupancies shall follow the requirements in NFPA 101.
16.15.1.3 MANUAL SYSTEMS INPUT
Each system shall provide manual input from manual fire alarm stations, which shall be located in exit
or public corridors adjacent to each stairway and to each exit from the building. Additional stations
may be provided at any location where there is a special risk or where the travel distance to the nearest
station exceeds 200 feet. As a general principle, the station shall be placed so that a person using it will
16-25
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
be between the fire and the exit. If necessary, emergency telephone systems shall be provided in the
exit stairs or in another protected location, as indicated for manual fire alarm stations. In addition,
telephones shall be provided at each elevator lobby, at the ground floor, and on alternate elevator-
capture floors.
16.15.1.4 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS INPUT
Automatic fire detection shall be provided as described below.
A water flow switch shall be provided for each floor or fire area protected by wet-pipe sprinkler
systems. Other types of sprinkler systems will be activated by a pressure switch at the dry or
deluge valve only.
Automatic heat or smoke detection shall not be installed in lieu of automatic sprinkler protection
unless this decision is otherwise supported through recognized equivalency methodologies (NFPA
101 A). Detection shall be provided where a preaction or deluge sprinkler system exists.
Automatic sprinkler protection requirements are described in Section 13, Special Construction, of
this Manual.
In accordance with NFPA 72, smoke detectors shall be provided for essential electronic
equipment, air-handling systems, and elevator lobbies and machine rooms. All smoke detectors
shall be approved for their intended use and installation. Smoke detectors require periodic
maintenance, and arrangements for this should be made at the time of installation to ensure proper
operation and to guard against false alarm or unintended discharge.
Heat and smoke detection in air-handling systems shall comply with NFPA 90A. Detectors, when
required, shall be located in the main supply duct downstream of a fan filter and in the return air
ducts for each floor or fire area.
When heat and smoke detectors are installed, they shall be designed and installed in accordance
with NFPA 72.
Special hazard protection systems shall initiate an alarm. These special systems include, but are
not limited to, dry chemical extinguishing systems, elevator recall systems, and computer detection
systems.
Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:
Operation of generator
Operation of fire pump
Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump, or extinguishing system
Failure of any of the alarm initiating devices or circuits (open, grounding, etc.)
Failure of any of the alarm conditions indicating devices or their circuits (open, short,
grounded, etc.)
Malfunctioning of the fire protection system battery back-up system
Failure of any of the signal circuits to equipment that respond to alarm initiating devices (e.g.,
signal circuits to elevators, to automatic fire doors, to smoke dampers, to automatic valves of
dry sprinkler systems)
Failure of one of the circuits/channels that carries the fire alarm signal to the remote,
constantly manned Central Fire Station
Loss of air pressure for dry-pipe sprinkler system
Loss of a central processing unit (CPU) or of CPU peripheral equipment in a multiplex system
Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks, or reservoirs
16-26
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
When control valves in the supply or distribution lines of automatic sprinkler systems, fire
pumps, standpipe systems, or interior building fire main systems are closed either a maximum
of two complete turns of a valve wheel or 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less.
(In this case, the signal will be transmitted by tamper switches.)
16.15.1.5 AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS OUTPUT
The signal to all alarm condition indicating devices, the Central Fire Station, and all equipment, fire
doors, etc., that respond to a fire alarm shall be transmitted automatically once a fire alarm station or a
detector is activated. In no case shall these alarms depend on manual action. Various outputs include
those listed below.
Elevator control smoke detector actuation shall sound an alarm at the fire alarm panel, recall
elevators, and notify the fire department but shall not initiate an audible alarm signal to building
occupants or start any smoke control system, except as noted below. The smoke detector alarm
signal shall be received at a central station or some other location that is constantly attended. This
will ensure an investigative response to the alarm.
General area smoke detectors shall initiate an evacuation alarm for the portion of the building or
area in which they are used to increase the level of protection. In such situations, smoke detectors
and fire alarm panels equipped to provide alarm verification maybe desirable.
All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous. Where public address systems are provided for
the facility, there shall be provisions for making announcements from the main fire alarm panel or
from an attended location where the fire alarm signal is received. The public address system does
not have to be an integral part of the fire alarm system. Coded alarm signals are unacceptable.
The output of special extinguishing systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include the
actuation of the building fire alarm system. Special detection systems shall indicate a supervisory
signal at the fire alarm panel.
If an entire building can be evacuated within 5 minutes, the fire alarm shall sound either
throughout the building or on selected floors. Where selective evacuation is used on the basis of
local code requirements, features such as smoke control and automatic sprinklers shall be
provided, as necessary, to ensure the safety of occupants remaining in the building.
For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below, and the
floor above are expected to relocate or evacuate. These occupants must automatically receive that
message and be notified of the emergency. Where automatic prerecorded voices are used, message
arrangement and content shall be designed to fit the needs of the individual building (e.g., bilingual
messages where appropriate).
The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in
accordance with NFPA 72 and Title III standards of ADA and UFAS, as applicable.
Every alarm reported on a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the
following:
A transmitter listed by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective
signaling system conforming to NFPA 72. The central-station facility shall be listed by UL;
automatic telephone dialers shall not be used.
16-27
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local fire
department, in accordance with NFPA 72.
A direct supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a
constantly manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.
As a last resort, an alternate method approved by SHEMD.
Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 seconds after the initiation of an
alarm. The specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel after
they arrive.
A supervisory condition shall transmit a separate signal to a central station, different from an alarm
signal. No more than one supervisory signal shall be provided for an entire building. Refer to the
automatic systems input information in subsection 16.15.1.3 above for required supervisory
conditions.
Additional automatic actions shall be performed for smoke control, elevator capture, and door
closings. Smoke control and elevator capture shall be coordinated with the evacuation plan for a
building. (A summary of system actions is shown in Table 1 6.15.1.)
Table 16.15.1 Status Condition
Input Device
Output Function
Transmit signal to fire department
Indicate location of device on control panel and annunciator
Cause audible signal at control panel
Initiate emergency operation of elevators
Initiate smoke control sequence
Result in a record on system printer
Cause audible alarm signal throughout building
(voice or nonvoice)
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
B
X
X
X
X*
X
c
X
X
X
X
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E
X
X
X
X
F
X
X
A = Manual fire alarm station
B = Smoke detectors (other than duct)
C = Duct smoke detectors
D = Water flow detectors and automatic extinguishing systems
E = Supervisory device
F = Emergency telephone
Note: Only smoke detectors associated with the elevators (e.g., the elevator lobby) must initiate elevator emergency operation.
16.15.1.6 MANUAL SYSTEMS OUTPUT
Any action that can be performed automatically must be able to be initiated manually from the control
center or fire alarm system control panel. A smoke control panel shall be provided when smoke control
systems are required. The control center, or fire alarm system control panel, shall have the capability
of canceling and restoring any action that has been initiated automatically or manually.
16.15.1.7 SYSTEMS FEATURES
All systems shall include the following:
Indication of normal or abnormal conditions
16-28
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Annunciation of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions by zone
Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone
Ringback feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.
16.15.1.8 HIGH-RISE SYSTEMS FEATURES
For buildings 12 stories tall or higher, the systems shall also include the following:
Permanent record of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions via printer
Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.
All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements ofNFPA
70 (NEC)andNFPA72.
16.15.1.9 RELIABILITY
The maximum elapsed time from the moment that an alarm is activated to the moment that all alarm
condition indicating devices and all alarm responding equipment are in operation shall not exceed 10
seconds. In accordance with and as defined in NFPA 72, the design professional shall indicate by class
and style, the initiating device, notification appliance, and signaling line circuits, which shall define the
circuit's capability to continue to operate during specified fault conditions. As a minimum, the system
shall be designed such that any system alarm input device shall be capable of initiating an alarm during
a single break, or a single ground fault condition, on any system alarm-initiating circuit. In addition,
any signaling line circuit of a multiplex system (other than combination multiplex-point wired systems)
shall also perform its intended service during a wire-to-wire short or a combination of a single break
and a single ground of a circuit. The system shall also be designed requiring the provision of a looped
conduit system such that if the conduit and all conductors within are severed at any point, all indicating
device circuits (IDC), notification appliance circuits (NAC) and signal line circuits (SLC) will remain
functional.
16.15.1.10 CODE COMPLIANCE, MANUAL SYSTEM
A complete, code-complying fire alarm system shall be designed. For small buildings, and where
allowed by code, the system may be a manual system only. The manual system shall include manual
stations, fire alarm annunciator signals, and an annunciator panel indicating the zone where the alarm
was initiated. The alarm shall be sent to the local fire station.
16.15.1.11 CODE COMPLIANCE, AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
In large facilities, or where required by code, the systems shall be automatic and shall include smoke
detectors, manual pull stations, rate of rise detectors, alarm bells or horns and strobe lights, sprinklers,
and a central annunciator panel. Suppression systems shall be tied to the central annunciator panel.
The fire alarm system shall be tied to the local fire station in the area. Smoke detectors shall be
provided in all corridors and designated laboratory modules.
16.15.1.12 CENTRAL, LOCAL, AND PROPRIETARY ALARM SYSTEM
The building(s) shall be protected by a central, local, proprietary-type fire alarm system. Location of
pull stations, bells, automatic fire detectors, and other equipment pertinent to the fire alarm system shall
be in accordance with the referenced NFPA and local codes. When there is a difference between the
NFPA codes and local codes, compliance with the most stringent code will be required. Visual alarms
are required throughout the facility for handicapped fire warning.
16.15.1.13 CENTRAL STATION SERVICE
The building(s) shall be protected by a local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a UL-listed fire
department station or a central station service unit meeting the requirements ofNFPA 72.
16-29
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.1.14 FIRE ZONES
Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by NFPA and state codes. Graphic
annunciators shall be provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These
annunciators shall clearly show the outline of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating
devices. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each device shall have its own address, which
shall report to monitoring devices in the English language for clear and quick identification of the
alarm source).
16.15.1.15 WIRE CLASS AND CIRCUIT SURVIVABILITY
The fire alarm system-initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, Style 7, and alarm-indicating
circuits (visual and audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72).
16.15.1.16 CONTROL CENTER
Building(s) must have a control center where fire-related control panels are located. This control
center must be located next to the main entrance and shall be separated from the rest of the building by
1-hour fire resistive construction. Emergency power, room illumination, room HVAC, telephone, and
fire protection systems that operate independently of the effect of a fire anywhere in the building shall
be provided in the control center.
16.15.1.17 HELD-OPEN FIRE DOORS
Fire doors that are normally held open by electromagnetic devices should be released by the activation
of any automatic detection, extinguishing, or manual alarm signaling device. Additional information on
door requirements may be found in Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual. Maintenance,
operation, testing, and equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.
16.15.1.18 ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
The fire alarm system shall be totally supervised. All initiating device circuits (including those for
smoke detectors), signal line device circuits, and notification appliance circuits must be electrically
supervised. The system shall monitor all electrically supervised circuits. A trouble alarm and visual
indicator shall activate upon a single break, open, or ground fault condition which prevents the required
normal operation of the system. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (ac)
supply, loss of stand-by generator power, low battery voltage, removal of alarm zone module (card, PC
board), and disconnection of the circuit used for transmitting alarm signals off-premises. The system
shall also provide electrical supervision (capable of detecting any open, short, or ground) for circuits
used for supervisory signal services (e.g., sprinkler systems, valves). The fire alarm control panel shall
provide supervised relays for HVAC shutdown. An override at the HVAC panel shall not be provided.
The fire alarm control panel shall provide the required monitoring and supervised control outputs
needed to accomplish elevator recall. All supervisory signals (except for the transmitter disconnect
switch provided to allow testing and maintenance of the system without activating the transmitter) shall
be transmitted both to the fire station or central station service unit and to the building's fire alarm
control panel.
16.15.1.19 EMERGENCY POWER
Emergency power shall be provided for the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 101,
and paragraph 16.8 of this section. If an emergency generator is available at the facility meeting the
requirements of NFPA 72, then the fire alarm system must be connected to it; otherwise a battery
backup with charger, meeting the code requirements specified herein, shall be provided. Emergency
power must be able to operate the fire alarm system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours and to
operate all alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes.
16.15.2 SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM
Requirements for this system are as follows.
16-30
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.2.1 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
A central safety alarm system annunciator panel that will indicate any abnormal condition shall be
designed for the facility. The annunciator panel shall include all relays, switches, and controls, as
required for system operation. The basic operation of the panel shall indicate any abnormal condition
in a function supervised by the annunciator system, causing the associated indication to flash and the
common audible signal to sound continuously. The audible signal can be silenced at any time by the
operation of an "acknowledge" push button. The audible signal will automatically sound again with
any new indication. The visual signal shall become steady when acknowledged.
16.15.2.2 INDICATING PLATES
Indicating plates shall be red with filled-in place characters. All lamps in the annunciator are tested
simultaneously by pressing the remotely mounted "Lamp Test" push button. The annunciator shall
indicate the following systems and equipment statuses:
Fire alarm initiation
HVAC system motors alarms
Emergency generator running
Freezer and cold box temperature alarms
UPS system failure
Fume hood and bio-safety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow)
Location of activated detection, extinguishing or manual alarm device
Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
Acid neutralization system alarms
Power failure
Incubator temperature alarm
Gas alarm
Sensor (gas) alarm
Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm
Additional systems to be identified by the agency.
16.15.3 SECURITY SYSTEMS
General requirements and requirements for particular types of systems and facility and site areas are as
follows.
16.15.3.1 GENERAL
A complete security system shall be designed for the facility. All security systems shall be operated
and monitored from a central point selected by EPA. All security systems shall have a primary and an
emergency power source.
16.15.3.1.1 STANDBY BATTERIES
Standby batteries or a UPS shall be furnished to power the system automatically in the event of
commercial power failure. If the facility has a generator, batteries shall ensure that there is no loss
of power to central equipment until the generator takes over. An alarm shall not be generated
when the equipment transfers from AC to DC operation as it does from DC to AC operation. If the
facility does not have an emergency generator, sufficient batteries shall be provided to power the
controller and necessary devices to prevent unauthorized entry into the building (electronic locks
shall stay in the locked position upon power loss but shall still allow emergency egress). Batteries
shall be chargeable. If batteries lose charge, an alarm condition shall indicate this at the control
console.
16-31
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.3.2 ACCESS SYSTEMS
A complete building access system shall be designed as an on-line type that reports to a central
controller. The professional designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the
design of similar installations.
16.15.3.2.1 KEY CARD CONTROL
Key card control shall be provided for all entry to the facility. The key card reader should read
key cards with numbering encoded within the card. The card reader shall be capable of operating
in an off-line mode to allow persons to enter and exit without recording of card numbers. The card
reader shall also be capable of operating in an on-line mode, which causes the card reader to report
into a central controller that provides additional security checks on the key card and provides a
printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the person entering or leaving the premises. The
system shall be of the anti-passback type. In addition, one key access lock and card reader shall be
furnished inside the building for every 5,000 square feet of gross floor area (in addition to the
vestibules) and at entry to controlled computer areas.
16.15.3.2.2 COMPUTERIZED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
The computerized access control system shall be capable of programming access cards by hour
and day. The system shall be designed with 50 percent spare capacity for both card readers and
number of cards on the system. Key cards, once removed from the system, shall be replaceable
without lowering the integrity of the system or reducing the system's capacity.
16.15.3.2.3 PROXIMITY TYPE CARD READERS
Card readers shall be of the proximity type and shall be suitable for the environment in which they
will be located.
16.15.3.2.4 PROGRAMMABLE KEY PAD, SMALL FACILITIES
For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used at each entry to control access to the
system. The keypad shall be suitable for the environment in which it will be located.
16.15.3.3 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
A design professional with a minimum of 3 years' experience in the design of similar installations shall
design a complete intrusion detection system. The intrusion detection system shall protect all grade
level doors, operable windows, and openings leading into the facility, as well as roof hatches and roof
access doors. Operable windows shall be lockable, and accessible windows shall be equipped with an
alarm. Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an
alarm. All floor telecommunications closets shall be locked with dead bolt locking devices. In
addition to installing perimeter protection, the design professional shall equip a minimum of 10 interior
doors with an alarm. It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to coordinate with EPA for
the locations of the 10 interior doors to be equipped with the alarms; locations shall be as directed by
EPA. Door switches shall be of the balanced magnetic type.
16.15.3.3.1 CENTRAL CONTROL, REMOTELY MONITORED
The entire system shall be monitored at the central control desk of the facility and remotely
monitored either on the campus, by an alarm company, or by the local law enforcement agency.
16.15.3.4 SITE ACCESS SYSTEMS
One alarm zone with an infrared beam shall be provided to monitor vehicles passing through the gate of
the fenced area. The beam should be positioned to monitor the entire length of the fence on the side
with the gate. The alarm zone shall be monitored at the central alarm desk (as part of the intrusion
detection system) by remote monitoring of the same type as the intrusion detection system. One zone
16-32
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
and an infrared beam detection system shall be provided for each location where there is a gate in the
fenced-in area of the site.
16.15.3.5 CLOSED-CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY SYSTEMS
A complete closed-circuit television (CCTV) security system shall be designed. The professional
designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the design of similar installations.
Conduit and wiring shall be installed for the system and a camera shall be installed at all entrance and
exit areas. The location of the camera shall be suitable for monitoring persons' movements when they
are entering or leaving the building. An emergency circuit shall provide power for each camera
location. Conduit, wiring, cameras, and all other appropriate monitoring equipment shall also be
installed in all parking lots, loading docks, and computer areas.
16.15.3.5.1 CAMERAS, FIXED OR PAN-TILT-ZOOM
Cameras shall be of the fixed or pan-tilt-zoom type, low light color, as required for each specific
location. Cameras shall be housed in proper enclosures for the environment in which they are to
operate (e.g., enclosures with defrosters or heaters, weatherproof enclosures, corrosion-resistant or
vandal-proof enclosures).
16.15.3.5.2 CAMERAS, MONITORED AND CONTROLLED
All cameras shall be monitored and controlled at the facility's central control station. Monitors
shall be event driven. A recording device shall be provided to record unauthorized access (control
by guard). A 120-volt single-duplex receptacle (emergency power) shall be provided immediately
next to all CCTV camera locations.
16.15.3.5.3 CCTV SECURITY CAMERAS, LOADING DOCKS
CCTV cameras shall be provided to monitor entry and exit from the loading dock areas. CCTV
monitors (in addition to that at the central console for the loading dock areas) shall be provided in
the loading dock office to provide identification of delivery vehicles before the loading dock doors
are opened.
16.15.3.6 BUILDING PERIMETER SYSTEMS
A complete grade-level perimeter intrusion detection system shall be designed. This system shall be in
addition to the intrusion detection system described above and shall be monitored at the same control
panel provided for the intrusion detection system.
16.15.3.6.1 ULTRASONIC PROTECTION
Ultrasonic protection should be furnished to protect the grade-level, glass-enclosed office area and
any other area that contains exterior glass at grade level. The ultrasonic control panel shall be the
type that controls nominally 20 pairs of transmitters and receivers. Input should be connected into
the main alarm panels as a separate zone. Sufficient transmitter-receiver pairs shall be installed to
protect the entire office area and other grade level areas with exterior glass.
16.15.3.7 DATA PROCESSING
A complete access-intrusion detection system shall be designed for all data processing areas. A card
reader and balanced magnetic switch shall be provided at each door leading into the data processing
areas. Card readers shall be of the proximity type. The system shall be monitored at the central control
station for the facility. The control computer shall be capable of programming access cards by hour
and day. The central controller shall also furnish a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the
person entering or leaving the data processing area. The system shall be of the anti-passback type.
16-33
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.3.7.1 COMPUTER AREA DOORS
If a card access system is being furnished for other doors in the facility, the same cards shall work
for the computer area doors (if so encoded for certain personnel).
16.15.3.7.2 CENTRAL CONTROL DOOR MONITORING
The door shall be monitored at the central control station in case it is left open or the card access
system is bypassed.
16.15.3.8 PARKING CONTROLS
The parking facility(s) shall be enclosed and equipped with a perimeter sensor system and lockable
gates. The gates shall be equipped with a computerized access control system. EPA card readers shall
be installed in parallel with any other card readers (if required) on all the access roads.
16.15.3.8.1 ACCESS SYSTEM
The parking control access system shall have all the components discussed above for access
systems. For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used in lieu of a card reader.
The same cards used for building access shall operate the parking controls (if so encoded).
16.15.4 DISASTER EVACUATION SYSTEM
If the facility is located in an area prone to tornados or hurricanes, a warning/evacuation alarm system for
the building shall be included. The system shall provide for building evacuation in accordance with the
facility's emergency preparedness plan, which shall be coordinated with the community's emergency
preparedness plan.
16.15.5 EXIT LIGHTING AND MARKINGS
The requirements for exit lighting and marking are contained in NFPA 101 and the local building code.
Exit lighting and exit signs shall be provided to clearly indicate the location of exits in conformance
with 29 CFR ง1910.36 and ง1910.37 and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). The means of egress,
exterior steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent accidents.
Internally illuminated signs shall meet the following criteria:
Emergency lighting for the area shall conform to OSHA and the Life Safety Code and shall
provide at least 5 footcandles on the sign surface.
Exit signs shall be at least 8 inches high by 12!/2 inches long.
Letters shall be at least 6 inches high.
The maximum physical distance to a visual sign shall not exceed 100 feet. In addition, an exit sign
shall be visible from all points in the corridor.
16.16 Commissioning
Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning requirements.
END OF SECTION 16
16-34
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix A
American Concrete Pumping AHA
Association
P.O. Box 4307
1034 Tennessee St.
Vallejo, CA 94590 AHLI
ACSM American Congress on Surveying and
Mapping
210 Little Falls St. AHMA
Falls Church, VA 22046
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
(For employment questions)
U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity AI
Commission
ADA Legal Services
1801 L St., NW
Washington, DC 20507 AIA
(For transportation questions)
U.S. Department of Transportation
Office of Assistant General Counsel AIA / NA
for Regulation and Enforcement
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
(Forpublic accommodations questions) AIHA
U.S. Department of Justice
Office of Americans with Disabilities
Act
P. O. Box 66118
Washington, DC 20035-6118 AIC
(For telecommunications questions)
Federal Communications Commission
Consumer Assistance AISC
1919 M St.,NW
Washington, DC 20554
AISI
AITC
(For architectural accessibility
questions)
Access Board
1331 F St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20004-1111
AGA American Gas Association, Inc.
1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22209
AGC Associated General Contractors of ALSC
America
1957 East St., NW
Washington, DC 20006
American Hardboard Association
520 N. Hicks Rd.
Palantine, IL 60067
American Home Lighting Institute
435 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1717
Chicago, IL 60611
American Hardware Manufacturers
Association
931 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173
Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740
American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006
Asbestos Information Association/
North America
1745 Jefferson Davis Hwy., Suite 509
Arlington, VA 22202
American Industrial Hygiene
Association
2700 Prosperity Ave., Suite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031
American Institute of Constructors
20 S. Front St.
Columbus, OH 43215
American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.
One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001
American Iron and Steel Institute
1101 17th St., NW, Suite 1300
Washington, DC 20036
American Institute of Timber
Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140
Englewood, CO 80112
American Lumber Standards
Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
A-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix A
AMCA
ANL
ANS
ANSI
APA
APA
APFA
API
AREMA
ARI
ARMA
ARTBA
Air Movement and Control
Association
30 West University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
Argonne National Laboratory
9800 South Cass Ave.
Argonne, IL 60439
American Nuclear Society
555 North Kensington Ave.
LaGrange Park, IL 60525
American National Standards
Institute
25 West 43rd Street, 4 floor
New York, NY 10036
APA - The Engineered Wood
Association
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411-0800
Architectural Precast Association
6710 Winkler Road, Suite 8
Ft. Myers, FL 33919
American Pipe Fitting Association
8136 Old Keene Mill Rd., #B-311
Springfield, VA 22152
American Petroleum Institute
1220 L.St.NW
Washington, DC 20037
American Railway Engineering and
Maintenance of Way Association
8201 Corporate Drive, Suite 1125
Landover, MD 20785
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute
1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor
Arlington, VA 22209
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association
6288 Montrose Road
Rockville, MD 20852
American Road and Transportation
Builders Association
1010 Massachusetts Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20001-5402
ASA Acoustical Society of America
500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodberry, NY 11797
American Subcontractors Association
1004 Duke St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc.
1500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 515
Arlington, VA 22209-2495
Associated Specialty Contractors
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
Bethesda, MD 20814
ASCC American Society of Concrete
Construction
426 S. Westgate
Addison, IL 60101
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA20191
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers , Inc.
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
ASID American Society of Interior
Designers
1430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018
ASME American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
United Engineering Center
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
ASPE American Society of Professional
Estimators
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake, CA 91362
A-3
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
ASSE American Society of Sanitary
Engineers
P.O. Box 40362
Bay Village, OH 44140
ASTM American Society for Testing and
Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling
Industries International
25 KSt.,NE, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20002
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
2310 S.Walter Reed Dr.
Arlington, VA 22206
AWS American Welding Society, Inc.
550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.
Miami, FL 33126
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Ave.
Denver, CO 80235
BHMA Builder's Hardware Manufacturers
Association, Inc.
60 E. 42nd St., Room 511
New York, NY 10165
BIA The Brick Industry Association
11490 Commerce Park Dr.
Reston, VA 20191-1525
BMRI Building Materials Research
Institute, Inc.
501 5th Ave.,#1402
New York, NY 10017
BRB Building Research Board
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
BSC Building Systems Council
1201 15th Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005
BSI Building Stone Institute
420 Lexington Ave., Suite 2800
New York, NY 10170
Appendix A
CDA Copper Development Association
260 Madison Ave.
New York, NY 10016
CERC Coastal Engineering Research Center
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
P.O. Box 631
Vicksburg, MA 39180
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
CGA Compressed Gas Association
4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor
Chantilly, VA 20151-2923
CGMI Ceramic Glazed Masonry Institute
P.O. Box 35575
Canton, Ohio 44735
CIEA Construction Industry Employers
Association
625 Ensminger Rd.
Tonawanda, NY 14150
CIMA Construction Industry
Manufacturers Association
111 E. Wisconsin Ave., Suite 940
Milwaukee, WI 53202-4879
CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems
Construction Association
1500 Lincoln Hwy., Suite 202
St. Charles, IL 60174
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
1499 Chain Bridge Rd., Suite 203
McLean, VA 22101
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers
Institute
10015 Old Columbia Road, Suite B-215
Columbia, MD 21046
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of
America
1326 Freeport Road
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
A-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix A
CPMA Construction Products
Manufacturing Council
P.O. Box 21008
Washington, DC 20009-0508
CRA California Redwood Association
405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200
Novato, CA 94949
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
CRSI Concrete Reinforced Steel Institutes
933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
601 Madison St.
Alexandria, VA 22314
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
P.O. Box 1178
Sumas,WA 98295-1178
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute
700 N. Virgil Ave.
Los Angeles, CA 90029
Cooling Tower Institute
P.O. Box 73383
Houston, TX 77273
DFI Deep Foundations Institute
326 Lafayette Avenue
Hawthorne, NJ 07506
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
7711 Old Springhouse Rd.
McLean, VA 22101-3474
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research
Association
245 Riverchase Parkway E., Suite 0
Birmingham, AL 35244
DOE U.S. Department of Energy
1000 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20585
DOE/OSTI DOE/Office of Scientific and
Technical Information
P.O. Box 62
Oak Ridge, TN 37831
DOT U.S. Department of Transportation
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
EIA Electronics Industries Association
2001 Eye St., NW
Washington, DC 20006
EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers
Association
Box 75037
Washington, DC 20013
EO Executive Orders
National Archives and Records
Administration
8th St. and Pennsylvania Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20408
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20460
ESCSI Expanded Shale, Clay and Slate
Institute
6218 MontroseRd.
Rockville, MD 20852
FCC Federal Construction Council
Building Research Board
National Research Council
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
FEMA Federal Emergency Management
Agency
Federal Center Plaza
500 C St., SW
Washington, DC 20472
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
White Lakes Professional Building
3310 Harrison St.
Topeka, KS 66611
FHA Federal Housing Administration
451 7th St., SW, Rm. 3158
Washington, DC 20410
A-5
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
FIPS Federal Information Processing
Standards
National Bureau of Standards
Room 64-B, Technology
Gaithersburg, MD 20899
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and
Research
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA
Appendix A
IAEA International Atomic Energy Agency
Vienna International Center
Wagranerstrasse 5
Post Fach 100
A-1400 Vienna, Austria
IALD International Association of Lighting
Designers
18 E. 16th St., Suite 208
New York, NY 10003
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
USDA Forest Service
One Gifford Pinchot Dr.
Madison, WI 53705-2398
IAPMO International Association of
Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
20001 Walnut DriveS.
Walnut, CA 91789
FPS Forest Products Society
2801 Marshall Ct.
Madison, WI 53705-2295
FR Federal Register
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
710 North Capitol St., NW
Washington, DC 20402
ICAA Insulation Contractors Association of
America
15819 Crabbs Branch Way
Rockville, MD 20855
ICC International Code Council
5203 Leesburg Pike
Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
FS
GA
GBCA
GSA
HPVA
Federal Specifications
Attention: NPFC Code 1052
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
Gypsum Association
1603 Orrington Ave., Suite 1210
Evanston, IL 60201
General Building Contractors
Association
36 S. 18th St.
P.O. Box 15959
Philadelphia, PA 19103
General Services Administration
Public Buildings Service
1800 F St., NW
Washington, DC 20405
Hardwood Plywood and Veneer
Association
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 20195
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers
Association
P.O. Box 1568
Carrollton, Georgia 30112
ICRP International Commission on
Radiological Protection
Maxwell House
Fairview Park
Elmsford, NY 10523
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
IES Institute of Environmental Sciences
940 East Northwest Highway
Mount Prospect, IL 56056
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America
120 Wall Street, Floor 17
New York, NY 10005
IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute
1505 E. Ohio Building
Cleveland, OH 44114
A-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix A
IHEA
IILP
ILIA
IMI
ISDI
LANL
LBL
LLNL
LPI
MBMA
Industrial Heating Equipment
Association
3900 N. Fairfax Drive, Suite 400
Arlington, VA 222093
International Institute of Lath and
Plaster
P.O. Box 1663
Lafayette, CA 94549
Indiana Limestone Institute of
America
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, IN 47421
International Masonry Institute
823 15thSt.,NW, Suite 1001
Washington, DC 20005
Insulated Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967
Los Alamos National Laboratory
P.O. Box 1663
Los Alamos, NM 87545
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
1 Cyclostron Road
Berkeley, CA 94720
Lawrence Livermore National
Laboratory
7000 East Ave.
Livermore, CA 94550
Lightning Protection Institute
3335 N. Arlington Hts. Rd., Suite E
Arlington Hts., IL 60004
Metal Building Manufacturers
Association
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
Mechanical Contractors Association
of America
5410 Grosvenor, Suite 120
Bethesda, MD 20814
MIA Marble Institute of America
33505 StateSt.
Farmington, MI 48024
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers
Association
60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
Northbrook, IL 60062
MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing
Association
600 S. Federal, Suite 400
Chicago, IL 60605
MSS Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180
NBMDA North American Building Material
Distributors Association
1701 Lake Ave., Suite 170
Glenview, IL 60025
N AAMM National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers
600 South Federal St.
Chicago, IL 60605
NACE NACE International
P.O. Box 201009
Houston, TX 72216-1009
NADC National Association of Demolition
Contractors
4415 W. Harrison St.
Hillside, IL 60162
MCAA Mason Contractors Association of
America
33 South Roselle Road
Schaumburg, IL 60193
National Association of Dredging
Contractors
1625 ISt.,NW, Suite 321
Washington, DC 20006
A-7
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
NAEC National Association of Elevator
Contractors
4053 LaVista Rd., Suite 120
Tucker, GA 30084
NAFCD National Association of Floor
Covering Distributors
401 North Michigan Avenue
Suite 2400
Chicago, IL 60611-4267
NAHB National Association of Home
Builders
1201 15th Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005
NAHRO National Association of Housing
Redevelopment Officials
630 Eye Street, NW
Washington, DC 20001
NAPA National Asphalt Pavement
Association
6811 Kenilworth Ave., Suite 620
P.O. Box 517
Riverdale, MD 20737
NAPHCC National Association of Plumbing,
Heating, and Cooling Contractors
P.O. Box 6808
Falls Church, VA 22046
NARSC National Association of Reinforcing
Steel Contractors
10382 Main St.
P.O. Box 225
Fairfax, VA 22030
NASA National Aeronautics and Space
Administration
300 E St., SW
Washington, DC 20546
NAVFAC U.S. Naval Facilities Engineering
Command
Attention Cash Sales/Code 1051
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave.
Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
NAWIC National Association of Women in
Construction
327 S. Adams St.
Fort Worth, TX 76104
Appendix A
NBMA National Building Manufacturers
Association
142 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10016
NBS National Bureau of Standards
(currently National Institute of
Standards and Technology)
NCA National Constructors Association
1101 15th St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20005
NCMA National Concrete Masonry
Association
13750 Sunrise Valley Drive
Herndon, VA 20171
NCRP National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurement
7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800
Bethesda, MD 20814
NCSBCS National Conference of State
Building Codes and Standards
481 Carlisle Dr.
Herndon, VA 22070
NEC National Electrical Code
National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
NECA National Electrical Contractors
Association
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
13th Floor, West Building
Bethesda, MD 20814
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
Institute of Electrical & Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th St.
New York, NY 10017
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
POBox 9101
Quincy, MA 02269
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix A
National Forest Products Association
1250 Connecticut Ave.,NW, Suite 200
Washington, DC 20036
NGA National Glass Association
8200 Greensboro Dr., Suite 302
McLean, VA 22101
NIH National Institutes of Health
U.S. Dept. of Health and Human
Services
9000 Rockville Pike
Bethesda, MD 20892
NOFMA National Oak Flooring
Manufacturers Association
P.O. Box 3009
Memphis, TN 38173-0009
NPA National Particleboard Association
2306 Perkins PL
Silver Spring, MD 20910
NPCA National Paint and Coatings
Association
1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005
NIJ National Institute of Justice
633 Indiana Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20531
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health
200 Independence Ave., SW
RoomVlSH
Washington, DC 20201
NH&RA National Housing & Rehabilitation
Association
1625 Massachusetts Avenue, NW
Suite 601
Washington, DC 20036-4435
NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Association
P.O. Box 6830
Falls Church, VA 22046
NLA National Lime Association
200 North Glebe Road, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203
NLBMDA National Lumber and Building
Material Dealers Association
40 Ivy St., SE
Washington, DC 20003
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration
Washington Science Center, Building 5
6010 Executive Blvd.
Rockville, MD 20852
NRC
NRCA
NRMCA
NSA
NSF
National Precast Concrete
Association
10333 North Meridian St., Suite 272
Indianapolis, IN 46290
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
Publications Division
Washington, DC 20555
National Roofing Contractors
Association
1 O'Hare Center
6250 River Rd.
Rosemont, IL 60018
National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association
900 Spring St.
Silver Spring, MD 20910
National Security Agency/
Central Security Service
FortMeade, MD 20755
National Stone Association
1415 Elliot PL, NW
Washington, DC 20007
NSF International
P.O. Box 130140
789 N. Dixboro Road
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
A-9
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
NSPC National Standard Plumbing Code
Published by: National Association of
Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors
P.O. Box 6808
Falls Church, VA 22040
NSPE National Society of Professional
Engineers
1420 King St.
Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
NTIA National Telecommunications and
Information Administration
Main Commerce Building
Washington, DC 20230
NTIS National Technical Information
Service
5485 Port Royal Rd.
Springfield, VA 22161
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic
Association
3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132
Des Plaines, IL 60018
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers'
Association
400 W. Madison St.
Chicago, IL 60606
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door
Association
1400 East Touhy Ave., Suite 450
Des Plaines, IL 60018
OMB Office of Management and Budget
Old Executive Office Building
Washington, DC 20503
OPCMIA Operative Plasterers' and Cement
Masons' International Association of
the United States and Canada
1125 17thSt.,NW, 6th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20201
Appendix A
PLCA Pipe Line Contractors Association
1700 Pacific Avenue, Suite 4100
Dallas, Texas 75201-4675
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute
209 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60606-6938
PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors
of America
7223 Lee Highway
Falls Church, VA 22046
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
1106 W. 77th St. Dr.
Indianapolis, IN 46260
PHCIB Plumbing-Heating-Cooling
Information Bureau
303 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 711
Chicago, IL 60601
PMI Plumbing Manufacturers Institute
800 Roosevelt Rd., Building C, Suite 20
GlenEllyn, IL 60137
PPI Plastics Pipe Institute
355 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10017
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
8601 North Black Canyon Highway
Suite 103
Phoenix, AZ 85021
RCRC Reinforced Concrete Research
Council
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
401 E. Jefferson Street, Suite 102
Rockville, MD 20850
SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers
Association
225 Reinekers Lane, Suite 625
Alexandria, VA 22314
A-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix A
SBA
scs
Systems Builders Association
P.O. Box 117
West Milton, OH 45383
Soil Conservation Service
U.S. Department of Agriculture
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute
77 Rumford Avenue, Suite 3B
Waltham, MA 02453
SSFI Scaffolding, Shoring, and Forming
Institute, Inc.
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass
Manufacturers Association
111 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 600
Chicago, IL 60601
SJI Steel Joist Institute
3127 10th Ave. North Ext.
Myrtle Beach, SC 295776760
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
2850 South Ocean Boulevard, #114
Palm Beach, FL 33480-6205
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4400 5th Ave.
Pittsburgh, PA 15213
SBIC Sustainable Buildings Industry
Council
1331 H Street, NW, Ste. 1000
Washington, DC 20005
SWI Sealant and Waterproofers Institute
3101 Broadway, Suite 300
Kansas City, MO 64111
Steel Window Institute
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
TCA Tile Council of America
100 Clem son Research Blvd.
Anderson, SC 29625
Stucco Manufacturers Association
2402 Vista Nobleza
Newport Beach, CA 92660
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209
SMWIA Sheet Metal Workers International
Association
1750 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006
SNL Sandia National Laboratories
P.O. Box 5800
Albuquerque, NM 87185
TCAA
TIMA
UL
Tilt-Up Concrete Association
PO Box 204
Mt. Vernon, IA 52314
Tile Contractors Association of
America, Inc.
4 East 113th Terrace
Kansas City, MO 64114
Thermal Insulation Manufacturers
Association
7 Kirby Plaza
Mount Kisco, NY 10549
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062
A-ll
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
USACE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
441 G Street, NW
Washington, DC 20314
USAF U.S. Air Force
Manuals may be ordered from
headquarters of any Air Force Base
VMA Valve Manufacturers Association of
America
1050 17th St., NW, Suite 701
Washington, DC 20036
WMA Wallcovering Manufacturers
Association
355 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10017
Appendix A
WEF Water Environment Federation
601 Wythe St.
Alexandria, VA 22314-1994
WRC Water Resources Council,
Hydrology Committee
U.S. Department of the Interior
C St. between 18th & 19th Sts., NW
Washington, DC 20240
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
PO BOX 450
Findlay, OH 45839-0450
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204
END OF APPENDIX A
A-12
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
supplier's support is required. The integrated commissioning process should have the distinct phases outlined
below.
Bl.2.1 PRE-DESIGN PHASE
The objectives of this phase are to document the owner's vision, requirements and future expectation for
the facility, select the Commissioning Authority, document the initial design intent, and begin
development of the Commissioning Plan. The roles and responsibilities of the owner, the Project
Manager, design team, the Commissioning Authority and contractors must be defined for the
commissioning process.
During pre-design, the commissioning team should include the EPA Project Manager, the Commissioning
Authority, and the design team. The main commissioning tasks of the pre-design phase include:
The EPA Project Manager should send out requests for qualifications for commissioning services,
develop the scope of the commissioning effort, and select a Commissioning Authority and design
team.
The Commissioning Authority assembles the commissioning team and develops a draft design phase
commissioning plan.
The Commissioning Authority recommends the commissioning roles and scope for all members of
the design and construction teams.
The Commissioning Authority reviews the design intent for clarity and completeness.
The Commissioning Authority delivers a draft design phase commissioning plan and comments on
the Design Intent document.
Bl.2.2 DESIGN PHASE
The goals of commissioning during the Design Phase are to ensure that the concepts for building systems
developed during pre-design are included in subsequent design phases; that the design record document is
updated; and that commissioning is adequately reflected in the contract documents. During the design
phase, there are four primary commissioning activities: developing the Basis of Design and expanding
design intent as necessary; performing commissioning-focused design reviews(s); expanding and
modifying the Commissioning Plan to include the construction phase; and developing commissioning
specifications for the construction phase. The main design phase commissioning tasks are outlined
below:
The Commissioning Authority updates the design phase commissioning plan started during pre-
design phase.
The design team develops Basis of Design documentation. The Commissioning Authority reviews
this documentation for clarity, completeness, constructability and compliance with the EPA's design
intent. In addition, all changes to the initial design intent must be documented, reviewed, and
approved by the Commissioning Authority and EPA.
The Commissioning Authority attends selected design team meetings and formally reviews and
comments on the design at 15%, 35%, 65% and 100% stages of development. Potential system
performance problems, energy-efficiency improvements, indoor environmental quality issues,
operation and maintenance issues, and other issues should be addressed in these design reviews. The
Commissioning Authority ensures that the design follows and meets the original design intent. The
Commissioning Authority also makes recommendations to facilitate commissioning and improve
building performance.
The Commissioning Authority, in cooperation with the A/E team, develops detailed commissioning
specifications to be included by the design team in the final contract document. The commissioning
specifications detail the commissioning process and the scope of work for all participants including
contractors and vendors. The specifications comprise commissioning-related requirements that will
be the contractor's responsibility, including equipment installation and start-up, documentation, and
functional testing.
While writing the specifications for Commissioning, the Commissioning Authority develops a
Preliminary Commissioning Plan. This plan becomes a scope of work that names actual components
and systems in the design documents. The Commissioning Authority shall develop procedures for
each of the systems to be commissioned. This interim plan should be incorporated into the
specifications to give contractors the best possible idea of his part in the process. In addition, the
B-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
Commissioning Authority shall recommend enhanced language regarding training, documentation,
installation, and system checkout for inclusion in non-commissioning sections of the specifications.
The commissioning provider compiles and updates the design records as design progresses.
The Commissioning Authority shall deliver regular commissioning progress reports and comments
and recommendations from design reviews to EPA project manager. The Commissioning Authority
shall submit updates of the design records, initial construction phase commissioning plan and
commissioning specifications.
The review performed by the Commissioning Authority shall determine that the documents are
consistent with the design intent, specify commissionable systems, include inspection and testing
details, include equipment parameters that can be verified, incorporate a layout that allows testing
and maintenance and fully describe the Commissioning process for the contractors. The
Commissioning Authority will also review the contract documents to confirm that each piece of
equipment or system is capable of being tested and has objective performance parameters that can be
confirmed.
The EPA Project Manager shall monitor the design phase process and shall make certain that procedures
are in place within the team so issues the Commissioning Authority raises are reviewed and the team
comes to a consensus. If a consensus cannot be reached on an issue, the team should document the issue,
and EPA should provide a decision and direction in consultation with the appropriate design professional.
1.2.3 BIDDING/CONTRACT NEGOTIATION PHASE
The Commissioning Authority will participate in the pre-bid conference presenting a brief overview of
the commissioning process and answer specific questions posed by the Contractors. The Commissioning
Authority may review bids, alternates, and addendums to ensure that commissioning and the Owner's
Project Requirements are not compromised by the changes.
1.2.4 CONSTRUCTION PHASE
The main construction phase commissioning tasks are listed below:
The Commissioning Authority will update the construction phase commissioning plan, which
includes a list of all systems and specific equipment and components to be commissioned, the
process to be followed, communications, reporting and documentation protocols, and an estimated
schedule for the commissioning process. The final draft of the Commissioning Plan will be
completed during the early stages of construction after all equipment submittals have been approved
and before equipment has arrived on the site. The Plan will start with the requirements on a system-
by-system basis and on the actual design and the equipment ordered. The Commissioning Plan
developed at this point will have detailed information on the support required from contractor and
responsible subcontractor personnel.
The Commissioning Authority will coordinate a construction phase commissioning kickoff meeting
that include the EPA project manager, construction manager, design team, Commissioning Authority,
and respective representatives from the general contractor and mechanical, electrical, controls, and
TAB subcontractors. At this meeting, the Commissioning Authority outlines the roles and
responsibilities of each project team member, specifies procedures for documenting commissioning
activities and resolving issues, and reviews the preliminary construction phase commissioning plan
and schedule.
The Commissioning Authority will attend periodic planning meetings to update parties involved in
commissioning. During the initial stages of construction, the commissioning provider may attend
regular construction meetings and hold a line item on the agenda. Later in construction the
commissioning provider may coordinate entire meetings devoted to commissioning issues.
The Commissioning Authority will develop and keep a record of issues and findings throughout the
construction phase commissioning process that require further attention, tracking, or correction.
The Commissioning Authority reviews and comments on contractor submittals of equipment to be
commissioned during the normal submittal review process and forward them to the EPA Project
Manager and designer.
B-3
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
The Commissioning Authority should assist the EPA Project Manager in monitoring the development
of coordination drawings to ensure interface between trades.
The Commissioning Authority reviews the O&M manual to ensure that it complies with the
specifications, is complete, clear, and is well organized and accessible for use by the O&M staff.
The Commissioning Authority will visit the construction site periodically, note any conditions that
might affect system performance or operation and provide construction observation reports.
1.2.4.1 FIELD VERIFICATION
The Field Verification phase of commissioning starts when the Commissioning Plan is completed,
equipment is ordered, and construction begins. The Field Verification phase lays the foundation for
equipment startup by confirming that installed equipment can function in a safe and effective manner.
The Commissioning Authority will develop and provide construction checklists for installation, start-
up and initial checkout of the equipment and systems to the contractor for execution. These
checklists will also incorporate manufacturers' requirements. The Commissioning Authority will
witness some of the start-up execution and will spot-check selected items on the checklist prior to
functional testing. The contractor will execute construction checklists provided by the
Commissioning Authority and equipment manufacturer and submit them to the Commissioning
Authority for review before functional testing begins.
1.2.4.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
Functional performance testing is conducted to verify that the performance of all integrated systems
meets the specified objectives defined in the Design Intent. Functional performance testing ensures
that equipment and systems are installed correctly, tested, and adjusted so that they operate
efficiently and according to design intent under a variety of conditions. This testing is intended to
document the completion and performance of all components, equipment and systems.
Functional performance testing should progress from functional verification to performance
verification in sequence, from individual equipment or components through subsystem operation to
complete systems. At the end of the testing, every mode of building and system operation, all system
equipment, system interfaces, and every item in the control sequence description will be proven
operational under all normal operational modes including load, in all seasons, and under abnormal or
emergency conditions.
a. Functional Verification
Equipment is to be started up for the first time with required factory representatives in
attendance. The equipment should be tested at all required speeds and preliminary programming
should be completed as required to allow subsequent safe and easy starting.
The Commissioning Authority will develop written test procedures manage, witness, and
document the functional tests, with the actual hands-on execution of the test procedures
typically carried out by subcontractors, particularly the controls contractor.
Acceptable performance is reached when equipment or systems meet specified design
parameters under full-load and part-load conditions during all modes of operation, as
described in the commissioning test requirements of the specifications and commissioning
plan (some testing will be completed by monitoring system operation over time through the
building automation system or data loggers a few weeks after occupancy).
The Commissioning Authority will not re-test systems that have been tested and approved
by regulatory authorities. The Commissioning Authority will prepare test plans, assist with
execution and document tests of commissioned equipment overseen by regulatory
authorities.
The Commissioning Authority should assist in the programming of the BAS to include the
trend logging of a selected group of key performance indicators. These indicators include
temperatures and pressures for boiler and chiller operations, duct pressures, outside
airflows, and some typical variable air volume terminals operating parameters, and unitary
equipment performance parameters.
B-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
b. Performance Verification
After equipment has been proved at startup, the Commissioning Authority to confirm that the
pieces work together will conduct Functional Performance Tests, which are the heart of the
Commissioning process.
Functional tests will include checking BAS parameters, such as programmed addresses,
sensor calibration factors, occupied/unoccupied programming, and trend logging.
Programming charts, sequences of operation, block wiring diagrams, and wiring termination
diagrams should be included in the report. All BAS tuning variables, such as response
times, damping variables, delays, and interlocks, should be included in the report.
Laboratory and other critical facilities will have the control input and output points loop
calibrated (inputs will be simulated with signal generators).
The subcontractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing report will be checked for accuracy
by sampling the report data. If a substantial failure rate is encountered, all failures should
be corrected and a different sample chosen for a repeat test. The EPA project manager may
elect to have the Commissioning Authority to perform TAB.
As Functional Performance Tests proceed, the Commissioning Authority may find a number
of items that do not appear to work as intended. The Commissioning Authority will need to
perform a varying amount of re-testing because of system and equipment failures during the
initial testing. The amount of retesting that is paid for by the EPA and the amount that is
passed back to the Contractor should be very clearly spelled out in the construction contract.
The Commissioning Authority will verify the accuracy of facility record drawings.
1.2.4.3 FINAL AND POST ACCEPTANCE PHASE
When the requirements of the contract documents and Commissioning Plan have been completed and
satisfactorily documented and any additional required documentation has been completed, submitted
to the design professionals, and accepted, the Commissioning Authority should recommend Final
Acceptance of the building and all building systems. The recommendation is issued subject to any
outstanding issues or deficiencies that cannot be resolved until a future date.
The Post-Acceptance Phase is an important step in ensuring the effective, ongoing functioning of a
facility's building systems. As use and function of facilities change, the building systems need to be
adapted to the changing requirements of occupancy and utilization. It is appropriate to maintain a
history of the facility, recording changes and verifying the effect on the previously commissioned
systems.
The Post-Acceptance Phase includes the completion of any outstanding functional performance tests,
a post-construction review, at a set or variable period after construction, evaluation and verification
that the design intent of the building is still being met and ongoing monitoring.
Post-acceptance commissioning is the continued adjustment, optimization, and modification of the
HVAC system to meet specified requirements. It includes updating documentation to reflect minor
set point adjustments, system maintenance and calibration, major system modifications, and
provision of ongoing training of operations and maintenance personnel. The objective of post-
acceptance commissioning is to maintain the performance of the building systems throughout the
useful life of the facility in accordance with the current design intent.
A post-construction review should be scheduled a set number of years after completion of
construction or in response to significant changes in the facility structure, equipment or in the use of
the facility. As-built documents must be revised to reflect modifications made to any part of the
facility or the building systems. Any change in usage, installed equipment, loads, or occupancy must
be carefully monitored and documented. In addition, any system servicing and maintenance
problems should be documented. If the variations are significant enough to warrant a
recommissioning of the individual systems, or as a method of continued maintenance, an earlier
review should be conducted.
1.2.4.4 DOCUMENTATION
The Commissioning Authority develops the following documentation during construction phase:
B-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
Updated construction commissioning plan
Updated commissioning schedule
Minutes from commissioning meetings
Commissioning progress reports
Reports of submittal reviews
Updates to the commissioning issues
Construction checklists and functional test forms
Report of training completion
Report of O&M manual review
Systems Manual
Commissioning Records.
1.2.5 WARRANTY REVIEW AND SEASONAL TESTING
The successful completion of commissioning should be a requirement for the issuance of the Final
Certificate for Payment. The commissioned building should provide the working environment required
for the occupants and the O&M staff can concentrate on establishing an effective Preventive Maintenance
Program that should work for the life of the building.
The certain parts of the building mechanical system cannot be adequately tested due to the season of the
completion. The commissioning plans should include off-season testing to allow testing certain
equipment under the most appropriate test conditions. The systems should also be tested during the
spring and fall seasons for partial load performance of mechanical systems.
The commissioning contract should provide the EPA with the ability to engage the Commissioning
Authority for occasional, informal consultations throughout the warranty period or during approximately
the first year of building operation.
1.2.6. FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT
By the completion of training the Commissioning Authority should have completed the Commissioning
Final Report. This report should contains copies of the following:
Design Intent
Basis of design
Pre-functional checklists complete
Functional checklists complete
TAB reports
System schematics
Control strategies and set points
Deficiency log
Guidelines for energy accounting.
The Commissioning Final Report, the TAB report, the O&M manuals, and the record drawings and
specifications form the documentation that will be left with the O&M staff. Additional information on
building controls that includes block-wiring diagrams; as-built control diagrams and sequences of
operation will also be included in either the Commissioning Final Report or the O&M manual.
1.2.7. O&M STAFF TRAINING AND DOCUMENTATION
The Commissioning Authority will have a significant positive impact on O&M training:
Recommend the necessary O&M staffing (total personnel, qualifications, and required shifts) to
satisfy the Owner's operational intent.
Develop a facility preventive maintenance plan. This task is directly tied to the development of the
O&M staffing. The Commissioning Authority shall develop a facility preventive maintenance plan
making best use of O&M staffing.
The Commissioning Authority shall reviews the operation and maintenance manuals and verifies that
they are complete and available for training sessions. Prepare framed instructions showing the
sequence of operations and interoperability for major systems and component.
B-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
The Commissioning Authority ensures that the contractor uses adequate training plans and that the
training is completed per the contract documents. The Commissioning Authority should provide
training agendas to the contractor's/manufacturer's trainers to review and use.
The Commissioning Authority shall compile a Systems Manual consisting of the design record; space
and use descriptions; single line drawings and schematics for major systems; control drawings;
sequences of control; a table of all set points and implications when changing them; time-of-day
schedules; instructions for operation of each piece of equipment for emergencies, seasonal
adjustment, startup and shutdown; instructions for energy savings operations and descriptions of the
energy savings strategies in the facility; recommendations for recommissioning frequency by
equipment type; energy tracking recommendations; and recommended, standard trend logs with a
brief description of what to look for in them. The Systems Manual with O&M Manuals will form the
Master O&M Manual.
The Commissioning Authority shall prepare a recommended list of spare parts, bench stock, and
special tools/equipment required for the first year of building operation.
The Commissioning Authority shall deliver a final commissioning report, summarizing the
commissioning effort with the Commissioning Authority's view on each piece of commissioned
equipment relative to installation and start-up, functional performance, O&M documentation, and
training. The Commissioning Record also contains the commissioning plan, functional tests,
individual commissioning reports, reviews, and issues log.
1.2.8. COMMISSIONING PROCESS MATRIX
Task
Description
Documents
Commissioning Authority
Selection
Commissioning Contract
Design Team Kickoff
Meeting
Owner Performance
Requirements (OPR)
Basis of Design
35% Plan Review
65% Plan Review
95% Plan Review
Develop an RFP for commissioning services.
Negotiate, prepare and execute a
commissioning contract.
Initial ""Kickoff Meeting" with the Design Team
to establish the purpose and proposed
process for commissioning the facility and to
establish the individual roles.
In cooperation with the EPA and the Design
Team, the Commissioning Authority prepares
a design intent summary document.
The design team prepares a Basis of Design
document.
Complete thorough reviews of the 35% plan
documents and submitted criteria (engineering
calculations, system selection and major
component selection).
Review 65% Design Documents (zoning
requirements, specifications, typical room
layouts, system main layouts, riser layouts,
standard details, schedules and coordination
requirements).
Draft Construction Commissioning Plan,
Commissioning Specifications and
Supplemental Commissioning Language for
other sections.
Review 95% Design Documents
Updated Commissioning Plan, Final
Commissioning Specifications
RFP Format
Scope of Work
Scoring Matrix
Commissioning Contract
Design Commissioning
Plan
Owners Performance
Requirements (OPR)
Summary
Draft Basis of Design
Comments
Comments
Draft Commissioning
Plan, Commissioning
Specifications
Commissioning
Specifications
Draft Construction
Commissioning Plan
B-7
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
Task
Pre-bid Meeting and
Assistance During
Bidding process.
Construction
Commissioning Kick-off
meeting
Description
Pre-bid meeting to assist contractors in
answering any questions about the systems or
the commissioning process.
An initial commissioning meeting with all
contractors and commissioning team
members to establish the purpose and
proposed process for commissioning this
facility.
Documents
Written Responses or
Recommendations
Final Commissioning
Plan with specific
individual responsibilities
identified.
Duration Schedule for
Commissioning Activities
Duration schedule for the contractors for the
commissioning activities required by the
commissioning plan.
Duration Schedule
Submittal & Shop
Drawing Review
Construction
Commissioning Plan
Review all pertinent approved shop drawings
to support the Commissioning Process.
Submittals & Shop drawings will be reviewed
for commissionability, maintainability and for
compliance to the OPR.
The final commissioning plan will incorporate
all changes established by review with EPA
and the design team. The final commissioning
plan will also include complete FIV, OPT and
FPT protocols for each system.
Commissioning Review
Log
Final Construction
Commissioning Plan
FIV, OPT and FPT
documents and
protocols.
Field Inspection
Verifications (FIV)
Commissioning Team
Meetings
Complete all FIVs
Operational
Performance Tests (OPT)
Inspect the progress of construction with
respect to the systems being commissioned;
verify that the construction complies with the
plans & specifications and construction quality
practices.
Commissioning meetings on a regular basis
with the commissioning team to review
progress of the commissioning effort and
reinforce individual responsibilities.
Complete all field inspection verifications.
Observe or facilitate all equipment and system
start up procedures. The Contractor will
execute all start up and point-to-point tests
and the Cx will witness execution of all OPT's.
FIV Check Sheets, Daily
Log, Commissioning
Issues Log
Commissioning Issues
Log
FIV check sheets,
Commissioning Issues
Log
Completed OPT's,
Commissioning Issues
Log
Functional Performance
Tests (FPT)
Operator Train ing
Observe and facilitate all FPT testing. FPT's
shall be designed by the Commissioning
Authority and performed by the contractors.
Work with the contractor and owner to
schedule and plan training activities so that
training occurs in a coordinated and coherent
fashion. Contractors and vendors provide all
training.
FPT Check Sheets,
Commissioning Issues
Log
Coordinated Training
Agendas
Prepare Final
Commissioning Report
Deferred (Off season)
Testing
Based on the accumulated commissioning
work completed as described above,
assemble the data into a final commissioning
report.
Conduct any testing required by the
commissioning plan that was deferred from
the acceptance period.
Final Commissioning
Report
Warranty Commissioning
Plan, FPT Test check
sheets
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
Task Description Documents
Ten-Month Warranty Visit Inspect the site and interview building Commissioning Warranty
operating personnel to identify any Issues Log,
outstanding warranty failures and to identify Commissioning report
any persistent equipment failure issues that addenda
should be handled within the warranty period.
1.3 PREVENTIVE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
In order to maintain equipment reliability and optimize facility operation after building turnover,
Commissioning Authority should develop a customized preventive operations and maintenance program. The
goal of a Preventive Maintenance Plan is to improve equipment reliability and increase equipment life. A
functional Operation & Maintenance Plan optimizes facility operation to provide significant energy savings
and comfort benefits.
The Commissioning Authority should be a valuable training source not only for the specifics of operating and
maintaining the commissioned equipment, but also for providing the background information needed to assist
the EPA's O&M staff in understanding system operations and being able to apply practical preventive
maintenance functions.
1.4. RETRO COMMISSIONING AND CONTINUOUS COMMISSIONING
Retro commissioning is a systematic, documented process that identifies low-cost O&M improvements in an
existing building and brings that building up to the design intentions of its current usage. Retro
commissioning identifies and solves comfort and operational problems, explores the full potential of the
facility's energy management system, and ensures that the equipment performs properly after space changes
have been made.
The retrocommissioning process is a project-specific effort. Each project's focus and goals depend on the
needs of the EPA, the budget, and the condition of the facility and equipment. Retro commissioning most
often focuses on:
Reducing energy and demand costs
Bringing equipment to its proper operational state
Reducing occupant complaints
Improving indoor environmental quality
Reducing premature equipment failures
Improving facility operation and maintenance procedures
Retro commissioning project typically occurs in four distinct phases: Planning, Investigation, Implementation,
and Project Hand-off.
The primary tasks for the Planning Phase are developing internal goals and objectives and support for the
project, selecting and hiring a retro commissioning service provider, assemble the team that will see the
project through to completion and develop the retro-commissioning plan.
The primary goals of the Investigation Phase are to understand current operation and maintenance, to identify
issues and potential improvements, and to select the most cost-effective ones for implementation. Tasks
during investigation should include:
Interviewing management and building personnel
Reviewing current O&M practices and service contracts
Spot testing equipment and controls and trending or electronic data logging of pressures, temperatures,
power, air and water flows, and lighting levels and use
Gather and review facility documentation
Begin Assessment and Complete Simple Repairs, begin Master List of Potential Improvements
Develop Diagnostic Monitoring and Test Plans. The retro-commissioning service provider should direct
the functional performance tests and assess and analyze the findings.
Develop an Initial List of Findings
Assemble an interim report describing the findings and recommendations.
The Implementation Phase activities include Implementation of the major cost-effective repairs and
Improvements and verification of results (re-test and monitor).
B-9
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
In the Project Hand-off Phase the retro commissioning process is completed. The final report should include
the following:
Executive summary
The retro commissioning plan
The Master List of Findings with a description of the improvements implemented
A cost/benefits analysis and the actual improvement costs
A list of capital improvements recommended for further investigation
The BAS trending plan and logger diagnostic / monitoring plan and results
All completed functional tests and results
Recommended frequency for re commissioning
Documentation of strategies adopted to optimize systems operation
Updated (or Created) Building Documentation
The retro commissioning service provider either should provide the training or ensure that the
contractor/manufacturer provides adequate training for operating staff and perform deferred testing (seasonal
testing).
Continuous commissioning is similar to retro-commissioning and begins by identifying and fixing HVAC and
comfort problems in the building. In the continuous commissioning, when the commissioning is complete, the
team continues to work together to monitor and analyze building performance data provided by permanently
installed metering equipment. This process works to ensure that the savings achieved from the commissioning
continue to persist over time.
1.5 COMMISSIONING AND LEED BUILDING RATING
Fundamental building systems commissioning is a prerequisite for LEED building rating and requires having
a contract in place to implement the following fundamental best practice commissioning procedures:
Engage a commissioning team that does not include individuals directly responsible for project design or
construction management.
Review the design intent and the basis of design documentation.
Incorporate commissioning requirements into the construction documents.
Develop and utilize a commissioning plan.
Verify installation, functional performance, training and operation and maintenance documentation.
Complete a commissioning report.
Additional System Commissioning has 1 credit point allocated and in addition to the Fundamental Building
Commissioning prerequisite implement the following commissioning tasks:
A Commissioning Authority independent of the design team shall conduct a review of the design prior to
the construction documents phase.
An independent Commissioning Authority shall conduct a review of the construction documents near
completion of the construction document development and prior to issuing the contract documents for
construction.
An independent Commissioning Authority shall review the contractor submittals relative to systems being
commissioned.
Provide the owner with a single manual that contains the information required for re-commissioning
building systems.
Have a contract in place to review building operation with O&M staff, including a plan for resolution of
outstanding commissioning-related issues within one year after construction completion date.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
Commissioning Authority - An independent party with no affiliation to the design team or participating
contractors, who implements the overall commissioning process.
Design Intent - Design Intent defines the benchmark by which the success of a project is judged. It describes
EPA's program for the planned facility, explains the rationale behind the ideas, concepts and criteria for the
facility. The Design Intent document is updated and increased in detail with each phase of the design. The
initial Design Intent document is a detailed explanation of the facilities objectives and its functional and
operational needs, occupancy requirements, general quality of materials and construction, intended levels and
quality of environmental control, performance criteria, environmental needs and budget considerations and
limitations. The Design Intent document is the starting point for the development of the Basis of Design. A
B-10
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
Design Intent document is written by the design team in consultation with the EPA and with an input from the
Commissioning Authority.
Basis of Design - The documentation of the primary thought processes and assumptions behind design
decisions that are made to meet the Design Intent. It shall respond to, and be consistent with, performance
criteria specified in the Design Intent document (Some reiteration of the design intent may be included). The
Basis of Design is written by the design team and describes codes, standards, operating conditions, and design
conditions, weather data, interior environmental criteria, other pertinent design assumptions, cost goals, and
references to applicable codes, standards, regulations and guidelines. The Basis of Design increases in detail
as the design progresses. The Commissioning Authority reviews, comments on, and approves the design
progress submissions.
The commissioning specifications provide the bidders with a clear description of the extent of the required
verification test. They detail what to test, under which conditions to test, acceptance testing criteria and
acceptable test methods. The documentation, reporting, and scheduling requirements for verification testing is
also to be included. The verification procedures, which are developed, should include all functional
performance tests, including the following at a minimum:
Testing, adjusting, and balancing test performance
Equipment performance
Performance of subsystems consisting of combinations of equipment (such as refrigeration cycle, pumps,
chillers, cooling towers, and interconnecting piping)
Performance of the automatic controls in all seasonal modes
Integrated system performance
Performance of all life safety devices and systems as they interface with the subsystems
Architectural and structural system performance
Electrical system performance
Plumbing system performance
Required operation and maintenance training by the contractor, for the owner, his O&M staff and other
relevant staff and the facility's O&M documentation requirements.
Commissioning Plan is a document, or group of documents, that defines the commissioning process at the
various stages of project development. The plan must create a procedure that will verify and provide
documentation that the performance of the building and its individual systems meet the owner's requirements.
Design Phase Commissioning Plan - The commissioning plan developed during the pre-design phase which
outlines each team member's role and responsibilities, sets protocols for communication and reviews,
specifies procedures for documenting commissioning activities and resolving issues, and sets the schedule for
commissioning activities during the design phase of the project. This plan should develop the extent of the
commissioning process and communicate it to all project participants
Construction Phase Commissioning Plan - An extension of the commissioning plan developed during the
design phase, which outlines the roles and responsibilities of each project team member, specifies procedures
for documenting commissioning activities and resolving issues, and sets a schedule for conducting
commissioning activities during the construction phase of the project. It is updated as construction
progresses.
Construction Checklist - A checklist to ensure that the specified equipment has been provided, properly
installed, and initially started and checked out adequately in preparation for full operation and functional
testing (e.g., belt tension, fluids topped, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, voltage balanced,
rotation correct).
Functional Tests - Tests that evaluate the function and operation of equipment and systems using direct
observation or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the assessment of the system's ability to perform
within the parameters set up in the Basis of Design. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during
low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures,
fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system's sequences of operation to
determine whether they respond as the sequences state. Functional tests are performed after construction
checklists are complete.
Performance Metrics - verification that a specific element in the Design Intent has been met. Performance
Metrics are identified throughout the design of the project with as many as possible being generated during the
B-ll
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix B - Commissioning Guidelines
development of the Design Intent. The design team and Commissioning Authority are responsible for
Performance Metrics development.
LEED - a voluntary, consensus-based, market-driven building rating system, which was created to provide a
complete framework for assessing building performance and meeting sustainability goals based on well-
founded scientific standards. The LEED rating system is organized into five environmental categories.
One of them - Energy & Atmosphere - has prerequisites and number of credits allocated to building
commissioning.
B-12
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.1 Genera!
This section contains the sample room data sheets for various typical functional layouts for EPA laboratories and
laboratory support spaces. These data sheets should be used as guides and references during the programming
and design process of a specific project. Final laboratory layouts must be developed with the individual users
and their research requirements as provided in Section 1, General Requirements, as well as in other related
sections of this Manual. Specific criteria and requirements should be verified by the design team with EPA,
local, state, and federal regulatory agencies.
C.2 Typical Room Requirements
C.2.1 ROOM DATA SHEETS
The room data sheets for typical room arrangements are shown in the following laboratory and laboratory support
room layouts. Specific requirements, developed during the programming process with the individual user of the
room, shall be in accordance with Section 1, General Requirements, as well as in other relative sections, of this
Manual. The final layouts for these areas will be the responsibility of the design professional with approval by
EPA.
C.2.1 STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
Standard requirements for each area or room, as indicated in the various sections of this Manual, must also be
defined for each specific laboratory facility Program of Requirements (POR). A listing and definitions of typical
standard requirements, symbols, and abbreviations are provided in the following subsections as examples.
C.3 Definition of Standard Requirements
All standard requirements shall be in accordance with codes and with all other requirements of this document.
The narrative and illustrative description of requirements in this section and elsewhere in this Manual shall take
precedence over drawings. If an item is described in the narrative but not shown in a drawing, that is not to be
taken as a waiver of the requirement. The schematic drawings are provided for illustrative purposes only.
C.3.1 LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION STANDARD
The required construction for all laboratory units shall be classified as Fire Hazard Class B laboratories per NFPA
45.
C.3.2 ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS
Refer to General Requirements., Section 1, and other relative sections in tins Manual for the architectural
standards to be utilized in EPA projects,
C.3.3 MECHANICAL STANDARDS
Refer to Special Construction, Section 13, and Mechanical Requirements, Section 15, of this Manual for the fire
protection and mechanical standards to be utilized in EPA projects.
C3.4 ELECTRICAL STANDARDS
Refer to Electrical Requirements, Section 16, of this Manual for the fire alarm and electrical standards to be
utilized in EPA projects.
C-l
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4 Laboratory Symbols List
Room data sheets and design drawings shall be prepared utilizing the following graphic symbols for laboratory
modules as they apply to a specific project.
PLUMBING SYMBOLS
A AIR.COMP, (100PSIGU.O.N.)
LA AIR, LAB (15 PSIG U.N.O)
C02 CARBON DIOXIDE
RO REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER
SS SAFETY SHOWER
CW COLD WATER
CHWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
CHWR CHILLED WATER RETURN
HW HOT WATER
IZO CUP SINK
LAB SINK
|CJ FD FLOOR DRAIN
[O| FLD FUNNEL DRAIN
|Q| FO FLOOR SINK
{Xj- SHUT-OFF VALVE
EW EYE WASH
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
D
rd
DIMMER SWITCH Q)
20A SGL REC 120V wQ
20A DUPLEX REC 120V Q
30A SGL REC 208V SINGLE PHASE S Q
30A SGL REC 120* 208V SINGLE PHASE IM
20A SGL REC 208V 3 PHASE <]
SPECIAL PWR ERC WP
ฎฎ PEDESTAL BOX WITH REC EP
-Q P . SURFACE RACEWAY EM
rO
JUNCTION BOX
WARNING LIGHT
LIGHT FIXTURE
SAFE LIGHT
DISC SWITCH
TELEPHONE
WEATHERPROOF
EXPLOSION PROOF
EMERGENCY CKT
COMPUTER OUTLET
C-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
'2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4 Laboratory Symbols List (Continued)
ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS
CO
n
0
Cup Sink
Epoxy Sink
Stainless Steel Sink
Fume Hood
Biological Safety Cabinet
Government Furnished Equipment
Umbilical 5" x 18"
Snorkle
150 cfin Exhaust (U.N.O.)
COlfflTERTOP MATERIALS
Epoxy Top
Acid Resistant Plastic Laminate
Stainless Steel
C-3
-------
July 2004 _ Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
APPENDIX C
TYPICAL LABORATORY ROOM EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1 1 MODULE LABORATORY
EXAMPLE 2 2 MODULE LABORATORY
EXAMPLE 3 3 MODULE LABORATORY
C-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
ROOM DATA SHEETS
The following information shall be provided for each laboratory space.
SPACE TYPE
Information given to generally describe type of laboratory space by function.
AREA
Information provided as part of a specific space requirement for a particular project.
Example is used to illustrate a Typical J-Module Laboratory.
SPACE NAME
Information provided as part of specific description of space usage for a particular project.
ACTIVITY / PROGRAM NAME
Information provided to assign responsibility for a specific space to a particular Branch / Section for a project.
OCCUPANCY
Identifies number of personnel in a given space for a defined period of time.
BUILDING SECTION
Identifies functional grouping in which space is to be located.
ADJACENCIES
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.
OPERATION / TASK DESCRIPTION
Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.
LIST OF REQUIREMENTS
Ceiling - height and type
Doors size and type
Flooring - material
Walls materials and finishes
Window Treatment
Special Construction - if required
Outfitting
Fixed Laboratory Equipment - list of casework requirements such as:
Metal Casework - "C" Frame
LF of Base Cabinets - 36 Inches High
LF of Wall Cabinets - Glass Door
LF Adjustable Wall Shelving - 2 Tier
* Epoxy Top
C-5
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
Fume Hood with Services
Vented Solvent Storage Cabinet Below Hood
Vented OSHA Cabinet (30 Gallon)
* Laboratory Sink
Cup Sink
Laboratory Desks with Bookshelves, Tackboards and File with Storage Cabinets
Mechanical Service Requirements
* Temperature and Humidity Control
100 Percent Supply and Exhaust - 24 Hour-Operation
Electrical Service
120V/20 Amp AC at Fume Hood
120V/20 Amp Receptacles 24 Inches on Center in Raceway
208V/30 Amp-1 Phase, 4 Wire AC at Fume Hood
Disconnect Switch at Door for 120/208V Laboratory Power
Telephone
Cable Tray
Emergency Power
Fluorescent Lighting - 100 Footcandles at 36 Inches AFF
Security
Computer Outlets
Plumbing/Fire Protection
Industrial Hot and Cold Water, Sink
* Industrial Cold Water, Cup Sink
Deionized Water
* Laboratory Drain (Acid Waste)
Compressed Air, 15 psi Serrated Connection
* Nitrogen Cylinder
Laboratory Vacuum
Water Sprinklers
Dry Chemical and Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher in Safety Niches
Safety Shower/Eyewash Station
CHEMICALS USED IN THIS ROOM
Types mid quantities used are to be identified during programming by the design professional in consultation with
representative facility users ami with approval by EPA. The fallowing is used as an example:
Small quantities of organic solvents, acids, and bases (generally less than 1 gallon of each at any one time) in
concentrations ranging from weak solutions to concentrated materials. Standard reagent chemicals in gram proportions.
MOVABLE EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS
List of Government Furnished/Government Installed (GFGI) equipment and furnishings is to be identified during
programming by the design professional in consultation with representative facility users and approval by EPA- The
following is used as an example:
Analytical Balances
' Bench Top Drying Ovens
Refrigerators
Other
C-6
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 1
1 MODULE LABORATORY
-------
M:
' I;'
6' FUME
HOOD'
Figure 1
. ROOM DATA SHEET
1 MODULE / 1 FUME HOOD
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 2
2 MODULE LABORATORY
-------
6* FUME
HOOD
6'
HOOD
Figure 3
ROOM DATA SHEET
2 MODULES / 2 FUME HOODS-
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines July 2004
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 3
3 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
-------
6' FUME
HOOD
6' FUME
HOOD
I
6' FUME
HOOD
Figure 6
ROOM DATA SHEET
3 MODULES / 3. FUME HOODS.'
intrnC,. '<ป '!'
-------
July 2004 Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
END OF APPENDIX C
C-10
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Appendix D
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental
Response, Compensation, and Liability
Act
CFCs chlorofluorocarbons
cfm cubic feet per minute
C-Frame cantilevered frame
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CMD Contracts Management Division
CMU concrete masonry unit
COR Contracting Officer's Representative
CPSC Consumer Products Safety
Commission
CPVC chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
CRF critical radiant flux
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute; Cooling Tower
Institute
CVTS cabled video teleconference space
db dry bulb
dB decibels
dBA decibels of sound measured on an
A-scale
DC direct current
DDC direct digital controls
DHHS Department of Health and Human
Services
DI deionized water
OOP dioctyl phthalate
DOT U.S. Department of Transportation
DTD Developmental Toxicology Division
EA Environmental Assessment
EC AO Environmental Criteria and Assessment
Office
EBRD
EIS
EM
EMCS
EMF
EMS
EMT
EPA
ERDA
BSD
ETD
ฐF
ฐF db
FAA
FFL
FGCC
FM
FMSD
fpm
GC/MS
GDHS
GECD
gpm
GPS
GSA
GTD
HAZMAT
Ecosystem Exposure Research
Division
environmental impact statement
engineering memorandum
energy management control system
electromagnetic fields
energy management system
electrical metallic tubing
Environmental Protection Agency
Energy Research and Development
Administration
Emission Standards Division
Environmental Toxicology Division
degrees Fahrenheit
degrees Fahrenheit dry bulb
Federal Aviation Administration
carpet pill test
Federal Geodetic Control Committee
Factory Mutual
Facilities Management and Services
Division
feet per minute
gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer
geometric design of highways and
streets
Global Emission and Control Division
gallons per minute
Global Positioning System
General Services Administration
Genetic Toxicology Division
hazardous materials
D-2
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix D
HCFC hydrochlorofluorocarbon
HD heavy duty
HEFRD Human Exposure and Field Research
Division
HEPA high-efficiency particulate aerosol
HERL Health Effects Research Laboratory
HFC hydrofluorocarbon
HID high-intensity discharge
HMSF hazardous materials/waste storage
facility
hp horsepower
HP high pressure
HPLC high-performance liquid
chromatography
HRMD Human Resources Management
Division
HTW high-temperature water
HVAC heating, ventilation, and air-
conditioning
IAQ indoor air quality
IBM International Business Machines
IBC International Building Code
ICC International Code Council
ICS Industrial Controls and Systems
ICP inductively coupled plasma
ICSSC Interagency Committee on Seismic
Safety in Construction
ID inside diameter
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer's
Association
"K" Rated transformers specially constructed for
use with nonlinear loads
kV kilovolt
kVa kilovolt - ampere
kwd kilowatt demand
kwh kilowatt hours
LAN local area network
LCC life cycle cost
LCCA life cycle co st analysis
LEL lower flammable/explosive limit
LEEDS Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design Green Building
Rating System
LIMS Laboratory Information Management
Systems
low E glass low emissivity glass
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers
Association
MDF main distribution frame
MEF main entrance frame
ug/L micrograms per liter
mg/L milligrams per liter
MIL-F Military Federal Specification
MRDD Methods Research and Development
Division
MS mass spectrometer
MSDS material safety data sheets
N value number of blows per linear foot
NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality
Standards
NACE NACE International
NAD North American Datum
NAVD North American Vertical Datum
NC noise criteria
NCF network control facility
NC/LC noncombustible/limited combustible
NCMA National Concrete Masonry
D-3
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Association
NCPD National Contracts Payment Division
NDPD National Data Processing Division
NEBB National Environmental Balancing
Bureau
NEC National Electrical Code
NEHRP National Earthquake Hazard Reduction
Program
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
NEPA National Environmental Policy Act
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NGVD National Geodetic Vertical Datum
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration
NRC noise reduction coefficient
NSC National Safety Code
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NSPC National Standard Plumbing Code
NTD Neurotoxicology Division
NUSF net usable square feet
OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards
OAR Office of Air and Radiation
OARM Office of Administration and
Resources Management
OD Office of the Director; outside diameter
ODF ozone depletion factor
OID Owners Insurance Underwriters
ORD Office of Research and Development
OSA outside air ventilation systems
Appendix D
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
PB polybutylene
PBX private branch exchange
pCi/L picocuries per liter
PCI Precast Concrete Institute
PCI-MNL Precast Concrete Institute Manual
PDU power distribution unit
ph phase
plf pounds per linear foot
POR program of requirements
psf pounds per square foot
psi pounds per square inch
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
PURPA Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act
PVC polyvinyl chloride
PVDF polyvinylidine fluoride
QATSD Quality Assurance and Technical
Support Division
R (values) thermal resistance
RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery
Act
RD relative humidity
RSD Research Support Division
RTECS Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical
Substances
SCS Soil Conservation Service
SDR-PR standard dimension ratio - pressure
rated
SDWA Safe Drinking Water Act
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture
Association
D-4
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Appendix D
SFPB
SFO
SHEMD
Sustainable Facilities Practices Branch
solicitation for offer
Safety, Health and Environmental
TSD
U-factor
UFAS
Technical Support Division
a coefficient of heat loss
Uniform Federal Accessibility
Management Division
SHEMP Safety, Health and Environmental
Management Program
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning
Contractors National Association
SNAP Significant New Alternatives Policy
STC sound transmission class
STL sound transmission loss
TC telecommunication closet
TIA traffic impact analysis
TM technical memorandum
Standards
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTP unshielded twisted pair
VAV variable air volume
VOA volatile organic analysis
VCP visual comfort probability
VCR video cassette recorder
wb wet bulb
END OF APPENDIX D
D-5
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Concrete Reinforcement 3-1
Concrete, Requirements (General) 3-1
Coal Fly Ash, in Concrete 3-1
Codes 3-1
Design and Construction 3-1
Inspection and Testing 3-3
Concrete Structures, Repair and Restoration 3-3
Condensers 15-14
Conductors 16-5
Confined Spaces 1-10
Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume Hoods . . . 15-27
Construction Materials 1-5
Control Systems, See Temperature Control Systems
Conveying Systems, Building 14-1
Corrosive Atmosphere 16-24
Cooling Towers 15-11, 15-14
Countertops 10-4
Culture Water 15-38
Curtains 9-6
Dead Loads 1-13
Decks
Cementitious 3-2
Steel 5-1
Deionized Water System 15-37
Design Considerations
Environmental 1-4
Structural 1-10
Design Principles 1-1
Design Process 1-1
Design Submittals 1-2
Development Codes. See Codes, Development
Dewatering 2-14
Disaster Evacuation System 16-35
Distribution Systems. See Electrical; Natural Gas;
Water
Doors 8-1
Exit 8-2
Exterior 8-1
Fire 8-1
Identification 10-1
Interior 8-1
Laboratory 8-2
Drain, Waste and Vent Lines 15-34
Drainage. See Street Drainage
Draperies 9-6
Drinking Fountains 15-38
Index
Dry Filtration (Air) Systems 15-33
Dry-Marker Boards 10-1
Ductbanks and Cable 16-3
Ducts 15-24
Access Panels 15-25
Fabrication 15-24
Fire Dampers 15-25
Insulation 15-25
Noise Control 13-1
Earthwork 2-14
Effluent Cleaning 15-31
Electrical Service Entrance 16-4
Equipment 16-5
Metering 16-5
Overhead Services 16-5
Service Capacity 16-5
Underground Services 16-5
Electrical Systems
Distribution 2-27, 16-3
Redundancy 16-4
Installations 16-1
Interior 16-6
Electromagnetic Fields 1-6
Elevators 14-1
Capture Floor 14-1
Chemical Transport Use 14-1
Recall 14-1
Signage 14-1
Smoke Detectors 14-1
Emergency Eyewash Units 15-36
Emergency Lighting 16-14
Emergency Power System 16-16
Emergency Generator 16-17
Emergency Loads 16-18
Uninterruptible Power Supply 16-18
Emergency Safety Showers 15-36
Energy Conservation
General 1-5
HVAC (Control Schemes) 15-5, 15-10
Lighting 16-1, 16-15
Energy Management Control Systems. See Automatic
Temperature Control Systems.
Energy Metering 15-11
Energy Star 1-4
Environmental Considerations
Design Requirements 1-5
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Index
Electrical Systems 16-3, 16-24
Finishes 9-1
Siting 2-2
Environmental Justice 2-11
Environmental Rooms 10-5, 15-20
Equipment. See also specific equipment
categories 11-1
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms 11-1, 15-3
Erosion and Sedimentation Control 2-23
Escalators 13-3, 14-1
Evacuation System, Disaster 16-35
Evaporative/Adiabatic Cooling 15-4
Exhaust, Laboratory. See also Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Plume Study 15-31
Exit Lighting and Markings. See Lighting; Signage
Expansion 1-5
Explosive Atmosphere 16-24
Exposed Concrete Flooring 9-5
Exterior Building Materials 1-11
Extreme Cold 16-24
Eyewash Units, Emergency. See Emergency Eyewash
Units
Facility Siting 2-11
Fan Control, Variable-Air-Volume 15-10
Fans/Motors 15-19
Final Finishing Material. See Finishes, Interior
Finished, Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Finishes, Interior 9-1
Finishes, Wall. See Wall Finishes, Paint, and Covering
Fire Alarm System 16-25
Fire Barrier Walls 13-2
Fire Department Access 1-21, 2-18
Fire Doors 8-1
Fire Extinguishers, Portable 10-1, 13-6
Fire Protection 13-3
Systems 13-4
System Size and Zoning 13-4
Water Supplies 13-3
Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls,
Air-Handling Systems 15-10
FireWalls 13-2
Fire Zones 16-30
Flame Spread and Smoke Limitations 9-2
Flammable Gas Systems 15-40
Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets 15-32
Floodplain and Wetlands Development 2-23
Floor Treatments. See also Carpet; Ceramic;
Exposed Concrete; Vinyl 9-3
Fluorescent Fixtures. See Lighting Fixtures
Foundations 1-16
Fuel Storage 15-16, 15-22
Fume Hoods, Laboratory. See also specific
hood types)
Certification 15-26
Effluent Cleaning 15-31
Exhaust 15-30
Face Velocities 15-26
Horizontal Sashes 15-30
Location 10-4
Mainfolding 15-30
Noise 15-29
Testing and Balancing 15-41
Furnishings
Building 12-1
Laboratory. See also Cabinets, Laboratory .... 10-1
Site 2-16
Gas. See Natural Gas; Nonflammable and
Flammable Gas
Generators and Battery Units 16-14
Geotechnical Investigation 2-5
Glare (Lighting) 16-15
Glassware Washing Sinks 15-36
Glove Boxes 15-31
Green Building Certification 1-4
Green Lights. See Energy Star
Grounding 16-10
Automatic Data Processing Power 16-23
Groundwater Investigation 2-6
Grout 4-1
Halon Fire Extinguishing Systems 13-6
Handicapped Access 1-8
Electrical 16-2
Laboratory 1-9
Toilet Facilities 15-37
Hardscape Requirements 2-18
Harmonics 16-6
Hazard Segregation 2-13
Heat Generation and Distribution, Central Plant . 15-20
Heating and Cooling Coils 15-19
Heating and Cooling, Simultaneous 15-9
Heating and Cooling Systems, Two-Pipe Combination
15-17
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Heating Equipment 15-16
Heating Systems 15-15
Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning. See
HVAC
Heliports. See Airports and Heliports
High-Technology Equipment. See Equipment
Horizontal Sashes 15-30
Hose Bibbs 15-40
Humidity Control 15-9
HVAC Design Criteria 15-2
Energy Efficiency 15-5
Equipment Sizing 15-4
Inside Design Temperatures 15-2
Outside Design Temperatures 15-3
HVAC Systems 15-13
Air Conditioning 15-13
Chillers 15-13
Condensers 15-14
Cooling Towers 15-14
Heating Equipment 15-16
Illuminance Levels 16-12
Interaction 1-8
Interior Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Intrusion Detection Systems 16-33
Janitor Closets 1-20
Joints, Building 1-15
Laboratory Air Volume/Exchange. See Air
Volume/Exchange, Laboratory
Laboratory Cabinets. See Cabinets, Laboratory
Laboratory Casework. See also Cabinets; Fume
Hoods; Shelving 10-2
Laboratory Doors 8-2
Laboratory Exhaust. See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Fume Hoods. See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Power Requirements. See Power
Requirements, Laboratory
Laboratory Service Fittings 15-36
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary 15-39
Lamps and Ballasts 16-14
Land Resources 2-1
Landscaping 2-14
Lavatories. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Layout and Clearances, Equipment 11-1
Lead-Based Paint 9-1
LEED 1-4
Light Diffusers 16-15
Index
Lighting Fixtures. See also Lamps and Ballasts
Fire Safety 16-14
Selection 16-13
Lighting Systems, Exterior 16-15
Building 16-15
Parking Lot 16-15
Roadway 16-15
Signs (Electric) 16-15
Traffic Control 16-15
Lighting Systems, Interior 16-13
Automatic Data Processing Areas .... 16-15, 16-23
Controls 16-12
Emergency (Battery Units) 16-13
Energy Conservation 16-14
Exit 16-35
Lightning Protection Systems 16-22
Liquid Chalk Boards 10-1
Liquid Nitrogen and Liquid Argon Distribution . 15-41
Live Loads 1-13
Load Calculations
HVAC 15-5
Structural Design 1-11
Loading Facilities 2-19
Loads, Building 1-13
Dead Loads 1-13
Live Loads 1-14
Seismic Loads 1-15
Snow Loads 1-14
Wind Loads 1-14
Magnetic Boards 10-1
Masonry
Accessories 4-2
Codes and Specifications 4-1
Inspection and Testing 4-2
Reinforced 4-2
Unit 4-2
Mechanical Equipment. See Equipment; Plumbing;
and other specific systems
Metals, Miscellaneous 5-1
Metering. See Electrical Metering; Energy Metering
Microwave Communications 16-25
Modules, Laboratory 1-16
Electrical 16-9
Moisture Transport 7-1
Monumental Stairs 13-3
Monumentation 2-7
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Index
Mortar 4-1
Motor Controllers and Disconnects 16-9
Natural Gas Distribution Systems 2-27, 15-41
Noise Control 13-1
Air Handling and Air Distribution 15-18
Fume Hoods 15-31
Piping and Ducting 13-1
Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas Systems . . . 15-40
Open Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Paint
Accent 9-6
Colors, Wall and Ceiling 9-6
Lead-Based 9-1
Reflectance 9-5
Panel and Curtain Walls 7-1
Panelboards 16-7
Parking Facilities 2-19
Hazard Segregation 2-13
Lighting 16-16
Partitions, Wood and Plastic. See also Panel and
Curtain Walls; Spandrel Walls 6-1
Pedestrian Access 2-20
Penetrations 13-3
Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods 15-28
Piping
Noise Control 13-1
Plumbing 13-1
Planning and Design, Site 2-9
Plumbing 15-34
Fixtures 15-38
Piping 15-34
Safety Devices 15-36
Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust) 15-33
Power Factors (Electrical) 16-2
Power Requirements, Laboratory 16-12
Power Supply Lines, Overhead 16-3
Power Systems. See also Electrical Systems
Automatic Data Processing Power 16.11
Emergency Power 16-17
Pre-design Process 1-1
Pre-engineered Metal Buildings 5-2
Primary Distribution 15-3
Professional Qualifications, Site Designers 2-15
Pump sand Pumping Systems (H VAC) .. 15-18,15-21
Quality Assurance/Quality Control 1-24
Raceways 16-6, 16-24
Radioisotope Hoods 15-29
Reception 1-18
Recording Systems 16-24
Recreational Requirements (Site) 2-18
Reflectance. See Paint
Reinforced Masonry. See Masonry
Restrooms 1-20, 15-38
Retaining Walls 1-13
Room Numbering 10-1
Room Air Change Rates 15-2, 15-4
Safety Alarm System 16-31
Safety Showers, Emergency. See Emergency Safety
Showers
Saltwater Atmosphere 16-24
Satellite Dishes 16-25
Security 1-23
Systems 16-32
Sedimentation Control. See Erosion and Sedimentation
Control
Seismic Loads 1-15
Seismic Requirements (Electrical) 16-22
Service (Electrical) Entrance. See Electrical Service
Entrance
Service Fittings, Laboratory 15-36
Setback Mechanism 15-18
Shafts 13-3
Shelving, Laboratory 10-3
Shoring and Underpinning 2-14
Shower Stalls. See also Emergency Safety
Showers 15-39
Signage
Elevator 14-1
Exit Markings 16-35
Exterior 2-17, 16-16
Interior 10-1
Sinks. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Site
Development 2-6
Evaluation 2-4
Influences 2-1
Investigation 2-3
Planning and Design 2-9
Preparation 2-14
Surveys 2-3
Site Access Systems 16-33
-------
July 2004
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Siting
Building 2-12
Facility 2-11
Laboratory 2-12
Smoke Detection Controls. See Fire and Smoke
Detection and Protection Controls
Smoke Detectors, Elevator 14-1
Snow Loads 1-14
Solid Waste Collection Systems 2-28
Sound Dampening 13-2
Space Heaters 15-16
Spandrel Walls 7-2
Special Purpose Hoods 15-29
Special Room Requirements 1-20
Janitor Closets 1-20
Restrooms 1-20
Sprinklers, See Automatic Sprinkler Protection
Standpipes and Hose Systems 13-6
Steam Distribution Systems 15-18
Steam Generation 15-21
Steel Decks 5-1
Steel Joists 5-1
Steel, Structural
Codes and Standards 5-1
Inspection and Testing 5-2
Stormwater Management 2-22
Stormawater Conveyance 2-23
Stormwater Quality 2-23
Stormwater Retention and Detention 2-23
Street Drainage 2-22
Structural Design Requirements 1-13
Structural Steel. See Steel, Structural
Structural Support, Equipment 11-1
Submittals 1-2
Substations 16-7
Sun Shading 8-3
Surveying 2-6
Switches 16-3
Tack Boards 10-1
Telecommunications Systems 2-28, 16-24
Television Broadcast Systems 16-25
Temperatures, Design
Inside Design Temperature 15-3
Outside Design Temperatures 15-4
Index
Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning
(HVAC Systems) 15-41
Thermal and Moisture Requirements 7-1
Thermal Resistance 7-1
Tile Flooring. See Vinyl Tile; Ceramic Tile
Toilet Facilities 15-37
Accessibility 15-38
Transformers 16-4
Transportation Systems 2-2
Trim and Incidental Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Underpinning. See Shoring and Underpinning
Uninterruptible Power Supply 16-19
Unit Masonry. See Masonry
UPS. See Uninterruptible Power Supply
Utilities and Support Services 2-24
Vacuum Systems 15-42
Variable-Air-Volume Hoods 15-28
Variable-Air-Volume Systems, Fan Control . . . . 15-10
Vehicle Access and Circulation 2-18
Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement. See also
Transportation Systems 2-18
Ventilated Enclosures (other than fume hoods) . . 15-31
Ventilation Control, Mechanical 15-10
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms 11-1, 15-5
Ventilation-Exhaust Systems 15-4
Ventilation Rates 15-2
Equipment rooms 11-1, 15-3
Laboratories 15-2, 15-26
Vertical Openings and Shafts 13-2
Atriums 13-2
Escalators 13-3
Monumental Stairs 13-3
Penetrations 13-3
Shafts 13-3
Vibrating, Equipment, Support of 5-1
Vibration Isolation 13-1
Video Conference Rooms 16-24
Vinyl Flooring, Seamless 9-5
Vinyl Tile 9-5
Wall Finishes, Paint and Covering 9-2
Waste Heat Recovery Systems 15-5
Waste, Laboratory. See Hazardous Waste Handling;
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary
Waste, Solid. See Solid Waste
Wastewater Collection Systems 2-26
Water Chillers 15-13
-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2004
Index
Water Conservation 1-6, 15-39
Water Distribution Systems
Culture Water 15-38
Deionized Water 15-37
Fire Protection 13-3
HVAC 15-17
Industrial Non-Potable 15-38
Potable 2-24, 15-37
Water Metering 15-34
Water Supply 15-33
Waterfront Construction. See also Coastal
Development 2-14
Watershed Development 2-22
Wetlands Development. See Floodplain and
Wetlands Development
Wind Loads 1-14
Window Covering 9-6
Windows 8-2
Fixed Systems 8-2
Height 8-2
in Interior Partitions and Walls 8-3
Storefront and Curtain Wall Systems, Safety .... 8-2
Sun Shading 8-3
Wood and Plastics. See also Partitions 6-1
------- |